Ir1430 - 1435 SM E

imageRUNNER 1435/1430 Series
Service Manual Rev1
Product Overview
Technology
Periodic Service
Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Service Mode
Installation Appendix
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the inconsistent with local law.
products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not
apply to your locality. Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks
Corrections of the individual companies.
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements
or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this Copyright
manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may
changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the
edition of this manual. consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2015
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Explanation of Symbols Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.
Check. 1x Remove the claw.
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
Check visually. 1x Insert the claw. 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal
Check a sound. Push the part.
name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the
electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the
Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable. front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
1x
power.
Disconnect the power 2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
1x Connect the connector.
cable. "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
Remove the cable/wire
from the cable guide or wire Turn on the power. In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked
1x
saddle. in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines
are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
Install the cable/wire to the
1x Turn off the power.
cable guide or wire saddle.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
Service Information bulletins.
1x Remove the screw. 1x Loosen the screw.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service
Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults
in the machine.
1x Install the screw. 1x Tighten the screw.

Contents
Printer Model---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
Cross Sectional View-------------------------------------------------------------1-10
Control Panel----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
Power Switch-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
Description of Control Panel----------------------------------------------------1-12
0 Safety Precautions Control Panel--------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-12
Laser Safety---------------------------------------------------------------------0-6 2 Technology

Handling of Laser System---------------------------------------------------0-6
Basic Configuration------------------------------------------------------------2-2
Turn Power Switch ON-------------------------------------------------------0-7
Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
Power Supply-------------------------------------------------------------------0-7
Basic Sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
Safety of Toner------------------------------------------------------------------0-7 Basic Operation Sequence---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-7
Original Exposure and Feed System--------------------------------------2-3
Toner on Clothing or Skin--------------------------------------------------------- 0-7
Construction-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
Notes when Handling the Lithium and Ni-MH Batteries--------------0-7 Specifications / Controls / Functions---------------------------------------------------- 2-3
Notes before it Works Serving----------------------------------------------0-8 Main Configuration Parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-3
Points to Note at Cleaning---------------------------------------------------0-8 Basic Operation--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5
Notes on Assembly / Disassembly-----------------------------------------0-8 Basic Sequence------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-5
Points to Note when Tightening a Screw------------------------------------- 0-9 ADF Operation Mode-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
1 Product Overview Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-11
Product Lineup------------------------------------------------------------------1-2 Reader Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11
Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-2 ADF Unit-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-12
Option---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2 Pickup Control-------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-12
Feature---------------------------------------------------------------------------1-3 Feed Control---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-12
Product feature---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3 Original Reverse Control-----------------------------------------------------------------2-15
Delivery Control-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-16
Specifications-------------------------------------------------------------------1-3
Original Detection--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-16
Product Specifications------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
Dust Detection Control--------------------------------------------------------------------2-17
Productivity (Print speed)--------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
Image Processing------------------------------------------------------------------2-18
imageRUNNER 1435----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
Outline-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-18
imageRUNNER 1430----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5
CIS Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-19
Paper Type--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
Main Controller PCB-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-21
Pickup------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-6
Jam Detection----------------------------------------------------------------------2-22
Name of Parts-------------------------------------------------------------------1-7
Service Tasks-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-23
External View------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-7
Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-23
ADF Model------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-7
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-23
Copyboard Model---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------------------------2-23 Fixing System----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-38
Actions when Replacing the Parts-----------------------------------------------------2-23 Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-38
Main Controller--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-24 Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-38
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-24 Specifications / Controls / Functions---------------------------------------------------2-38
Configuration / Function------------------------------------------------------------------2-24 Main Configuration Parts-----------------------------------------------------------------2-39
Main controller PCB------------------------------------------------------------------------2-24 Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-40
Laser Control System------------------------------------------------------- 2-25 Fixing Temperature Control--------------------------------------------------------------2-40
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Print Temperature Control----------------------------------------------------------------2-40
Outline-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Down Sequence Control------------------------------------------------------------------2-44
Specifications / Controls / Functions---------------------------------------------------2-25 User Mode Related to Fixing Grade---------------------------------------------------2-45
Main Configuration Parts-----------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Paper Loop Amount Control before Fixing-------------------------------------------2-45
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-26 Protection Features------------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Control System Configuration-----------------------------------------------------------2-26 Work of Service--------------------------------------------------------------------2-47
Laser Lighting Timing Control-----------------------------------------------------------2-27 Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-47
BD signal--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-27 Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-47
Light Intensity Control---------------------------------------------------------------------2-27 List of Periodical Servicing---------------------------------------------------------------2-47
Laser Scanner Motor Control------------------------------------------------------------2-27 Actions when Replacing the Parts-----------------------------------------------------2-47
Laser OFF Control--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-28 Pickup / Feed System------------------------------------------------------- 2-48
Service Task-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-28 Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-48
Periodically Replacing Parts-------------------------------------------------------------2-28 Specifications / Controls / Functions---------------------------------------------------2-48
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-28 Parts Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-48
Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------------------------2-28 Diagram of Paper Paths------------------------------------------------------------------2-50
Action when replacing parts-------------------------------------------------------------2-28 Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-51
Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-29 Pickup Block---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-51
Construction-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-29 Cassette Pickup Assembly---------------------------------------------------------------2-51
Specifications / Controls / Functions---------------------------------------------------2-29 Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly--------------------------------------------------------2-52
Main Configuration Parts-----------------------------------------------------------------2-29 Fixing/Registration Assembly------------------------------------------------------------2-53
Image Formation Process----------------------------------------------------------------2-30 Duplex/Delivery Assembly----------------------------------------------------------------2-53
Basic Sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------2-31 JAM Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-54
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-32 Work of Service--------------------------------------------------------------------2-55
Drum Unit-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-32 Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-55
Developing Assembly----------------------------------------------------------------------2-34 Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-55
Transfer Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-36 List of Periodical Servicing---------------------------------------------------------------2-55
Service Tasks-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-37 Actions when Replacing the Parts-----------------------------------------------------2-55
Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-37 External Auxiliary System-------------------------------------------------- 2-56
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-37 Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-56
List of Periodical Services----------------------------------------------------------------2-37 Software Counter---------------------------------------------------------------------------2-56
Actions when Replacing the Parts-----------------------------------------------------2-37 Fan---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-58
Power------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-59 Corrective Processing---------------------------------------------------------------------2-75
Power-Saving Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-59 Power Supply Control---------------------------------------------------------------------2-76
Work of Service--------------------------------------------------------------------2-60 Sleep Operation during a Process-----------------------------------------------------2-76
Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-60 Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information-----
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-60 2-76
List of Periodical Servicing---------------------------------------------------------------2-60 Procedure for Export/Import Using the Control Panel (Service Mode)--------2-76
Actions when Replacing the Parts-----------------------------------------------------2-60 Procedure for Export/Import Using Remote UI (Service Mode)----------------2-78
Embedded RDS-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-61 Procedure for Export/Import Using Remote UI ([System Management Settings]
Product Overview------------------------------------------------------------------2-61 Menu)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-79
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-61 List of Items Which Can Be Imported-----------------------------------------2-83
Features and benefits---------------------------------------------------------------------2-61 Settings/Registration Basic Information-----------------------------------------------2-83
Major Functions-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-61 System Management Settings----------------------------------------------------------2-86
Limitations---------------------------------------------------------------------------2-62 Preferences----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-90
Service Mode Menu Transmission Function-----------------------------------------2-62 Service Mode Settings--------------------------------------------------------------------2-91
Service cautions--------------------------------------------------------------------2-63
E-RDS Setup------------------------------------------------------------------------2-63 3 Periodic Service
Confirmation and preparation in advance--------------------------------------------2-63 Periodical Service Operation Item-----------------------------------------3-2
Steps to E-RDS settings------------------------------------------------------------------2-64 Periodically Replaced Parts------------------------------------------------------ 3-2
Initializing E-RDS settings----------------------------------------------------------------2-64 Consumable Parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-2
Report output procedure------------------------------------------------------------------2-65 List of Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
FAQ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-65 Cleaning------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------2-67
Error code and strings------------------------------------------------------------2-68 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM)------------------ 2-71
Parts List-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-2
Function Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------2-71
External / Internal Cover---------------------------------------------------------- 4-2
Purpose for Using the Function---------------------------------------------------------2-71
Front-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2
Combination of Information Exported/Imported by DCM, Means, and Storage
Rear--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2
Locations--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-72
Main Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-3
Compatibility---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-72
Main Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3
Specifications-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-73
PCB------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-4
Specifications Related to DCM Files--------------------------------------------------2-73
Solenoid------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5
Specifications Related to Department ID Management---------------------------2-73
Specifications during Execution of a Process---------------------------------------2-73 Motor----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5
Process after Import-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-74 Sensor--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6
Specifications Related to Address Books--------------------------------------------2-74 Fan------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6
Limitations---------------------------------------------------------------------------2-75 Switch---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-7
Job Control-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-75 Clutch---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-7
Control Characters-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-75 Others---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-8
External Cover/Interior System---------------------------------------------4-9 Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit-----------------------------------------4-18
Removing the Front Cover Unit------------------------------------------------- 4-9 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-18
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-9 Adjustment after Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------4-18
Removing the Rear Cover-------------------------------------------------------- 4-9 Cleaning the Copyboard Glass Unit-------------------------------------------4-19
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-9 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-19
Removing the Right Cover------------------------------------------------------4-10 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-19
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-10 Cleaning the Stream Reading Glass------------------------------------------4-19
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-10 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-19
Removing the Front Upper Cover--------------------------------------------- 4-11 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-19
Preparation----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-11 Removing the CIS Unit-----------------------------------------------------------4-19
Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-11 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-19
Removing the Left Front Cover------------------------------------------------- 4-11 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-19
Preparation----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-11 Adjustment after Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------4-20
Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-11 Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF)--------------------------- 4-21
Removing the Left Rear Cover-------------------------------------------------4-12 Layout---------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-21
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-12 Removing the ADF Unit----------------------------------------------------------4-21
Removing the Front Right Cover-----------------------------------------------4-12 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-21
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-12 Adjustment after Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------4-22
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-12 Removing the ADF Pickup Unit------------------------------------------------4-23
Removing the Delivery Tray-----------------------------------------------------4-13 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-23
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13 Cleaning the ADF Pickup Unit--------------------------------------------------4-24
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-24
Removing the Control Panel Unit----------------------------------------------4-13 Removing the ADF Separation Pad-------------------------------------------4-24
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-24
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13 Cleaning the ADF Separation Pad---------------------------------------------4-25
Removing the Feeder Cover----------------------------------------------------4-14 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-25
Removing the ADF Rear Cover------------------------------------------------4-14 Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit-----------------------------------------4-26
Removing the Document Tray--------------------------------------------------4-15 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-26
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-15 Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit-------------------------------------------4-28
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader)----------------------- 4-16 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-28
Layout---------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-16 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-28
Removing the Scanner Unit-----------------------------------------------------4-16 Cleaning the ADF Delivery Roller----------------------------------------------4-29
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-16 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-29
Controller System------------------------------------------------------------ 4-30 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-43
Removing the Main Controller PCB-------------------------------------------4-30 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-43
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-30 Cleaning the Transfer Guide----------------------------------------------------4-44
After Replacing the Main Controller PCB---------------------------------------------4-31 Fixing System----------------------------------------------------------------- 4-45
Removing the Engine Controller PCB----------------------------------------4-32 Removing the Fixing Assembly-------------------------------------------------4-45
After Replacing the Engine Controller PCB------------------------------------------4-32 Remove the Fixing Film Unit----------------------------------------------------4-46
Removing the Power Supply PCB---------------------------------------------4-33 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-46
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-33 Removing the Pressure Roller--------------------------------------------------4-51
Removing the HVT PCB---------------------------------------------------------4-34 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-51
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-34 Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide-------------------------------------------------4-53
Removing the Control Panel PCB---------------------------------------------4-35 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-53
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-35 Pickup/Feed System-------------------------------------------------------- 4-54
Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 4-36 Removing the Left Door Unit----------------------------------------------------4-54
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit---------------------------------------------4-36 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-54
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-36 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray---------------------------------------------4-55
Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 4-37 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-55
Removing the Toner Cartridge--------------------------------------------------4-37 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-55
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-37 Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit--------------------------------4-55
Removing the Drum Unit---------------------------------------------------------4-37 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-55
Remove the Developing Assembly--------------------------------------------4-38 Removing the Main Drive Unit--------------------------------------------------4-57
Adjustment after Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------4-40 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit------------------------------------------------4-59
Removing the Developing Cylinder-------------------------------------------4-40 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-59
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-40 Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit-----------------------------------------4-60
Removing the Transfer Roller---------------------------------------------------4-42 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-60
Removing the Separation Static Charge Eliminator----------------------4-43 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller-------------------------------------4-61
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-61
Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller----------------------------------------4-62 Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit------------------------------------------------- 5-8
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-62 Main Controller PCB--------------------------------------------------------------- 5-9
Installation of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit--------------------------------------4-65 Actions when Replacing the Main Controller PCB---------------------------------- 5-9
Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller--------------------------------4-66 Engine Controller PCB----------------------------------------------------------- 5-11
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-66 Actions when Replacing the Engine Controller PCB------------------------------ 5-11
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-66 Adjustment of Image Position--------------------------------------------- 5-12
Installation of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller------------------------------------4-68 Pickup/ Feed System-------------------------------------------------------------5-12
Removing the Registration Roller----------------------------------------------4-69 Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (front side)--------------------------5-12
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-69 Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (back side)--------------------------5-13
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-69 Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (front side)------------------------5-13
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller---------------------------4-71 Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (back side)-----------------------5-14
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-71 Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)----------------------5-14
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-71 Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (1-sided)-----------------------------5-14
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad------------------------4-72 Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (1-side)----------------------------5-15
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-72 Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit)--------------------------5-15
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-72 Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (1-sided)-----------------------------5-15
Removing the Duplex Roller ---------------------------------------------------4-73 Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (front side)--------------------------5-16
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-73 Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (back side)--------------------------5-16
Removing the Delivery Reverse Roller---------------------------------------4-74 Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (front side)------------------------5-17
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-74 Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (back side)-----------------------5-17
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-74 Adjustment of Magnification Ratio (front side)--------------------------------------5-18
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller-------------------4-75 Adjustment of Magnification Ratio (back side)--------------------------------------5-18
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-75
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-75 6 Troubleshooting
Initial Check---------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
5 Adjustment Initial Check Item List-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-2
Basic Adjustment---------------------------------------------------------------5-2 Each Unit / Function System Check Item List------------------------------- 6-2
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts----------------------------------------- 5-2 Test Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-4
Adjustment of Image Position---------------------------------------------------- 5-2 Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-4
Pickup Feed System------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-2 Select the Test Print TYPE------------------------------------------------------- 6-4
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)-------------------------------- 5-3 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-4
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit)------------------------------------ 5-3 How to View the Test Print-------------------------------------------------------- 6-5
Actions when Replacing Parts----------------------------------------------5-4 Grid (TYPE = 0)------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-5
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)----------------------- 5-4 Halftone (TYPE = 1)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-5
Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit-------------------------------------------------- 5-4 Solid black (TYPE = 2)--------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-6
Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit-------------------------------- 5-6 Solid white (TYPE = 3)--------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-6
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF)---------------------------------- 5-8 17 gradations (TYPE = 4)----------------------------------------------------------------- 6-7
Troubleshooting Items--------------------------------------------------------6-8 Outline----------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
Troubleshooting Items------------------------------------------------------------- 6-8 Outline of Service Mode----------------------------------------------------------- 8-2
Image Failure------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-8 Back Up of Service Mode--------------------------------------------------------- 8-2
Edge Dirt--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-8 Service Mode Structure----------------------------------------------------------- 8-3
Feed Failure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-9 Screen Flow of Service Mode--------------------------------------------------- 8-3
Irregular pitch (94mm) of the drum unit ----------------------------------------------- 6-9 Caution when Changing the Setting Value----------------------------------- 8-3
Operation Failure------------------------------------------------------------------6-10 Remote UI Service Mode--------------------------------------------------------- 8-4
Large Curl------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-10 Function Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-4
Special mode (User mode)------------------------------------------------------6-10 Operating Condition------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-4
Version Upgrade------------------------------------------------------------- 6-12 Usage Method-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-4
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-12 COPIER--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-5
Upgrading by UST-----------------------------------------------------------------6-12 DISPLAY------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-5
System Requirements---------------------------------------------------------------------6-12 MISC-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-5
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-12 CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-5
Downloading System Software---------------------------------------------------------6-13 VERSION-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-6
Upgrading via Internet------------------------------------------------------------6-15 USER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-7
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-15 ERR--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-7
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-15 JAM--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-7
Messages-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-15 ADJUST------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-7
Debug Log--------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-16 ADJ-XY----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-7
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-16 CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-8
Function Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-16 IMG-REG------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-11
Conditions for collecting logs------------------------------------------------------------6-16 PASCAL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-12
Collection procedure-----------------------------------------------------------------------6-16 FEED-ADJ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-12
HV-PRI----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-15
7 Error Code DEVELOP------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-16
CST-ADJ--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-16
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
BLANK-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-17
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
FUNCTION--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-17
Error Code-----------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-17
Error Code---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-3
MISC-P----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-18
Jam Code------------------------------------------------------------------------7-8 MISC-R----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-19
Jam Type------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-8 VIFFNC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-19
Main Unit (including Cassette Feeding Module-AC1)--------------------- 7-9 SPLMAN--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-19
Alarm Code-------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-10 INSTALL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-21
Alarm Code--------------------------------------------------------------------------7-10 CLEAR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-22
SYSTEM--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-23
8 Service Mode OPTION------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-24
BODY------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-24 MODEM---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-47
FNC-SW--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-26 FACULTY-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-48
CUSTOM-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-27 FAX------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-49
DSPLY-SW-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-27 List of SSSW------------------------------------------------------------------------8-49
CLEANING-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-27 List of MENU------------------------------------------------------------------------8-51
IMG-FIX---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-28 List of NUM--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-52
IMG-LSR--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-29
List of NCU--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-53
IMG-TR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-29
TONE------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-53
USER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-30
PULSE-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-53
ENV-SET--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-32
DIAL TONE-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-53
ACC--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-33
2nd DLTN-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-54
LCNS-TR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-33
BUSTONE0----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-54
LCNS-OF-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-36
BUSTONE1----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-54
COUNTER---------------------------------------------------------------------------8-38 REORDRTN---------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-55
DRBL-1----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-38 MULTI------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-55
DRBL-2----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-39 AUTO RX-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-55
LF-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40 CNGDTCT------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-55
TOTAL-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40 SPECIALB------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-56
PICK-UP--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-41 SPECIALN------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-56
FEEDER--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-42 RKEY------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-56
JAM--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-42 PBXDIALT------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-56
I/O--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-42 PBXBUSYT----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-56
R-CON-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-42
FEEDER------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-43 9 Installation
ADJUST------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-43
How to Utilize This Installation Procedure-------------------------------9-2
DOCST----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-43
Symbols in the Illustration-------------------------------------------------------- 9-2
LA-SPD----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-43
Illustrations Used in This Procedure------------------------------------------- 9-2
DOCST2--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-43
DOCST-R-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-43 Checking before Installation-------------------------------------------------9-2
LA-SPD2--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-44 Selecting the Site of Installation------------------------------------------------- 9-2
DOCSTDUP----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-44 Points to Note on Installation------------------------------------------------9-3
FUNCTION--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-44 Unpacking -----------------------------------------------------------------------9-4
MTR-ON--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-44 Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials------ 9-4
FEED-ON-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-44 Checking the Contents-------------------------------------------------------9-5
FEED-CHK-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-44 Installation Procedure---------------------------------------------------------9-6
TESTMODE------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-46 Affixing the Label-------------------------------------------------------------------9-13
PRINT---------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-46 ADF Model only (Except for China / Korea)-----------------------------------------9-13
FAX------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-47 Connecting the Power Cord-----------------------------------------------------9-14
Turning ON the Power -----------------------------------------------------------9-14 Oils and Solvents------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Host Machine Settings (Start Setup Guide)---------------------------------9-14 General Circuit Diagram-------------------------------------------------------- 3
Checking the Operation and the Print Image ------------------------------9-14 General Circuit Diagram------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Connecting to the Network (Network Model only) ------------------------9-15 General Timing Chart----------------------------------------------------------- 4
Connecting to Telephone Line (Fax Model only) --------------------------9-15 Basic sequence at printing from cassette 1 ( A4, 2-sided, 1 sheet )------ 4
Preparation of Telephone Cord ---------------------------------------------------------9-15 Backup Data----------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Basic Setting---------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-16 Soft Counter Specifications---------------------------------------------------- 6
Fax communication test----------------------------------------------------------9-17 Soft counter specifications----------------------------------------------------------- 6
Copy Card Reader-F1------------------------------------------------------ 9-18
Check Item of the Contents-----------------------------------------------------9-18
Points to Note on Installation---------------------------------------------------9-18
Check Items when Turning OFF the Power---------------------------------9-18
Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-18
Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-18
Copy Card Reader-F1---------------------------------------------------------------------9-18
Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1-----------------------------------------------------9-19
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-19
Assembling the Card Reader------------------------------------------------------------9-19
Removing the Covers---------------------------------------------------------------------9-21
Installing the Card Reader Unit---------------------------------------------------------9-23
Setting After Installation----------------------------------------------------------9-28
Control Interface Kit-C1---------------------------------------------------- 9-29
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-29
Handset-K1-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-32
Points to Note on Installation---------------------------------------------------9-32
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-32
Appendix
Service Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Special Tools------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Safety Precautions
■
■Laser Safety
■
■Handling of Laser System
■
■Turn Power Switch ON
■
■Power Supply
■
■Safety of Toner
■
■Notes when Handling the Lithium and Ni-MH Batteries
■
■Notes before it Works Serving
■
■Points to Note at Cleaning
■
■Notes on Assembly / Disassembly
0 Safety Precautions > Handling of Laser System
0-14
Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings,
external covers and interlock switches, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine
during any phase of user operation. Therefore this machine is classified in Class 1 laser
products that are regarded as safe during normal use according to International Standard
IEC60825-1
Handling of Laser System

This machine is classified in Class 1 laser products.
However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and is hazardous when entered
into an eye.
When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings:
• Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path.
• Remove watches and rings before starting the work. (They can reflect the laser beam,
possibly hitting an eye.)
The machine's covers that confine laser beam radiation are identified by means of a warning
label (Figure). If you must open the cover and defeat interlock switches, be sure not to enter
the laser beam into an eye during the work.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist
gefährlich, wenn dieser Strahl in die Augen gerät.
Bei Servicearbeiten am oder in der Nähe des Laserteils zuerst das Hauptgerät abschalten.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen,
auf jeden Fall die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
• Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den
Lichtpfad des Laserstrahls bringen.
• Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen. (Reflektierende
Laserstrahlen könnten sonst in die Augen geraten.) F-0-1
Die Geräte-Abdeckungen, die Laserstrahlen reflektieren können, werden durch einen
besonderen Warnaufkleber gekennzeichnet (siehe Bild).
Muss die Abdeckung geöffnet und die Sicherheitssperre ausgeschaltet werden, besondere
Vorsicht walten lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gerät.
0-14
0
Safety Precautions > Handling of Laser System
0 Safety Precautions > Notes when Handling the Lithium and Ni-MH Batteries
0-15
Turn Power Switch ON Safety of Toner

The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and energy saver key.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power About Toner
mode, sleep mode). The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
CAUTION:
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Main Power Switch

Toner on Clothing or Skin
• If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it
off with water.
• Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the
fibers of the cloth.
• Toner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.
F-0-2
Notes when Handling the Lithium and Ni-MH

Power Supply Batteries
CAUTION: CAUTION:
1. As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
in a fire or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug
completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).
power cord and the extension cord.
2. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.

Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.
F-0-3
0-15
0
Safety Precautions > Notes when Handling the Lithium and Ni-MH Batteries
0 Safety Precautions > Notes on Assembly / Disassembly
0-16
Notes before it Works Serving Notes on Assembly / Disassembly

Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
CAUTION: • Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling
At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and works. Wait "1" minutes until the energy is radiated after disconnecting the power plug on
disconnect the power plug. assembling/disassembling.
• If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
• Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when
assembling.
• To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding
wire and the varistor. Ensure to use the right screw type when assembling.
Points to Note at Cleaning • Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
• Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.
• The fuse is mounted on the neutral line of The AC driver PCB. It may result in an electrical
CAUTION: shock, in case that the power plug is connected while assembling/disassembling after fuse
When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that blowing. Symbols or caution, shown below, is indicated on the PCB also describes this
the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling. note.
F-0-4
• During disassembly, reassembly or transportation of the printer, remove the cartridge if
required.
When the cartridge is out of the printer, put it in a protective bag even in a short period of
time to prevent the adverse effect of light.
• Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce
the possibility of damage caused by static electricity.
• When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached, be
sure to remove the rating plate or the product code label and put it to the new part.
0-16
0
Safety Precautions > Notes on Assembly / Disassembly
0 Safety Precautions > Notes on Assembly / Disassembly > Points to Note when Tightening a Screw
0-17
Points to Note when Tightening a Screw
• For reduction in weight, thin plates are used in some parts in this machine.
• In case a triangle symbol is marked next to a screw hole as shown in the figure, strongly
tightening the screw may damage or deform the screw hole.
• In case a triangle symbol is marked next to a screw hole, take care not to apply too much
force when tightening the screw.
F-0-5
The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value.
Type of Screws
RS tight W Sams Binding TP
Fastened member Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin
Tightening M4 Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
torque 1.6 1.6 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8
(N*m) M3 Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
T-0-1
* For PCB, refer to the tightening torque value of resin (fastened member).
Type of Screws
RS tight W Sams Binding TP
F-0-6
0-17
0
Safety Precautions > Notes on Assembly / Disassembly > Points to Note when Tightening a Screw
1 Product Overview
■
■Product
■
■Feature
Lineup
■
■Specifications
■
■Name of Parts
1
Product Overview
1 Product Overview > Product Lineup > Option
1-2
Product Lineup Option

Control Interface Kit-C1
Host machine Handset-K1
Copy Card Reader-F1

Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1
FL Cassette-AW1
F-1-1
Cassette Feeding
iR1435 iR1430 Module-AC1
Basic mode i model iF model P model J model
F-1-2
with Platen with ADF with ADF Printer with Platen
Coverl and Fax model Coverl Product name Required options, conditions, etc.
Print Speed (A4R/LTRR) 35/37ppm 30/31ppm Cassette Feeding Module-AC1 A4 type / Universal type
Class Euivalence in iR1020/1021/1024/1025 Series
LAN Port Yes Yes Yes Yes -
FL Cassette-AW1 Standard or option (A4 type / Universal type)
USB Port USB2.0 Device / USB2.0 Host / USB1.1 Host USB2.0 Device
Option Cassette Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Conversion Feeding Copy Card Reader-F1 • Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1 is required.
Module • Installation with Handset is not available.
FL Cassette- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes • Installation with Control Interface Kit-C1 is not available.
AW1 Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1 • Copy Card Reader-F1 is required.
• Installation with Handset is not available..
Copy Card Yes Yes Yes - -
Reader-F1 Handset-K1 Installation with Copy Card Reader is not available.
Copy Card Yes Yes Yes Yes -
Reader
Attachment Control Interface Kit-C1 Installation with Copy Card Reader is not available.
-E1
Handset-K1 - - Yes - -
(EUR Only ) T-1-2
Control Yes Yes Yes - -

Interface
Kit-C1
T-1-1
1-2
1
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Option
1 Product Overview > Specifications > Product Specifications
1-3
Feature Specifications
Product feature Product Specifications

Copyboard Original stream reading, original fixed reading
Body Desktop
Reader unit Light source type LED(RGB)
- The mold frame was adopted.
Photosensitive medium φ30 OPC
Image reading method CIS
Small-size/weight-saving
Reproduction method Indirect electrostatic method
Exposure method Laser exposure system
Drum unit Charging method Roller charging
- Installed at the time Development method Dry one-component jumping development
of factory shipment.
Transfer method Roller transfer
Improved installability Separation method Curvature and static eliminator
Pickup method • Cassette: Retard separation method
• Multi-purpose pickup tray: Pad separation method
Toner Fixing method On demand
- The toner of the low Delivery method Face down (Inner delivery)
melting was adopted.
Reproduction ratio 25 to 400%
Main Controller Main body frame
Paper loading improvement - System collaboration with - The mold frame was adopted. Drum cleaning method Cleaning blade
(High-temperature and other ADVANCE models Toner type Single component magnetic negative charge toner
high-humidity environment ) is possible .
Small-size/weight-saving Toner replenish method Toner cartridge
Improved installability Toner level detection Yes
Top image margin 2.5 +/-1.5 mm (front Side)
2.5 +/-2.0 mm (back Side)
F-1-3
Left image margin 2.5 +/-1.5 mm (front Side)
2.5 +/-2.0 mm (back Side)
Warm-up time Power ON: 20 sec or less
Number of image gradations 256 gradation
Reading resolution 600 × 600dpi
Writing resolution 600 × 600dpi
First print time 5.0 sec or less
Paper type (Cassette) Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 90 g/m2), color
paper (64 to 90 g/m2)
Paper type (Multi-purpose transparency (60 to 63 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 90 g/m2), color
pickup tray) paper (64 to 90 g/m2), Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2), heavy paper 1
(91 to 105 g/m2), heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2), OHP, labels,
Envelopes (No.10(COM10), Monarch, ISO-C5,DL)
Paper size A4 A4R
(Cassette 1) Universal A4R, LTRR, LGL, 16K
Paper size (Multi-purpose A4R, B5R A5R, LTRR, LGL, STMTR, EXECR, 16K, Envelopes
pickup tray) (No.10(COM10), Monarch, ISO-C5, DL), Custom paper size (76 x
216 mm to 127 x 356 mm),
1-3
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Product Specifications
1 Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > imageRUNNER 1435
1-4
Pickup capacity Cassette1/2: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Productivity (Print speed)
Multi-purpose pickup tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Duplex method Through path duplex
■■imageRUNNER 1435
Noise (LWAd) • imageRUNNER 1435:
Standby: 53dB or less, Printing: 69.9 dB or less (reference) Paper type Size 1-sided 2-sided
• imageRUNNER 1430: Cassette Multi- Cassette Multi-
Standby: 43dB or less, Printing: 68.9 dB or less (reference) pickup purpose pickup purpose
Ozone 1.5mg/h or less
pickup pickup
Power 30cpm 220 - 240V AC, 50Hz/60Hz, 3.5A (Latin America)
Plain paper mode. A4R 35 35 18 18
supply rating 31cpm 120 - 127V AC, 60Hz, 7.5A (Latin America)
Color paper mode. B5R - 15 - -
35cpm • 220V AC, 50Hz, 3.8A (CHINA)
A5R - 15 - -
Recycled paper
• 220 - 240V AC, 50Hz/60Hz, 3.8A (Europe, Asia, Latin America,
mode. LGL 30 15 16 9
Korea, India)
(64 to 90 g/m2) LTRR 37 37 18 18
37cpm 120 - 127V AC, 60Hz, 7.8A (North America, Latin America, Brazil)
Power Maximum 1.5 KW or less
EXECR - 15 - -
STMTR - 15 - -
consumption Standby 15 W or less
Deep Sleep 2.0 W or less 16K 16 16 10 10
Dimensions (W x D x H) 545 mm × 457mm × 475.3 mm (ADF model) OFFICIO 33 15 18 9
Foolscap 30 15 16 9
545 mm × 457mm × 422.5 mm (Copyboard model)
Transparency A4R - 18 - -
545 mm × 457mm × 382.5 mm (Printer model)
mode. B5R - 15 - -
Environment temperature / "Checking before Installation"(page 9-2).
(60 to 63 g/m2) A5R - 15 - -
humidity range
Heavy paper 1 LGL - 15 - -
Weight • Minimum (Printer model):
21.44kg ( not included the drum unit and toner cartridge) mode. LTRR - 18 - -
• Maximum (ADF model): (91to 105 g/m2) EXECR - 15 - -
23.74kg ( not included the drum unit and toner cartridge) STMTR - 15 - -
T-1-3 16K - 15 - -
OFFICIO - 15 - -
FOOLSCAP - 15 - -
Heavy paper 2 A4R - 12 - -
mode. B5R - 15 - -
(106 to 128 g/m2) A5R - 15 - -
LGL - 10 - -
LTRR - 12 - -
EXECR - 15 - -
STMTR 15
16K 15
OFFICIO - 10 - -
FOOLSCAP - 10 - -
Envelope mode. Monarch - 12 - -
COM10 - 12 - -
ISO-C5 - 12 - -
DL - 12 - -
OHP mode. A4R - 18 - -
LTRR - 18 - -
1-4
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > imageRUNNER 1435
1 Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > imageRUNNER 1430
1-5
Paper type Size 1-sided 2-sided Paper type Size 1-sided 2-sided
Cassette Multi- Cassette Multi- Cassette Multi- Cassette Multi-
pickup purpose pickup purpose pickup purpose pickup purpose
pickup pickup pickup pickup
Label mode. A4R - 12 - - heavy paper 2 A4R - 12 - -
LTRR - 12 - - mode. B5R - 15 - -
Custom paper 76 x 216 mm to - 5 - - (106 to 128 g/m2) A5R - 15 - -
127 x 356 mm LGL - 10 - -
T-1-4 LTRR - 12 - -
EXECR - 15 - -
■■imageRUNNER 1430 STMTR 15
Paper type Size 1-sided 2-sided 16K 15
Cassette Multi- Cassette Multi- OFFICIO - 10 - -
pickup purpose pickup purpose FOOLSCAP - 10 - -
pickup pickup Envelope mode. Monarch - 12 - -
Plain paper mode. A4R 30 30 18 18 COM10 - 12 - -
Color paper mode. B5R - 15 - - ISO-C5 - 12 - -
Recycled paper A5R - 15 - - DL - 12 - -
mode. LGL 25 15 16 9 OHP mode. A4R - 18 - -
LTRR 31 31 18 18 LTRR - 18 - -
(64to 90 g/m2)
EXECR - 15 - - label mode. A4R - 12 - -
STMTR - 15 - - LTRR - 12 - -
16K 16 16 10 10 Custom paper 76 x 216 mm to - 5 - -
OFFICIO 30 15 18 9 127 x 356 mm
FOOLSCAP 25 15 16 9 T-1-5
Transparency A4R - 18 - -
mode. B5R - 15 - -
(60 to 63 g/m2) A5R - 15 - -
Heavy paper 1 LGL - 15 - -
mode. LTRR - 18 - -
(91to 105 g/m2) EXECR - 15 - -
STMTR - 15 - -
16K - 15 - -
OFFICIO - 15 - -
FOOLSCAP - 15 - -
1-5
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > imageRUNNER 1430
1 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type > Pickup
1-6
Paper Type Paper type Size Multi-purpose Cassette 1 Cassette 2 *1
pickup tray
See the table below for the custom paper size. Heavy paper 1 A4R Yes No No
Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm) (91 to 105 g/m2) B5R Yes No No
Custom paper size 127 to 356 76 to 216 A5R Yes No No
T-1-6 Heavy paper 2 LGL Yes No No
(106 to 128 g/m2) LTRR Yes No No
■■Pickup STMTR Yes No No
BOND EXECR Yes No No
Usable paper types are as follows.
OFFICIO Yes No No
(75 to 90 g/m2)
Paper type Size Multi-purpose Cassette 1 Cassette 2 *1 B-OFFICIO Yes No No
pickup tray M-OFFICIO Yes No No
Transparency A4R Yes No No G-LTRR Yes No No
(60 to 63 g/m2) B5R Yes No No G-LGL Yes No No
A5R Yes No No A-FOOLSCAP Yes No No
LGL Yes No No FOOLSCAP Yes No No
LTRR Yes No No 16K Yes No No
STMTR Yes No No Custom paper size Yes No No
EXECR Yes No No Envelope Monarch Yes No No
OFFICIO Yes No No COM10 Yes No No
B-OFFICIO Yes No No ISO-C5 Yes No No
M-OFFICIO Yes No No DL Yes No No
G-LTRR Yes No No Custom paper size Yes No No
G-LGL Yes No No OHP A4R Yes No No
A-FOOLSCAP Yes No No LTRR Yes No No
FOOLSCAP Yes No No Label A4R Yes No No
16K Yes No No B5R Yes No No
Custom paper size Yes No No A5R Yes No No
Plain paper A4R Yes Yes Yes LGL Yes No No
(64 to 90 g/m2) B5R Yes No No LTRR Yes No No
A5R Yes No No STMTR Yes No No
Color paper LGL Yes Yes Yes EXECR Yes No No
(64 to 90 g/m2) LTRR Yes Yes Yes Custom paper size Yes No No
STMTR Yes No No T-1-7
Recycled paper EXECR Yes No No

*1: Cassette Feeding Module-AC1 (option) is named as Cassette 2 when it is installed.
OFFICIO Yes Yes No
(64 to 90 g/m2)
B-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes
M-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes
G-LTRR Yes Yes Yes
G-LGL Yes Yes Yes
A-FOOLSCAP Yes No No
FOOLSCAP Yes Yes Yes
16K Yes Yes Yes
Custom paper size Yes No No
1-6
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type > Pickup
1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > ADF Model
1-7
Name of Parts [1]

[2]
Front Upper Cover
Front Cover Unit
[3] Cassette 1
External View [4] Front Right Cover
[5] Control Panel
[6] Delivery Tray
■■ADF Model [7] Reader
[8] Document Delivery Tray
[10] [9] [8] [9] Delivery Tray
[10] Feeder Cover
[11] Left Rear Cover
[12] Left Door Unit
[13] Multi-purpose Tray
[11] [7]
[14] Left Front Cover
[6]
[15] Main Switch
[5] [16] Right Cover
[17] USB Port 1
[18] LAN Port
[19] USB Port 2
[20] Handset Terminal
[12]
[21] External Telephone Terminal
[4] [22] Telephone Line Terminal
[23] Rear Cover
[13]
[24] USB Port 3
[14] [1] [2] [3]

F-1-4
[17]
[24] [18]
[19]
[15]
HAND
SET [23]
[20]
[21]
[16]
[22]
F-1-5
1-7
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > ADF Model
1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > Copyboard Model
1-8
■■Copyboard Model [1] Front Upper Cover
[2] Front Cover Unit
[8] [3] Cassette 1
[4] Front Right Cover
[5] Control Panel
[7] [6] Delivery Tray
[9] [7] Reader
[8] Copyboard
[6]
[9] Left Rear Cover
[5] [10] Left Door Unit
[13] Main Switch
[14] Right Cover
[10]
[15] USB Port 1
[16] LAN Port
[4] [17] USB Port 2
[11] [18] Rear Cover
[19] USB Port 3
[12] [2] [3]
[1]
F-1-6
[19]
[18]
[13]
[15]
[16]
[14]
[17]
F-1-7
1-8
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > Copyboard Model
1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > Printer Model
1-9
■■Printer Model [1] Front Upper Cover
[2] Front Cover Unit
[7] [3] Cassette 1
[4] Front Right Cover
[5] Control Panel
[8]
[6] Delivery Tray
[7] Printer Upper Cover
[6] [8] Left Rear Cover
[5] [9] Left Door Unit
[12] Main Switch
[9] [13] Right Cover
[14] USB Port 1
[15] LAN Port
[4] [16] USB Port 2
[10]
[17] Rear Cover
[18] USB Port 3
[11] [2] [3]
[1]
F-1-8
[18]
[17]
[12]
[14]
[13] [15]
[16]
F-1-9
1-9
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > Printer Model
1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > Cross Sectional View
1-10
Cross Sectional View [1] CIS Unit
[2] Delivery Reverse Roller
[3] Delivery Reverse Unit
[27] [26] [25] [24] [23] [22] [21]
[4] Fixing Assembly
[5] Fixing Film Unit
[6] Pressure roller
[28] [7] Laser Scanner Unit
[8] Drum Unit
[29] [9] Photosensitive Drum
[1] [10] Transfer Roller
[2] [11] Duplex Roller
[3] [12] Registration Roller
[13] Cassette 1 Feed Roller
[4] [14] Cassette 1 Separation Roller
[5] [15] Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller
[6] [16] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
[17] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad
[7]
[18] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller
[8] [20]
[19] Developing Assembly
[9] [20] Toner cartridge
[11]
[21] ADF Base
[10] [19]
[22] Original Tray
[12]
[13] [23] Delivery Roller
[14] [24] Delivery Roller
[15] [25] Separation Pad
[16] [26] Pickup Roller
[17] [27] Separation Roller
[28] Feed Roller
[29] Platen Guide
[18]
F-1-10
1-10
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Cross Sectional View
1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > Control Panel > Power Switch
1-11
Control Panel ●● Points to Note on Turning OFF/ON the Power Switch
• To turn off the main power, turn off the main power switch.
■■Power Switch • After power-off (after the main power switch is turned off), do not reactivate the main power
switch until a screen disappears.
●● Types of Power Switch
• Do not turn off the main power while downloading.
Main Power Switch
Energy Saver Key

F-1-11
Equipped switch and key is described below.
[1] Main Power Switch:

Uses to turn OFF / ON the main power.
[2] Energy Saver Key:
Used to shift to power-save mode or to restore it to normal mode.
1-11
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Control Panel > Power Switch
1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > Description of Control Panel > Control Panel
1-12
Description of Control Panel No. Name Function
[6] [2-Sided] Key Press to set 2-sided copies.
■■Control Panel [7] [Paper Selection/Settings] Press to select a paper source, such as a drawer or multi-
Key purpose tray, and register paper size and type.
[8] [Reset] Key Press to reset the settings.
NOTE: [9] [Back] Key Press to return to the previous screen.
A major control panel is used to describe function below as several types of panels are
[10] [▲] Key Press to scroll up or to increase the value.
equipped by specifications and countries.
[▼] Key Press to scroll down or to decrease the value.
[◄] Key Press to return to the previous screen, or move the cursor
to the left.
[►] Key Press to proceed to the next screen, or move the cursor to
[15]
the right.
[5] [6] [7] [11]
[OK] Key Press to confirm an action or setting.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [12] [13] [11] Numeric Keys ([0] - [9] Keys) Press to enter characters and numbers.
[14] [*] Key Press to use tone dialing such as when receiving fax
information services.
[10] [16]
[#] Key Press to enter symbols.
[12] [Clear] Key Press to delete entered characters and numbers.
[22] [19] [13] [Menu] Key Press to specify or register various settings.
[14] [Energy Saver] Key Press to manually set or cancel the Sleep mode.
[9] [17] [18] [15] [ID] Key When a logon screen is displayed, press the key after
entering your logon information such as an ID and PIN.
[8] [21] [20] [16] [Secure Print] Key Press when you start printing secured documents.
[23] [17] [Counter Cheek] Key Press to view the counter values as well as the list of the
equipment that is attached or enabled.
[18] [Start] Key Press to start a job.
[19] [Stop] Key Press to cancel jobs.
[20] [Error] Indicator Flashes when an error occurs.
[21] [Processing/ Data] Indicator Flashes when the device is in operation, is on when there
is a job waiting to be processed.
[22] Display (LCD) During normal operation, displays messages and prompts.
When adjusting the settings, displays your selections, text,
and numbers.
[23] [One-touch] Key Press to quickly specify a destination for sending
documents.
[Address Book] Key Press to display a list of destinations registered in the
Address Book, or to register or edit destinations in the
F-1-12 Address Book.
No. Name Function [Coded Dial] Key Press to use coded dial numbers.
[1] [COPY] Key Press to switch the mode to copy. [Recall Settings] Key Press to recall previously used destinations with settings
[2] [FAX] Key Press to switch the mode to fax. specified for sending documents.
[3] [SCAN] Key Press to switch the mode to scan. [Hook] Key Press to dial without lifting up the handset of the external
telephone, such as when receiving fax information
[4] [DIRECT PRINT] Key Press to switch the mode to memory printing.
services.
[5] [Status Monitor] Key Press to check the status of printing or faxing, to view the
usage history, or to view the network settings such as the [Pause] Key Press to insert pauses in the fax number.
IP address of the machine. T-1-8
1-12
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Description of Control Panel > Control Panel
2 Technology
■
■Basic
■
Configuration
■Original Exposure and
Feed System
■
■Main Controller
■
■Laser Control System
■
■Image Formation System
■
■Fixing System
■
■Pickup / Feed System
■
■External Auxiliary System
■
■Embedded RDS
■
■Setting Information
Export/Import Function
(DCM)
2
Technology
2 Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic Operation Sequence
2-2
Basic Configuration Basic Sequence

■■Basic Operation Sequence
Functional Configuration
Operation Sequence is controlled by the engine control on the controller PCBs. Each
The host machine is constructed by following 6 functional system blocks; Original Exposure sequence, from main power switch ON until the main motor stops, is described as below. See
and Feed System, Controller System, Laser Control System, Image Formation System, Fixing timing chart for detail in the Appendix chapter.
System and Pickup Feed System.
Zone Purpose Remarks
WAIT Interval from power-ON • Eliminates charging Detects presence of the
Original exposure system
(wait) or closing the doors until on surface of the toner cartridge
print-ready status photosensitive drum
CIS unit ADF unit and clean the transfer
roller.
• Keeps heater
temperature constant
STBY Interval from wait time or Keeps the host machine -
Controller system the last rotation completion standby
Delivery (standby)
until print command input
Controller system
from the controller or
Fixing ・Engine control power-OFF.
Duplexing system ・System control
feed Fixing
Laser exposure system
INTR Interval from print Keeps photosensitive -
Transfer Laser scanner unit (initial rotation) command input from the drum stable sensitivity for
controller until temperature print advance preparations
of the fixing unit reaches
Image
target value.
formation
Pickup system
PRINT Interval from initial rotation • Forms image on -

(print) until last page fixation the photosensitive
Cassette 1
Pickup/feed completion. drum, based on
system Video signal (/VDO1,/
VDO2,VDO1,VDO2)
Paper flow from the controller.
Signal flow • Transfers toner image
Cassette 2 Laser beam onto the paper.
LSTR Interval from print job Delivers the paper Directly starts INTR after
(last rotation) completion until motor completely between the LSTR end when print
deactivation. final job. indication command input
from the controller
F-2-1
T-2-1
2-2
2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic Operation Sequence
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Main Configuration Parts
2-3
Original Exposure and Feed System Item Specification / Function

ADF mixed Mix of same Yes (original weight same as continuous feed mode)
original mode configuration mode Combination is as follows;
Construction function
Mix of different
• LTR / LGL
None
■■Specifications / Controls / Functions configuration mode
The major specifications, controls and functions of the original exposure and feed system are Book original Supported (Heavy load up to 2 kg)
ADF done stamp function No
described below.
T-2-2
Item Specification / Function
Original exposure LED
Original scan In book mode Scanning by moving the contact image sensor (CIS) ■■Main Configuration Parts
In ADF mode Stream reading by the fixed contact image sensor (CIS)
Read resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi ●● Reader Unit
Gradation 256 gradation The major parts of the reader unit are shown as follows.
Carriage position detection CIS HP sensor (SR03)
Drive pulley
Magnification 25% to 400% (1% unit)
Main scanning direction Processed on the Main Controller PCB
Sub scanning direction Processed on the Main Controller PCB
CIS Unit
Lens Rod lens array
Original reading sensor Number of lens: 1
Number of pixels: Total 5184 (incl. 5126 effective pixels)
Maximum original scan width: 217mm
CIS drive control Drive control by the Reader Motor (M02)
Original size Reader No
detection ADF Horizontal scanning direction: No
Vertical direction: by original feeding length
ADF original pickup method Auto pickup/delivery method
Drive belt
ADF setting direction of original Face-up stacking Drive pulley
ADF setting position of original Center reference
ADF separation method of original Upper separation by separation pad Reader Motor(M02)
ADF scanning method of original Stream reading
CIS HP Sensor(SR03)
ADF weight of 1-sided 50 to 105 g/m2
F-2-2
original 2-sided 64 to 105 g/m2
ADF original size A4R, A5, A5R, B5R, B6, LGL, LTRR, STMT, STMTR Item No. Specification / Function
Original width direction: 139.7 to 215.9 mm CIS Unit - Reads the original.
Original feed direction: 128.0 to 355.6 mm (LED, transparent material)
ADF original tray capacity A4R/LTRR: 50 sheets (80 g/m2) Drive Pulley, Drive Belt - Controls the carriage drive.
LGL: 30 sheets (80 g/m2)
ADF original processing mode 1-sided original processing CIS HP sensor SR03 Photo interrupter: detects the home position of CIS unit.
2-sided original processing
ADF original size detection function No Reader motor M02 Pulse Motor: controls the carriage drive.
T-2-3
2-3
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Main Configuration Parts
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Main Configuration Parts
2-4
●● ADF unit 2) Layout drawing of sensors.
The major parts of the ADF unit are shown as follows. SR02
1) Layout drawing of major parts.
Separation Pad
Separation Roller Document Tray
Pickup Roller
SR01
F-2-4
Item No. Specification / Function
Document Sensor SR02 Detects original presence.
Document End Sensor SR01 Detects paper reach of the leading edge / paper pass of
the trailing edge.
ADF Base
Feed Roller Platen Guide Delivery Roller T-2-5
F-2-3 3) Drive system drawing of motor and solenoid.

Item Specification / Function
Separation Roller Separates and feeds the original M01 SL1
Separation Pad Separates the original
Pickup Roller Picks up the original
Document Tray Stacks the delivered original
ADF Base Stacks the delivered original
Delivery Roller Delivers and reverses the original
Platen Guide Reading original assembly
Feed Roller Feeds the original
T-2-4
F-2-5
M01 SL01
F-2-6
Item No. Specification / Function
ADF Motor M01 Pulse Motor: Feed original
ADF Disengagement SL01 Releases pressure from the delivery reverse roller during
Solenoid the reverse.
T-2-6
2-4
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Main Configuration Parts
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > Basic Sequence
2-5
Basic Operation ●● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (book mode)
1) The CIS unit is moved to the copyboard glass start position after black / white shading.
■■Basic Sequence 2) An image scan is performed.
3) The CIS unit is moved to the shading position.
●● Basic Sequence at Power-On
1) The CIS unit searches the HP.
Black /white shading
Main power switch ON Start Key ON
STBY SCFW SCRV STBY

SREADY STBY Reader motor
Reader motor (M02)
(M02) LED
LED CIS unit HP
sensor(SR03)
CIS unit HP Shading Leading Trailing Shading
sensor(SR03) position edge edge position
Shading Shading ：Forward

position position ：Backward
：Forward
：Backward F-2-9
F-2-7 CIS unit HP sensor(SR03)

CIS unit HP sensor(SR03)
Copyboard glass Shading Leading Trailing

reading start HP position edge edge
End of Shading Leading position
searching HP position edge
F-2-8
< Related Error Code >
E202-0001 : CIS unit HP error F-2-10
E202-0002 : CIS unit HP error
2-5
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > Basic Sequence
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Operation Mode > Overview
2-6
●● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (ADF mode) ADF Operation Mode
1) The CIS unit is moved to the stream reading start position after black and white shading.
2) An image scan is performed. ■■Overview
3) The CIS unit is moved to the shading position. ADF operation provides following 2 modes. ADF is controlled by the host machine to operate
each mode and print.
Black / white shading Name Outline Supported Print Mode

Forward pickup/delivery Pick up, read an original and then 1-sided original → 1-sided print
Start Key ON deliver it.
STBY SCRV SCFW STBY
Reader motor 1-sided original → 2-sided print
(M02)
LED
Forward pickup/reversal Pick up and reverse an original 2-sided original → 2-sided print
CIS unit HP after completing reading of the front
sensor(SR03) delivery
side. Reverse an original again
Shading Stream reading Trailing Shading after reading the back side and then 2-sided original → 1-sided print
position start position edge position
deliver it.
：Forward
：Backward
F-2-11
CIS unit HP sensor(SR03)
Stream reading Copyboard glass Shading

start position reading start HP position
position
F-2-12
2-6
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Operation Mode > Overview
2-7
●● 1-sided original reading
• Operation of 1-sided original reading (2 originals)
1-sided original reading operation 1-sided original reading operation

(when 2 sheets of originals are set) 1/2 (when 2 sheets of originals are set) 2/2
- Start reading front side of the 1st sheet - Complte reading front side of the 2nd sheet.
- Set the original and pickup the 2nd sheet
- Pickup the 1st sheet and move down - End of reading front side of - Deliver the 2nd sheet and move up the pickup roller.
the pickup roller. the 1st sheet and feed the 2nd sheet F-2-14
- Feed the 1st sheet - Waiting for reading front side of

the 2nd sheet
- Waiting for reading front side - Start reading front side of

of the 1st sheet the 2nd sheet. Deliver the 1st sheet
F-2-13
2-7
2
2-8
●● 2-sided original reading
• Operation of 2-sided original reading (2 originals)

- Feed the 1st sheet and - Feed to the reverse point

- Set the original - Start reading front side of the 1st sheet. disengage the delivery roller of the 1st sheet
- Pickup the 1st sheet and move down - End of reading front side of the 1st sheet - Waiting for reading back side - Re-pickup the 1st sheet
the pickup roller. of the 1st sheet
- Waiting for reading back side of - Feed the 1st sheet and
- Feed the 1st sheet - Feed to the reverse point the 1st sheet and pressurize the disengage the delivery roller
of the 1st sheet delivery roller
- End of reading back side - Idle feed the 1st sheet and
- Waiting for reading of front side - Re-pickup the 1st sheet of the 1st sheet pressurize the delivery roller
of the 1st sheet
F-2-16
F-2-15
2-8
2
2-9
- Deliver the 1st sheet Waiting for reading the front side - Re-pickup the 2nd sheet - End of reading back side of
of the 2nd sheet and move up the pickup roller the 2nd sheet
- End of job the 1st sheet - Start reading front side of - Feed the 2nd sheet and - Feed to the reverse point of the 2nd sheet
the 2nd sheet and pressurize the disengage the delivery roller
delivery roller
- Pickup the 2nd sheet - End of reading front side of the 2nd sheet - Waiting for reading back side - Re-pickup the 2nd sheet
of the 2nd sheet
- Feed the 2nd sheet and - Feed to the reverse point of the 2nd sheet - Start reading back side of - Feed the 2nd sheet and
disengage the delivery roller the 2nd sheet and pressurize disengage the delivery roller
the delivery roller
F-2-17 F-2-18
2-9
2
2-10
2-sided original reading operation
(when 2 sheets of originals are set) 5/5
- Idle feed the 2nd sheet and

engage the delivery roller
- Pass through the 2nd sheet reading position
- Deliver the 2nd sheet and End of job
2-10
2
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Reader Unit
2-11
Controls ●● Magnification Ratio
The scanning speed does not change depending on the copy magnification ratio. Images read
■■Reader Unit at a resolution specified by the controller—300 dpi (horizontal scanning) × 600 dpi (vertical
scanning) or 600 dpi (horizontal scanning) × 600 dpi (vertical scanning)—are processed by
●● Reader Motor Control
the main controller PCB (PCB2) according to the copy ratio.
1) Forward movement during image scan
During image scanning, the CIS unit is controlled using the following motor sequence.
●● Original Size Detection
Start Leading edge Trailing edge Stop
The reader assembly does not have original size sensors or platen cover open/closed
Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration sensors, size detection is not performed.
Shift
speed
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Shift distance
[1]Acceleration interval: Accelerate to the speed specified for each mode
[2]Run-up interval: A margin to stabilize the speed
[3]Image reading interval: An image is read at a constant speed
[4]Deceleration interval: After trailing edge detection, the motor decelerates rapidly and stops.
F-2-19
Note:
Scanning speed is as follows.
Copy (300dpi x 600dpi): 177.4 mm/s
Color SEND (300dpi x 600dpi): 59.1 mm/s
2) Reverse movement during image scan

The CIS unit’s reverse movement to the shading position after image scanning is the
same as the forward movement.
2-11
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Reader Unit
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Unit > Feed Control
2-12
ADF Unit ■■Feed Control
■■Pickup Control ●● 1-Sided Stream Reading
The feed roller is driven by the ADF motor (M01) and feeds the original to the reading
When the Start key is pressed or when an original pickup signal is received, the ADF motor
position.
(M01) rotates, and the pickup roller moves down. At this point, the pickup roller rotates to pick
up and feed the original. The separation roller and the separation pad prevent double feeding. M01
Further, the stopper operates in conjunction with the pickup roller unit.
Pickup Roller Original

M01
Separation Roller
Document End Sensor

(SR01)
Feed Roller
Reading position
F-2-21
Stopper
Note:
The preparation of the main controller PCB (memory allocation) may not be complete
M01 when the original passes through the document end sensor (SR01). If this occurs, the
Pickup Roller feed roller stops the original in front of the reading position. When the preparation of
Separation Roller
the main controller PCB is complete, the feed roller feeds the original to the reading
position.
Separation Pad
F-2-20
2-12
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Unit > Feed Control
2-13
●● 2-Sided Stream Reading
The feed roller is driven by the positive rotation of the ADF motor (M01) and feeds the
original. When the document end sensor (SR01) turns on, the ADF motor (M01) stops, which
also stops the original. After the specified time elapses, the feed roller rotates to feed the
original to the reading position. At this point, to prevent the next pickup, the ADF motor (M01)
rotates in the negative direction to raise the pickup roller.
M01
Document End Sensor Feed Roller

(SR01)
Original Detection
Position Document End Sensor
(SR01)
Deceleration
Stop M01
Acceleration
Separation Roller
Pickup Roller
Interval
for Reading position
rotation
stabilization
F-2-22
Feed Roller
Reading position
F-2-23
Note:
The preparation of the main controller PCB (memory allocation) may not be complete
when the original passes through the document end sensor (SR01). If this occurs,
the feed roller stops the original before the reading position. When both the memory
allocation and the raising of the pickup roller are complete, the feed roller feeds the
original to the reading position.
2-13
2
2-14
●● Reading Control
When the leading edge of the original reaches the reading position and a read request signal
is received from the host machine, stream reading begins. Stream reading is a mode in
which the original is scanned by sliding it across the host machine’s fixed scanner glass. The
original is fed by the feed roller, which is rotated by the ADF motor (M01). Images that are
read are stored in the host machine’s memory.
M01
Document End Sensor Feed Roller

(SR01)
Original Detection
Position Feed Roller
Deceleration
Stop
Acceleration Reading Glass
Constant speed
CIS Unit
Deceleration F-2-25
Interval Reading position

for
rotation
stabilization
F-2-24
2-14
2
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Unit > Original Reverse Control
2-15
■■Original Reverse Control Reverse and feed
1. The delivery roller is driven in reverse by the negative rotation of the ADF motor (M01) and
●● Basic Operation feeds the original.
Originals can be reversed from the front to the back side or from the back to the front. Since 2. When the document end sensor (SR01) turns on, the ADF motor (M01) stops, which also
the same operation is used for both, only the operation for reversing from the front to the back stops the original. At this point, the disengagement solenoid (SL01) is turned on to release
side is described below. the pressure from the delivery reverse roller.
3. The feed roller is driven by the positive rotation of the ADF motor (M01) and feeds the
Front side pickup original to the reading position.
1. The feed roller is driven by the positive rotation of the ADF motor (M01), and the front side
of original is read. M01
2. After reading, the delivery roller rotates to feed the original to the ejection area.
3. After feeding the original a given distance, the ADF motor (M01) stops.
M01
Feed Roller Delivery Roller
M01 SL01
M01 Document End Sensor

(SR01)
M01
Delivery Roller
F-2-26
Feed Roller
Reading position
F-2-27
2-15
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Unit > Original Reverse Control
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Unit > Original Detection
2-16
■■Delivery Control ■■Original Detection
●● Basic Operation ●● Original Presence Detection
After stream reading, the delivery roller rotates to eject the original into the delivery tray. When an original is set in the document tray, the original blocks the document sensor (SR02)
Then, the ADF motor (M01) stops. causing the original to be detected.
M01
●● Original Size Detection
The original size is determined by calculating follwing 2 elapse times.
• Time A:
From a point in time when the document end sensor (SR01) turns ON to a point in time
when the original reaches the reading position.
• Time B:
From a point in time when the original reaches the reading position to a point in time
when the document end sensor (SR01) turns OFF.
Delivery Roller
SR01 B
M01
A
Reading position
F-2-29
F-2-28
Note:
• With 1-sided reading, after delivery, the pickup roller is moved up.
• With 2-sided reading, this is not performed because it has already been moved up.
2-16
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Unit > Original Detection
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Unit > Dust Detection Control
2-17
■■Dust Detection Control
When an original is read, to prevent dust from appearing in the image, the original reading
position is adjusted or the image is corrected when dust is detected on the platen roller of
the stream reading glass/ADF. This control is performed only when the ADF is in use and is
closed.
●● Dust Detection Avoidance 0.5mm 0.5mm

If dust was detected on the paper in the last job, the reading position of the next stream
reading job is adjusted to avoid the dust.
A B C
• Control timing
At the reading position, the CIS unit detects the reflection light from the platen guide
surface to determine the presence of dust. The presence of dust is detected in the
order A, B, and C. The location with the least dust is used as the reading position in
the next job.
• Execution Platen Guide

As when a job is completed, the presence of dust is detected in the order A, B, and C.
The CIS unit moves to the location with the least dust and reads the original.
CIS Unit
F-2-30
Position Description
A Reading reference position
B Approx. 0.5 mm to the right of reference position A
C Approx. 0.5 mm to the right of reference position B
T-2-7
< Related Service Mode >

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DFDST-L2 : Adjustment of dust detect level: after job, ADF
2-17
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > ADF Unit > Dust Detection Control
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Outline
2-18
●● Dust Detection Correction Image Processing
When dust is detected on the ADF reading glass, the image is corrected to prevent the dust
from appearing. ■■Outline
Image processing is performed in the CIS unit and the main controller PCB.
• Control timing
Item Function
During stream reading jobs, from when an original reaches the position immediately CIS unit LED Light Intensity Adjustment
before the reading position to when the reading of the original is completed (every
page). CIS internal analog control
Image Reading Sensor

• Execution
If dust is present at the points where dust was detected. the dust is assumed Image Reading Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset
to be on the reading glass, and dust correction is performed. Correction
A/D Conversion of the Image Reading Sensor Output
< Related Service Mode > Main controller PCB Shading Correction
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DFDST-L1 : Adjustment of dust detect level: paper interval,
ADF
CIS（Contact Image Sensor)
Image reading sensor
Analog image signal

Main Controller PCB
Image reading sensor drive SRAM
Analog Image
processing Shading correction
・Gain correction A/D

・Offset correction Conversion CPU
Digital
Image signal
F-2-31
2-18
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Outline
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > CIS Unit
2-19
■■CIS Unit < Related Service Mode >
• Actions when replacing the CIS Unit
The CIS (contact image sensor) performs original exposure and image reading on a line-by-
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R, BW-G, BW-B
line basis.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R, CL-G, CL-B
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC, CL-AGC
Scan direction
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY >STRD-POS
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B, DFTAR-BW
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, WLVL3
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
Light guide COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X, ADJ-Y, ADJ-X-MG
Rod lens array COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY- > ADJ-Y-DF, ADJ-Y-DF2
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST, DOCSTDUP, DOCST2
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD, LA-SPD2
Light guide Rod lens array
Image reading sensor
F-2-32
Item Function
Light guide Directs the LED light over the entire image line.
Rod lens array Collects the light reflected from the original.
Image reading sensor Receives the reflection light passing through the rod lens array.
2-19
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > CIS Unit
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > CIS Unit
2-20
●● LED Light Intensity Adjustment ●● Image Reading Sensor
To make the image reading level from the image reading sensor constant, the LED activation The Image reading sensor used in this equipment is a single line linear image sensor
time is adjusted every time the original is scanned. The LED activation time of each color is consisting of 5184 light-receiving cells. For each channel (three channels total) of the Image
adjusted to prevent variations in light intensities. reading sensor array, signals that have gone through photoelectric conversion in the light-
receiving block are output in parallel to the main controller PCB.
●● CIS Internal Analog Control
The CIS (contact image sensor) performs the following three analog image processing ●● Image Reading Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction
controls on the reflection light from the original. The gain of the analog video signals output from the image reading sensor is kept constant
a. Image formation by the rod lens array (gain correction). And, the output voltage when incident light is not received is kept constant
b. Light reception by the Image reading sensor array (offset correction).
c. Photoelectric conversion and output by the Image reading sensor array
●● A/D Conversion of the Image Reading Sensor Output
The Image reading sensor array consists of three channels (units). Each channel has an After gain correction and offset correction, the A/D converter converts the analog video signal
output correction table and outputs images after correcting the gain relative to the input into digital signals that correspond to the voltage levels of each pixel.
luminance signal.
2-20
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > CIS Unit
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Main Controller PCB
2-21
■■Main Controller PCB White shading (Book mode)
At predetermined intervals, R, G, and B are switched to illuminate a white plate, and the
The functions of the image processing system on the PCB are described below.
luminance is read. The white level correction coefficient is calculated for each horizontal
• Shading adjustment: Performed in service mode
scanning position to make the white level reading in the horizontal scanning position constant.
• Shading correction: Performed for each job
Main Controller PCB
255
Analog image Digital image
Image reading processing assembly processing assembly
sensor
Analog
A/D Shading RED shading target
image
processing
conversion correction RED Luminance value before correction
luminance
Correction coefficient
F-2-33
< Related Service Mode > 0
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B, DFTAR-BW Horizontal scanning position
F-2-34
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2, DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4
White shading (ADF mode)
Stream reading shading correction is performed using the white level adjustment value (factory
●● Shading Correction
adjustment value). The white level at each horizontal scanning position is corrected using the
Even when the density of the original is uniform, the Image reading sensor output is not
factory adjustment value as the target value.
necessarily uniform for the following reasons.
1) Variation in sensitivity between each pixel of the image reading sensor
2) Variation in light intensity of the rod lens array
3) Difference in the transmission light intensity between the center area and the
peripheral area of the lens.
4) Difference in the light intensity between the center area and the peripheral area of the
LEDs.
5) LED deterioration
Shading correction is performed to correct this non uniformity in the image reading sensor
output. Due to the characteristics of each CIS pixel, variation in reading levels in the
horizontal scanning direction occurs. Therefore, reading is performed with the LED lit and not
lit and the white and black levels at each horizontal scanning position are corrected in order
to make reading levels constant. There are two types of shading correction: white shading
and black shading.
<Related Error Codes>

E225-0001: CIS unit light intensity is under the standard level
2-21
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Main Controller PCB
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Jam Detection
2-22
Black shading
Jam Detection
A white plate is read with the LED turned off. The black level correction coefficient is
calculated for each horizontal scanning position to make the black level reading in the This equipment uses document end sensor (SR01) and document sensor (SR02) to detect
horizontal scanning position constant. original jams. The jam detection check timing is stored in the main controller PCB. The
presence of a jam is determined by whether an original is at the relevant sensor at the check
time. Jam codes in this equipment can be verified by displaying the jam error log in the
255
equipment’s service mode.
Luminance value before correction

ACC ID Jam Code Type Item No.
Correction coefficient
RED 01 0001 DELAY Document End Sensor SR01
luminance
01 0002 STNRY Document End Sensor SR01
01 0004 DELAY Document End Sensor SR01

0 (only when reverse)
Horizontal scanning position 01 0005 STNRY Document End Sensor SR01
F-2-35
(only when reverse)
01 0071 TIMING NG - -
01 0094 POWER ON Document End Sensor SR01
Document Sensor SR02
01 0095 OTHER - -

COPIER > DISPLAY > JAM : Display of jam log
2-22
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Jam Detection
2 Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Service Tasks > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2-23
Service Tasks
■■Periodically Replaced Parts
None
■■Consumable Parts
None
■■Periodical Servicing
None
■■Actions when Replacing the Parts

No. Item Contents Reference
1 Copyboard Glass Unit • Entering white level data of the standard white plate p. 5-6
• Automatic gain offset adjustment for the CIS unit
• Adjust of image reading start position
• Automatic white level adjustment
• Adjustment of image position
2 CIS Unit • Automatic gain offset adjustment for the CIS unit p. 5-4
• Adjust of image reading start position
• Automatic white level adjustment
3 ADF Unit • Automatic white level adjustment p. 5-8

4 Main Controller PCB • Initialize the setting value for reader /ADF p. 7-5
• Entering the setting value from the service label
(W-PLT-X/Y/Z)
• Automatic gain offset adjustment for the CIS unit
• Enter the all setting value other than W-PLT-X/Y/Z from
the service label
T-2-8
2-23
2
Technology > Original Exposure and Feed System > Service Tasks > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2 Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Main controller PCB
2-24
Main Controller ■■Main controller PCB

ADF DRIVER & SENSOR J903
Overview
Speaker J922 BAT J904 READER DRIVER & SENSOR
CCVI J932
■■Configuration / Function Serial Debug Monitor1 J906 J936 SOFT-ID

New Card Reader J933
USB1.1 Host J905 J935 FRAM Counter
RJ-45 + Transformer J926 DDR2 Back-Up I/F

Connector J911
J937 Debug
J938 FRONT COVER TRIG
USB2.0 Device J909 J912 DCON I/F
Serial Debug Monitor2 J925 Panel J913

USB2.0 Host J908 VH Supply I/FJ921
Power Connector J914
Power Control J915
MODEM I/F J918
F-2-37
No. Function
Main Controller PCB J903 ADF DRIVER & SENSOR
J904 READER DRIVER & SENSOR
J905 USB1.1 Host
F-2-36 J906 Serial Debug Monitor1
Item Function J908 USB2.0 Host
Main Controller ROM Host machine setting data, loader program to be started at J909 USB2.0 Device
J911 RJ-45 + Transformer Connector
PCB first, download function program such as UST, main program
J912 DCON I/F
(decompressed into the RAM and executed), data for J913 Panel
demonstration print function, language data, and fax backup J914 Power Connector
data in preparation for power OFF J915 Power Control
RAM Main program area, fixed memory area, dynamic memory area, J918 MODEM I/F
memory for images, and area for storing data for executing fax J921 VH Supply I/F
J922 Speaker
transmission/reception jobs (necessary data is also saved to the
J925 Serial Debug Monitor2
ROM as backup in preparation for power OFF) J926 DDR2 Back-Up I/F
T-2-9
J932 CCVI
J933 New Card Reader
J935 FRAM Counter
J936 SOFT-ID
J937 Debug
J938 FRONT COVER TRIG
T-2-10
2-24
2
Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Main controller PCB
2 Technology > Laser Control System > Overview > Main Configuration Parts
2-25
Laser Control System ■■Main Configuration Parts

Polygonal mirror
Overview
Anamorphic lens
■■Outline
The laser control system forms static latent image on the photosensitive drum by laser
exposure. The laser scanner unit consists of a laser assembly and scanner motor assembly
and is controlled by signals received from the controller. This equipment employs a 2-beam
laser system that can expose two beams in a single scan. Also, to make the equipment
compact, a single-polygon 2-laser system is used.
■■Specifications / Controls / Functions

Laser unit
The major specifications, controls and functions of the laser control system is described
below.
Item Contents
Laser Beam Number of laser beam 2
Output 3.5mW Photoconductive drum
Wave length 785 to 800nm
Polygon Motor Motor type DC brushless motor
Number of rotation Approx. 37900rpm
Type of bearing Oil bearing F-2-38
Polygon Mirror Number of facets 4
Name Function
List of Controls Laser activation timing control Laser control signal
Polygon mirror Scans laser beam on the photoconductive drum in main scan direction.
Synchronization control BD signal
Anamorphic lens Reflects laser beam into the BD detector.
Light intensity control Automatic photocurrent Control (APC)
Laser unit Emits laser beam and detects BD signal.
Other Polygon motor control
Photoconductive drum Receives laser beam to form latent image.
Laser shutter control
T-2-12
T-2-11
2-25
2
Technology > Laser Control System > Overview > Main Configuration Parts
2 Technology > Laser Control System > Controls > Control System Configuration
2-26
Controls Engine Controller PCB
■■Control System Configuration

IC
The laser exposure system is controlled by the engine controller PCB (PCB1) and laser unit.
Item Function
Laser lighting timing Laser control signal Turns ON/OFF the laser beam in combination of the J210 J209
control laser control signal.
BD signal Adjusts reading start position in horizontal direction. Laser control signal
Polygon motor control
BD signal
Laser intensity APC (Automatic Makes amount of laser beam constant on a line-by-
control Photocurrent Control) line basis. Automatic photocurrent control
Laser scanner motor Polygon motor Controls rotation of the polygon motor in a specified (APC)
control control signal speed.
Laser OFF control Laser shutter control Prevents laser beam exposure inside of the host
machine.
T-2-13
F-2-39
2-26
2
Technology > Laser Control System > Controls > Control System Configuration
2 Technology > Laser Control System > Controls > Laser Scanner Motor Control
2-27
■■Laser Lighting Timing Control ■■Laser Scanner Motor Control
●● Laser Control Signal ●● Polygon Motor Control Signal
The laser beam on/off state is controlled by a combination of the laser control signals The rotation speed of the polygon motor is controlled according to the polygon motor rotation
(CONT0/1/2) from the engine controller PCB (PCB1). The engine controller PCB (PCB1) speed signal (FG signal) from when the motor starts to when image formation takes place
sends video signals for image formation (VDO1, /VDO1, /VDO2, /VDO2) and laser control after reaching the target rotation. During image formation, the polygon motor rotation speed is
signals (CONT0/1/2) to the laser unit. Based on the combination of the CONT0/1/2 signals, controlled on the basis of the BD signal. The polygon motor rotation speed is controlled by an
the laser unit controls the on/off state of the two laser beams. The following table shows the acceleration signal (ACC signal) and deceleration signal (DEC signal).
different combinations of the laser control signals (CONT0/1/2).
Laser control signal Laser status
CONT2 CONT1 CONT0 Laser A Laser B Description Engine Controller PCB
0 0 0 OFF OFF Laser control OFF
0 1 0 ON OFF APC_A control
0 0 1 OFF ON APC_B control IC
0 1 1 OFF OFF Forcible output OFF
1 0 0 ON ON Laser AB Forcible output
1 0 1 OFF ON Laser B Forcible output J210
1 1 0 ON OFF Laser A Forcible output
1 1 1 Enable video signal entry Enable laser emitting following the video
ACC
DEC
FG
signal.
T-2-14
■■BD signal
BD
The BD signal is a horizontal (horizontal scanning) sync signal that the controller uses to
output image signals for each scan. A printer starts sending a BD signal when it detects that
the picked up sheet of paper reaches a specific point. The controller assumes the beginning
of a continuous BD signal to be the leading edge of paper, and the end of the signal to be the
trailing edge.
■■Light Intensity Control

●● APC (Automatic Photocurrent Control)
The APC monitors the laser beam that the built-in photodiode in the laser diode receives and
adjusts the light intensity to an appropriate level.
F-2-40
2-27
2
Technology > Laser Control System > Controls > Laser Scanner Motor Control
2 Technology > Laser Control System > Service Task > Action when replacing parts
2-28
■■Laser OFF Control Service Task
●● Laser Shutter Control ■■Periodically Replacing Parts
When the drum unit is pulled out, the laser shutter that operates in conjunction with the drum
None
unit moves down to block the laser optical path. Also, when it is detected that the front cover
or the left door has been opened, the polygon motor and laser output are turned off.
[1]
None
■■Periodical Servicing
None
■■Action when replacing parts

None
[3]
[2]
OPEN
[1]
[2]
[1] Polygon mirror

[3]
[2] Laser shutter
[3] Laser beam
CLOSE
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-2-41
2-28
2
Technology > Laser Control System > Service Task > Action when replacing parts
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Construction > Main Configuration Parts
2-29
Image Formation System ■■Main Configuration Parts
Construction [2] [3] [4]

[1] [5]
The major specifications, controls and functions of the image formation system is described
below.
Item Specifications [6]
Photosensitive Material OPC drum [10]
drum
Drum diameter (Φ) 30mm
[9]
Cleaning method Rubber blade [7]
[8]
Process speed 214mm/sec
F-2-42
Primary Charging method Roller charging
No Name Function
charging
[1] Photosensitive Drum Forms image on surface of the photosensitive drum.
Roller diameter (Φ) 12mm
[2] Cleaning Blade Removes remaining toner on surface of the photosensitive

Transfer Transfer method Roller transfer drum.
[3] Primary Charging Roller Negative charge on surface of the photosensitive drum in
Roller diameter(Φ) 16mm conjunction with the drum rotation.
[4] Developing Blade Controls amount of toner uniformed on the developing cylinder.
Developing Developing method Dry one-component jumping development (AC+DC)
Assembly [5] Drum Unit Consists of a photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, etc.
Toner type Magnetic negative toner
[6] Developing Assembly Consists of a developing cylinder, developing blade, etc.
Toner level detection Permeability sensor, video count
[7] Toner Cartridge A cartridge filled with toner for supply.
Developing cylinder 20mm

[8] Developing Cylinder Transfers toner from the developing assembly to the
diameter photosensitive drum.
Separation Separation method Curvature and static eliminator [9] Transfer Roller Positive charge back side of paper to transfer toner from the
photosensitive drum to paper.
Toner waste Drum unit [10] Static Eliminator Negative charge back side of paper to separate paper from the
container photosensitive drum.
T-2-15
2-29
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Construction > Main Configuration Parts
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Construction > Image Formation Process
2-30
■■Image Formation Process
Image Formation Process Description
The image formation system mainly consists of 6 blocks such as primary charging, laser
[1] Primary charging block Negative potential is formed on the surface of the photosensitive
exposure, developing, transfer, separation and cleaning. drum.
Primary Charging Roller
Cleaning blade [2] Laser exposure block Latent image formation is formed on the photosensitive drum as
[6] Drum cleaning block
charge neutralization is proceeded by laser beam sweep.
[3] Developing block Visible image is formed as the negatively-charged toner on the
Photosensitive developing cylinder is adhered to the latent image formation on
Drum the surface of the photosensitive drum.
[4] Transfer block A toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the paper as
Paper positive charge is applied to the back of it.
[1] Primary charging block [5] Separation block A paper is easily separated from the photosensitive drum with its
[5] Separation elastic force while negative charge is applied to the back of the
block paper.
[6] Drum cleaning block A cleaning blade scrapes a residual toner on the surface of the
Static Eliminator [2] Laser exposure block photosensitive drum and it feeds the waste toner to the drum
unit.
T-2-16
[3] Developing
block
Transfer Roller
[4] Transfer
block
Developing Cylinder
F-2-43
2-30
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Construction > Image Formation Process
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Basic Sequence
2-31
Basic Sequence
Basic sequence for printing is shown as follows.
Main Power Switch ON
Sequence WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR

1 Main Motor (M1)
2 Fixing Motor (M3)
3 Polygon Motor (M2)
4 Laser
5 Pre-registration Sensor(SR11)
6 Fixing Delivery Sensor(SR5)
7 Registration Clutch (CL1)
8 Charging AC Bias
9 Charging DC Bias
10 Charging AC/DC Bias
11 Developing DC Bias
12 Transfer Bias
13 Separation Static Bias
14 Fixing Bias
F-2-44
2-31
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Basic Sequence
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit
2-32
Controls ●● Primary Charging Bias Control
The primary charging bias system is charged directly by a charging roller. In addition to DC
■■Drum Unit bias, AC bias is applied to the primary charging roller to provide constant charging.
The drum unit mainly consists of a photosensitive drum, cleaning blade and primary charging
roller. The drum unit is driven by the main motor (M1). The cleaning blade is in contact with Primary Charging Roller
the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove remaining toner which is not transferred to Photosensitive Drum
paper.
Cleaning Blade
Primary Charging Roller HVT PCB
Environment Sensor
Primary Environment sensor

charging bias detection signal
drive signal
Primary DC bias Primary AC bias

control circuit control circuit
Engine Controller PCB
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-46
●● AC Bias Switch Control

The AC bias output value is changed according to the environment detected by the
M1 environment sensor (SR18).
Main Motor drive signal
F-2-45
2-32
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit
2-33
●● Detection Full of Waste Toner ●● Drum Unit Presence Detection
Turn ON/OFF the waste toner full sensor (SR6) intermittently by torque limiter when the main The drum unit presence is detected by the feedback value from which AC bias is applied
motor (M1) rotates in almost full of the waste toner. Full of waste toner is detected by counting during the initial rotation.
ON/OFF signal of the sensor.
●● Pre-delivery of the Drum Unit (drum low alarm)

The host machine requests UGW for pre-delivery of the drum unit either when life of the drum
unit reaches to the setting value (%) or full of waste toner is detected by the waste toner full
sensor (SR6). The setting value(%) is available to set in between 50 to 200% (default 100%)
in the service mode.
Condition Detection timing Message
Full of waste toner When end of life of the drum unit None (only drum low alarm)
warning 1 reaches to the setting value %.
Full of waste toner The point in time when the day Toner Low (Replacement Not Yet
warning 2 elapsed 7 days after the full of Needed)
the waste toner warning 1, or the
point in time when the waste toner
reaches to full.
Full of waste toner The point in time when printing over Replace the toner cartridge
200 sheets of paper after the full of
waste toner detection.
Detection of The point in time when a fuse is None (only replacement complete
replacement complete cut and replacement is detected alarm)
automatically .
T-2-17
< Related Alarm Code >

35-0073 Drum Unit replacement completion alarm
40-0073 Drum low alarm

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > D-DLV-BK : Set drum low alarm notice timing
COPIER > OPTION> DSPLY-SW > DRM-WARN : Display / Hide a drum unit replacement
message
2-33
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing Assembly
2-34
■■Developing Assembly ●● Developing Bias Control
DC bias and AC bias are applied to the developing cylinder.
The developing assembly mainly consists of a developing cylinder, a developing blade, and
a stirring plate. The developing assembly is driven by the main motor (M1). The toner sensor
(SR17) which is a permeability sensor, detects the toner level in the developing assembly. Photosensitive Drum
Developing Assembly
Stirring Plate
Environment Sensor
Developing Cylinder
HVT PCB
Developing Cylinder SR17 Developing bias Environment sensor

drive signal detection signal
Developing DC bias Developing AC bias

Developing Blade control circuit control circuit
M1 Engine Controller PCB
Main Motor Sleeve Clutch

F-2-48
drive signal drive signal

●● DC/AC Bias Constant Voltage Control
The DC bias control circuit and AC bias control circuit in the engine controller PCB are
F-2-47
controlled so that the DC bias and AC bias applied to the developing cylinder are at constant
voltages.
2-34
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing Assembly
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing Assembly
2-35
●● Toner Level Detection ●● Pre-delivery of the Toner (toner low alarm )
After the main motor (M1) drive stabilizes or stops, the toner sensor (SR17) samples the The host machine requests UGW for pre-delivery of the toner either when remaining quantity
permeability of the magnetic substance in the toner to detect whether the toner is present. If of the toner reaches to the setting value (%) or toner empty is detected by the toner sensor
the toner is present near the toner sensor (SR17) surface, toner is assumed to be present. If (SR17). The setting value(%) is available to set in between 1 to 40% (default 26%) in the
it is not, the toner is assumed to be absent. service mode. The host machine notifies UGW for replacement complete when printing is
available after replacement the toner cartridge..
Toner Container
< Related Alarm Code >
10-0020 Toner low alarm
10-0100 Toner cartridge replacement alarm

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK : Set toner low alarm notice timing
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > TNR-WARN : ON/OFF of toner warning display
Toner Sensor(SR17)
Developing Assembly
F-2-49
Toner level Status Message Operation

Presence None When the toner is present, a
message is not displayed on the
control panel.
F-2-50
Empty Toner Low When the toner empty(0%) is

(presence (Replacement detected, a message is displayed on
Not Yet the control panel. The print operation
in the toner
Needed) continues and the toner bottle can be
container) replaced while printing.
(toner low alarm)
F-2-51
Empty Toner End After toner empty is detected, Approx.

(Replace 600 sheets of paper can be printed.
the toner The print operation stops when the
cartridge) toner END is detected.
F-2-52
T-2-18
2-35
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing Assembly
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Unit
2-36
■■Transfer Unit ●● Transfer Bias Control
Negative bias, sheet-to-sheet bias, and positive bias are applied to the transfer charging roller
The transfer unit consists mainly of a transfer roller and a static eliminator. The transfer roller
according to the type of sequence.
rotates as a slave to the drum unit.
Photosensitive Drum
Separation Static
Charge Eliminator
Environment Sensor
Separation Static Charge Eliminator
Transfer Roller
HVT PCB
Separation static
charge eliminator Transfer bias Environment sensor
bias control signal control signal detection signal
Separation static charge

Transfer bias control circuit
eliminator control circuit
Transfer Roller F-2-54
●● Cleaning Bias Control

A negative voltage is applied at the last rotation to return the toner adhered to the transfer
roller back to the photosensitive drum.
F-2-53
●● Separation Static Eliminator Bias Control

To make it easier to separate paper from the photosensitive drum by reducing the electrostatic
attraction force between the two, 2 types of negative voltages, a strong bias and a weak bias,
are applied to the static eliminator according to the print mode and sequence.
2-36
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Unit
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Service Tasks > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2-37
Service Tasks
None
None
■■List of Periodical Services

None

None
2-37
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Service Tasks > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2 Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications / Controls / Functions
2-38
Fixing System ■■Specifications / Controls / Functions

Item Function / Method
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Overview
Fixing heater Ceramic heater
■■Features
The on-demand fixing method is equipped. Controlled temperature 205 deg C (A4 / plain paper) *1
Temperature control Main thermistor and Sub thermistor
Fixing Film Unit Edge heat rising prevention control Down sequence control
Fixing loop control Arch sensor (SR14)
Protective Function • Main thermistor and Sub thermistor

• Thermo switch (Rate operation temperature:
270 deg C +/- 10 deg C )
T-2-19
*1. Target temperature is specified by paper size, fixing mode, number of prints and fixing
temperature at the start of warm-up control.
Fixing temperature: The temperature that thermistor detected.
Paper
Pressure Roller
Fixing inlet guide
F-2-55
2-38
2
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications / Controls / Functions
2 Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Main Configuration Parts
2-39
■■Main Configuration Parts
Item No. Function / Method
Fixing film unit - Applies heat and pressure to fix toner image on a sheet of
paper.
Fixing Film Unit Pressure roller -
Fixing heater H1 Ceramic heater
Main thermistor TH1 • Contacts with the heater.

• Temperature control and detection of abnormal temperature
rise.
Sub thermistor TH2 • Contacts with the heater (non-feeding area).
• Temperature control and detection of abnormal temperature
Pressure roller rise, temperature detection/cooling control on edges.
Fixing Pressure Thermo switch TP2/TP3 • Contacts with the heater.
Release Sensor 2 Fixing Pressure • Blocks AC electric power supply when a failure is detected.
Release Sensor 1
Fixing delivery SR5 Detects jam.
sensor
Thermo Switch (TP2/TP3) Fixing Pressure SR15 Detects release pressure.

Release
Sensor 1
Fixing Pressure SR16 Detects release pressure.
Fixing Delivery
Sensor (SR5) Release
Sensor 2
T-2-20
Fixing Sub
Thermistor (TH2)
Fixing Main
Thermistor (TH1)
Fixing Heater (H1)
F-2-56
2-39
2
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Main Configuration Parts
2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Print Temperature Control
2-40
Controls ■■Print Temperature Control
■■Fixing Temperature Control
(Initial
(Initial
F-2-58
●● Startup (wait) Temperature Control

F-2-57
To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing after receiving the print-start
●● Print Temperature Control command.
To increase the fixing temperature until the target temperature and keep the target
temperature during the printing.
- Startup (wait) temperature control
- Print temperature control
- Sheet-to-sheet temperature control
●● Down Sequence Control

To prevent fixing failure due to edge temperature rise or temperature fall, which reduced
the productivity (through-put).
- Down sequence when printing continuously
- Down sequence when switching paper size
2-40
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Print Temperature Control
2-41
●● Print Temperature Control Condition 1-2 : A4 size, 1-sided (Full-speed)
Set appropriate target temperature determined by environment in fixing mode (7 types) to Environment temperature= 18 deg C or more
prevent fixing error or high temperature offset. Control the temperature to keep the target Fixing mode Paper type Temperature Target temperature
temperature determined by the detected temperature at the Main thermistor (TH1) during the before the (deg C)
printing. heater turns
ON (deg C)
Plain paper Plain paper 50 or less 205
Condition 1-1 : A4 size, 1-sided (Full-speed)
mode (64 to 90g/m2) 50 </= 110 205
Environment temperature= less than 18 deg C
110 </= 130 203
Fixing mode Paper type Temperature Target temperature 130 </= 160 203
before the (deg C) 160 or more 200
heater turns T-2-22
ON (deg C) *Fixing mode is applied to only plain paper mode at 1-sided (Full-speed)
mode (64 to 90g/m2) 50 </= 110 205
110 </= 130 203 Condition 2 : A4 size, 1-sided (Half-speed)
130 </= 160 203
Fixing mode Paper type Temperature Target temperature
160 or more 200
before the (deg C)
T-2-21
*Fixing mode is applied to only plain paper mode at 1-sided (Full-speed) heater turns
ON (deg C)
Transparency Transparency 50 or less0 205
mode (60 to 63g/m2) 50 </= 110 205
110 </= 130 203
130 </= 160 203
160 or more 200
Plain paper Plain paper 50 or less -
mode (64 to 90g/m2) 50 </= 110 -
110 </= 130 -
130 </= 160 -
160 or more -
Heavy paper Heavy paper 1 50 or less 150
mode (91to 105 g/m2) 50 </= 110 150
110 </= 130 150
130 </= 160 150
160 or more 150
Super Heavy Heavy paper 2 50 or less 150
paper mode (106 to 128 g/ 50 </= 110 150
m2) 110 </= 130 150
130 </= 160 150
160 or more 150
2-41
2
2-42
Fixing mode Paper type Temperature Target temperature Condition 3-1 : A4 size, 2-sided (Full-speed)
before the (deg C) Environment temperature= less than 18 deg C
heater turns Fixing mode Paper type Temperature Target temperature
ON (deg C) before the (deg C)
OHP mode OHP 50 or less 165
heater turns
50 </= 110 165
ON (deg C)
110 </= 130 165 Plain paper Plain paper 50 or less 205
130 </= 160 160 mode (64 to 90g/m2) 50 </= 80 205
160 or more 160 80 </= 110 205
Label mode Label 50 or less 185 110 </= 130 202
50 </= 110 185 130 </= 150 200
110 </= 130 185 150 </= 160 197
130 </= 160 180 160 </= 170 195
160 or more 180 170 </= 175 192
Envelope Envelope 50 or less - 175 or more 190
mode 50 </= 110 - T-2-24
110 </= 130 - *Fixing mode is applied to only plain paper mode at 2-sided (Full-speed)
130 </= 160 -
160 or more - Condition 3-2 : A4 size, 2-sided (Full-speed)
T-2-23 Environment temperature= 18 deg C or more
* " -" indicates Fixing mode is not available.
Fixing mode Paper type Temperature Target temperature
before the (deg C)
NOTE: heater turns
The target temperature is 180 deg C when printing in the envelope mode. ON (deg C)
mode (64 to 90g/m2) 50 </= 80 200
80 </= 110 200
110 </= 130 197
130 </= 150 195
150 </= 160 192
160 </= 170 190
170 </= 175 187
175 or more 185
T-2-25
*Fixing mode is applied to only plain paper mode at 2-sided (Full-speed)
Condition 4: A4 size, 2-sided (Half-speed)

• Fixing mode is not available.
2-42
2
2-43
●● Sheet-to-sheet Distance Temperature Control < Related Service Mode >
To prevent the excessive temperature rise and to save the power consumption, the target COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > TEMP-TBL : Fixing temperature setting at plain, 1/1 speed
temperature is set lower than the printing temperature. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB14 : Fixing temperature setting (plain, thin paper,
OHP, 1/2speed)
A4 size, 1-sided COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL2 : Fixing temperature setting (heavy paper 1,
1/2speed)
Fixing mode Paper type Target temperature (deg C)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL4 : Pickup timing adjustment
Transparency Transparency Target temperature -10
mode (60 to 63g/m2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL6 : Fixing temperature setting (envelope)
Plain paper Plain paper Target temperature -10 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBLC : The fixing surface temperature setting on
mode (64 to 90g/m2) Special Mode N
Heavy paper Heavy paper 1 Target temperature -5 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMPTBLC2 : Paper curl correction mode: 2nd
mode (91to 105 g/m2) COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > FLK-RD : Flicker reduction mode
Super Heavy Heavy paper 2 Target temperature -5
paper mode (106 to 128 g/m2)
OHP mode OHP Target temperature -10
Label mode Label Target temperature -10
Envelope mode Envelope -
T-2-26
*The target temperature is not different from the environment temperature.
NOTE:
• The target temperature in the envelope mode is -10 deg C less than the target temperature
during the printing.
• The target temperature in the envelope mode while through-put down performing is -15
deg C less than the target temperature during the printing.
< Related Error Code >

E000-0000 : Fixing assembly temperature rising error during the startup
E001-000x : Fixing assembly abnormal high temperature
E002-0000 : Fixing assembly temperature rising error during the printing
E003-000x : Fixing assembly abnormal low temperature
2-43
2
2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control
2-44
■■Down Sequence Control Fixing mode Step LTRR A4R LGL 16K A5R Envelope Custom
B5R paper
●● Down Sequence when Printing Continuously STMTR size
Purpose: EXECR
To prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area in the case of continuous print, fixing Super Heavy norm 12/12 12/12 10/10 15/15 15/15 - 5/5
offset or deterioration of fixing film. paper mode 1 6/6 6/6 5/5 12/12 12/12 - 4/4
2 3/3 3/3 3/3 6/6 6/6 - 3/3
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 4/4 4/4 - 2/2
Starting conditions:
OHP mode norm 18/18 18/18 - - - - -
The down sequence is performed step by step. When the detected temperature of sub
1 9/9 9/9 - - - - -
thermistor reaches the following temperature or higher for 400 msec continuously, the 2 4/4 4/4 - - - - -
through-put decreases every one step. 3 2/2 2/2 - - - - -
Size Down sequence shift temp (deg C) Envelope norm 12/12 12/12 10/10 - 15/15 - 5/5
mode 1 6/6 6/6 5/5 - 12/12 - 4/4
1st Step 2st Step 3st Step
2 3/3 3/3 3/3 - 6/6 - 3/3
A4R, LTRR, LGL 255 260 265
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 - 4/4 - 2/2
16K 250 255 260
Envelope norm - - - - - 12/12 5/5
A5R, B5R, STMTR, EXER 230 250 260
mode 1 - - - - - 8/8 4/4
Envelope 255 260 265
2 - - - - - 6/6 3/3
Custom paper size 240 250 255
3 - - - - - 4/4 2/2
T-2-27
T-2-28
Operation: Completion conditions:
Temperature is reduced by making wider sheet-to-sheet distance with the maximum 4 When the fixing temperature reaches 170 deg C and lower for 400 msec continuously,
steps to control the temperature at lower than the target temperature for normal print. the through-put returns to the normal step.
Through-put: "iR1430 / 1435" is indicated in the figure Normal

255deg C,400msec
Fixing mode Step LTRR A4R LGL 16K A5R Envelope Custom
B5R paper 1st Step
STMTR size
260deg C,400msec
EXECR
Return
Transparency norm 18/18 18/18 15/15 15/15 15/15 - 5/5 2st Step 170deg C,400msec
1 9/9 9/9 7/7 12/12 12/12 - 4/4
265deg C,400msec
2 4/4 4/4 4/4 10/10 10/10 - 3/3
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 6/6 6/6 - 2/2 3st Step
Plain paper norm 31/37 30/35 25/30 16/16 15/15 - 5/5
F-2-59
1 18/18 18/18 15/15 14/14 12/12 - 4/4
2 4/4 4/4 4/4 10/10 10/10 - 3/3
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 6/6 6/6 - 2/2 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > EDG-WAIT(0: OFF, 1: ON) : Edge temperature rise standby
Heavy paper norm 18/18 18/18 15/15 15/15 15/15 - 5/5 setting
1 9/9 9/9 7/7 12/12 12/12 - 4/4
2 4/4 4/4 4/4 6/6 6/6 - 3/3
●● Down Sequence when Overheating inside the Machine
3 2/2 2/2 2/2 4/4 4/4 - 2/2
Through-put down is not performed by the host machine internal temperature rise.
2-44
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control
2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper Loop Amount Control before Fixing
2-45
■■User Mode Related to Fixing Grade ■■Paper Loop Amount Control before Fixing
The fixing grade is affected by some special modes in user mode which change the control Purpose:
temperature or through-put. The related modes are as follows. To print an appropriate image by avoiding shock when the trailing edge of paper ejects
from the registration roller since an appropriate paper loop is formed between the
Special Mode N transfer and the fixing.
Outline Curl correction mode
Use case When paper jam occurs in 2-sided printing using the curled paper
and absorbed moisture paper. Pressure Roller Fixing Film Unit
Details Paper jam frequently occurs when performing 2-sided printing,
especially with the curled paper and absorbed moisture paper. In this
case, change the setting value to Mode 1 (N1 mode) or Mode 2 (N3
mode).
Drum
• N1 mode: Lower the fixing target temperature for plain paper.
• N3 mode: The through-put decreases during the wait.
Set range AUTO, OFF, N1 Mode, N3 Mode
Default value AUTO
Special Mode S
Outline Performance priority mode <Sensor:OFF> <Sensor:ON>
Use case Cooling down operation is controlled without dropping the through-
put as far as possible. Arch Sensor (SR14) Registration Roller
Details The temperature judgement value of the fixing sub thermistor is
Transfer Roller
changed between the start of cooling down and the end in the last
rotation. F-2-60
Set range OFF(190 deg C), ON(220 deg C) Execution condition:
Default value OFF Performed every paper feed.
Special Mode P
Outline Thin paper mode
Operation:
Use case When paper cling or high-temperature offset occurs with out-of-
specific thin paper. The arch sensor detects paper loops between the transfer nip and the fixing nip. Fixing
Details Control paper cling while changing following conditions. motor drive speed is varied as follows.
1) The fixing motor is set to low speed when the leading edge of paper is fed 35 mm from
Transfer
• Turns ON at 8mm inside of paper.
the transfer nip. This speed is maintained until 91 mm from the nip.
• Turns OFF at the sheet-to-sheet. 2) When the arch sensor on state is detected continuously for 24 ms or longer, the fixing
motor is set to high speed. This speed is maintained until the loop disappears causing
Separation
the arc sensor to turn off.
• -2500V until 6mm inside of paper (leading edge strong bias)
• -1500V other than the above (weak bias) 3) When the arch sensor off state is detected continuously for 24 ms, the fixing motor is
set to low speed. This speed is maintained until a predetermined amount of loop is
Fixing temperature control detected causing the loop sensor to turn on.
• The target temperature in the "Thin paper mode" is set -10
deg C less than the target temperature during the wait, 4) Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the paper trailing edge passes through the transfer
printing and sheet to sheet. nip.
Set range OFF, ON
Default value OFF
T-2-29
2-45
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper Loop Amount Control before Fixing
2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection Features
2-46
5) After the trailing edge is fed 10 mm from the transfer nip, the fixing speed is set to ■■Protection Features
high, and loop control is terminated.
However, if the paper trailing edge tension mode is on and the paper type is ●● Error Latch Control
transparency, the fixing motor drive speed is set to 108.3 mm/s when the paper In case that the main power is turned ON/OFF for recovery when error occurs, heater is
reaches 63 mm in front of the transfer nip. turned on electricity several times to prevent danger condition such as over heat.
6) If the next sheet of paper is available, the operation returns to step 1. Otherwise, the
operation proceeds to last rotation. Operation Specifications:
Operation of turning on electricity to read out error information just after turning ON the
<Related Service Mode> main power is suspended, which the error information is written in the EEPROM error
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR >FX-SP-H: Paper trailing edge tension setting latch storage area of the engine controller PCB when a specific error occurs.
Code Description Error

Clear
E000 Fixing assembly temperature rising error during the startup Yes
0000 The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature
within specified time during the startup.
E001 Fixing assembly abnormal high temperature Yes
0000 The main thermistor detects 260 deg C or more.
0001 The sub thermistor detects 295 deg C or more.
E002 Fixing assembly temperature rising error during the printing Yes
0000 The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature
within specified time during the printing.
E003 Fixing assembly abnormal low temperature Yes
0000 • The main thermistor detects abnormal low temperature during
the printing, sheet-to-sheet and ejection.
• The main thermistor detects abnormal low temperature during
the wait, and cleaning.
0001 • The sub thermistor detects abnormal low temperature during
the printing, sheet-to-sheet and ejection.
• The sub thermistor detects abnormal low temperature during
the wait, and cleaning.
E004 Thermistor disconnection detection error No
0000 • When thermistor disconnection is detected.
• When the engine controller PCB is damaged.
E014 Fixing pressure or release is not available by the fixing motor (M3). No
0000 Fixing release is never detected more than 3 sec or more by the
fixing pressure release sensor 1/2 (SR15/16).
0001 Fixing pressure is never detected more than 3 sec or more by
the fixing pressure release sensor 1/2 (SR15/16).
E261 Zero cross detection error No
0000 Zero cross error is detected.
T-2-30

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR: Clearing error code
2-46
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection Features
2 Technology > Fixing System > Work of Service > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2-47
Work of Service
None
None
■■List of Periodical Servicing

None

None
2-47
2
Technology > Fixing System > Work of Service > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-48
Pickup / Feed System ■■Parts Configuration

●● Arrangement of Rollers
Overview [11]

Item Description
Paper storage method Front loading method
Pickup method Cassette Retard separation method
Multi-purpose Pad separation method [10]

pickup tray [9]
Paper stack Cassette 500 sheets (80g/g/m2)
capacity
Multi-purpose 100 sheets (80g/g/m2)
pickup tray [8]
Paper feed reference Center reference
[7]
[6]
Paper size Cassette A4R, LTRR, LGL, 16K [5]
Multi-purpose A4R, B5R, A5R, LTRR, LGL, STMTR, EXECR, 16K, [4]
pickup tray Envelope (No.10 (COM10), Monarch, ISO-C5, DL) [3]
Custom paper size (76 x 216 mm to 127 x 356 mm)
[2]
Paper grammage Cassette 64 to 90g/m2
Multi-purpose 64 to 128g/m2
pickup tray [1] F-2-61
Paper size switch Cassette User [1] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller

[2] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad
Multi-purpose User [3] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
pickup tray [4] Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller
[5] Cassette 1 Separation Roller
Duplex method Through path
[7] Registration Roller
Option Cassette Feeding Module-AC1
[8] Duplex Roller
FL CASSETTE-AW1
[9] Pressure Roller
T-2-31
[10] Fixing Film Unit
[11] Delivery Reverse Roller
2-48
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-49
●● Arrangement of Sensors ●● Route of Drive
SR10
M3
SL1
SR5
M1
SR14
CL1
SR11
SR13
SL2
SL5
SR12 F-2-63
F-2-62
M1 Main Motor
SR5 Fixing Delivery Sensor M3 Fixing Motor
SR10 Delivery Full Sensor CL1 Registration Clutch
SR11 Pre-registration Sensor SL1 Duplex Solenoid
SR12 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor SL2 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid
SR13 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor SL5 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
SR14 Arch Sensor
2-49
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Diagram of Paper Paths
2-50
■■Diagram of Paper Paths
Reversing point
Delivery point
Pickup from
Manual Feeder
Pickup from Cassette 1
Pickup from Cassette 2

F-2-64
2-50
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Diagram of Paper Paths
2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly
2-51
Controls ■■Cassette Pickup Assembly
The paper inside the cassette is lifted by the middle plate. During pickup, the cassette 1
■■Pickup Block
pickup solenoid (SL2) turns on to rotate the cassette 1 pickup roller a full turn. When the
Reverse/Duplex
cassette 1 pickup roller comes in contact with the paper surface, the top sheet is picked up
Assembly by roller rotation. Only a single sheet of paper is picked up and moved to the feed path by the
cassette 1 separation roller and fed to the registration roller by the cassette 1 feed roller. The
cassette 1 feed roller and cassette 1 pickup roller are driven by the main motor (M1). For the
pickup control of cassette 2, refer to the Cassette Feeding Module-AC1 service manual.
Fixing / Registration
Assembly
[4] M1
Multi-Purpose
Pickup Assembly [3] SL2
[2]
Cassette Pickup [1]

Assembly
F-2-66
F-2-65
[1] Lifter plate
Area Detection / Control
[2] Cassette 1 Separation Roller
Cassette pickup assembly Paper length detection
Paper presence detection [4] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller
Cassette Presence Detection
Multi-purpose pickup assembly Paper presence detection

Paper size detection
Fixing/registration assembly Registration control
Duplex/delivery assembly Number of Circulating Sheets at the 2-sided Print
JAM detection JAM detection
T-2-32
2-51
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly
2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly
2-52
●● Paper Length Detection ■■Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly
It does not have a cassette paper size detection function. The size of the paper in the
The paper in the tray of the multi-purpose pickup tray is forced against the multi-purpose tray
cassette is determined by converting the time from when the registration clutch (CL1) turns
pickup roller by the middle plate. Then, the multi-purpose tray pickup roller and separation
on to when the paper trailing edge passes through the pre-registration sensor (SR11) into
pad separates and feeds a single sheet of paper.
distance.
Multi-purpose Tray
SR11 Pickup Roller M1
SL3
Multi-purpose Tray
Lifter plate Separation Pad
F-2-67
F-2-69
●● Paper Presence Detection ●● Paper Presence Detection
Paper presence is detected by the cassette 1 paper sensor (SR13). It does not have a It does not have a paper size detection function. Likewise the cassette paper size detection,
function for detecting the paper level in the cassette. the size of the paper in the multi-purpose tray is determined by converting the time from when
the registration clutch (CL1) turns on to when the paper trailing edge passes through the pre-
registration sensor (SR11) into distance.
SR13
●● Paper Size Detection
Paper presence is detected by the multi-purpose tray paper sensor (SR12). If paper absence
is detected, same paper size and type are presence in other paper source, auto cassette
change is executed.
F-2-68
Cassette 1 paper sensor Paper level Display on the control panel
OFF Presence
ON Absence
●● Cassette Presence Detection

It does not have a cassette presence detection function. When the cassette is not inserted,
the cassette paper sensor flag moves to the evacuation position so that it is unable to detect
paper and unable to print.
2-52
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly
2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Duplex/Delivery Assembly
2-53
■■Fixing/Registration Assembly ■■Duplex/Delivery Assembly
●● Registration Control The relative time from when the fixing delivery sensor (SR5) is turned off is used to detect
The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M1). In between the registration roller the timing at which the paper trailing edge passes through a point 25 mm upstream from
and the main motor (M1) is the registration clutch (CL1) which controls the on/off state of the delivery/reverse roller. This timing is used to turn on the duplex solenoid (SL1). After the
the registration roller so that the paper and the image on the drum are aligned at a specific duplex solenoid (SL1) turns on, the delivery reverse roller turns in reverse direction, and the
registration. paper is led to the duplex assembly. The paper is fed for the paper length + margin (10 mm) +
duplex solenoid (SL1) connecting time (26 ms), and then the duplex solenoid is turned off.
The paper fed to the duplex assembly is delivered to the registration roller by the duplex
M1 roller.
M3
CL1
Registration Roller Reverse Flapper
SL1 Delivery Reverse Roller
SR5
F-2-70
M1
Duplex Roller
Registration Roller
F-2-71
●● Number of Circulating Sheets at the 2-sided Print

It does not have an internal queue mechanism, a single sheet circulates at a time.
2-53
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Duplex/Delivery Assembly
2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > JAM Detection
2-54
■■JAM Detection ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name
3 0104 DELAY SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
3 0144 SR5/SR10/SR11
Fixing Delivery Sensor/Delivery Full
SR02 Sensor/Pre-registration Sensor
3 0184 SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
SR01
3 01C4 SR5/SR10/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/Delivery Full
SR10 Sensor/Pre-registration Sensor
3 010C SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
3 014C SR5/SR10/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/Delivery Full
Sensor/Pre-registration Sensor
SR5
3 01CC SR5/SR10/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/Delivery Full
Sensor/Pre-registration Sensor
SR14 3 0208 STNRY SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
3 0248 SR5/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/Pre-registration
Sensor
SR11
3 02C8 SR5/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/Pre-registration
Sensor
3 0250 SR5/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/Pre-registration
Sensor
3 02D0 SR5/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/Pre-registration
Sensor
3 1014 POWER ON SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
F-2-72 3 1054 SR5/SR11/SR14 Fixing Delivery Sensor/Pre-registration
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name Sensor/Arch Sensor
4 0001 DELAY SR01 Document End Sensor 3 1094 SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
4 0002 STNRY SR01 Document End Sensor 3 10D4 SR5/SR11/SR14 Fixing Delivery Sensor/Pre-registration
4 0004 DELAY SR01 Document End Sensor Sensor/Arch Sensor
4 0005 STNRY SR01 Document End Sensor 3 1118 DOOR OP SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
4 0071 SEQ NG *1 - - 3 1158 SR5/SR10/SR11/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/Delivery Full
SR14 Sensor/Pre-registration Sensor/Arch
4 0094 POWER ON SR01 Document End Sensor
Sensor
SR02 Document Sensor
4 0095 PICKUP NG SR02 Document Sensor
3 11D8 SR5/SR10/SR11/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/Delivery Full
SR14 Sensor/Pre-registration Sensor/Arch
Sensor
T-2-33
2-54
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > JAM Detection
2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Work of Service > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2-55
Work of Service
None
None

None

None
2-55
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Work of Service > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software Counter
2-56
External Auxiliary System *1:Nothing is displayed as a default. The setting can be changed in the service mode.
<Explanation of the list>
• Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 324 mm or less in paper feed direction)
Controls • Total: Copy + Print; 1 count up
• Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service
■■Software Counter mode items.
The host machine is equipped with counters that indicate the counts of output according to (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 1 to 6.
types of job. These counters are indicated in response to a press on the Counter Check Key • COUNTER 2 to 6 can be changed in the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER).
on the control panel. Counters for each country (model) are listed below. • The change of the counter display type (New method/Conventional method) can be
changed in the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER> CNT-SW).
Count-up timing
1-sided print / 2nd side of 2-sided print : Delivery Full Sensor (SR10)
1st side of 2-seded print : Pre-registration Sensor (SR11)
Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country
Target
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Code
120V Total 1 Copy *1 *1 *1 *1 Group 4
UL model (Total 1)
101 201 000 000 000 000
General (Total 1) KOR
CHN
model
KOR model 101 201 000 000 000 000
CHN model
230V Total Scan Scan *1 *1 *1 Group 1
UK model (Black/ (Total 1) (Total 1)
Small)
type1
113 501 301 000 000 000
(existing type)
230V Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 Group 1

UL model
type2
101 000 000 000 000 000
( new
method)
120V Total 1 Copy *1 *1 *1 *1 Brazil
CLA model (Total 1)
101 201 000 000 000 000

CLA model (Total 1)
101 201 000 000 000 000

T-2-34
2-56
2
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software Counter
2 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software Counter
2-57
User mode User mode

Group Country Default Group Country Default
type setting type setting
KOR KOREA 0 KOREA Group 4 USA - USA
CHN CHINA 0 CHINA North America Canada - USA
Latin America Brazil - BRA
BRA BRAZIL 0 BRA2
120V Mexico - LATIN
Group 1 Austria - AUSTRIA
Others - LATIN
EUR Belarus - BELARUS
Belgium - BELGIUM Group 5 Argentina 0 ARG
Middle East Others(Latin) - EU1
Africa Czech - CZECH
T-2-35
Denmark - DENMARK
Egypt - EU3
Finland - FINLAND
France - FRANCE
Germany - GERMANY
Greece - GREECE
Hungary - HUNGARY
Ireland - IRELAND
Italy - ITALY
Jordan - EU3
Luxembourg - LUXEMBOURG
Netherlands - N.L.
Norway - NORWAY
Poland - POLAND
Portugal - PORTUGAL
Russia - RUSSIA
Saudi Arabia - EU3
Slovenia - SLOVENIA
South Africa - SAF
Spain - SPAIN
Sweden - SWEDEN
Switzerland - SWISS
Ukraine - UKRAINE
United Kingdom 0 U.K.
Others - EU1
- - EU2
Group 3 Hong Kong - HONG KONG
Oceania Singapore 0 SINGAPORE
Asia New Zealand - N.Z.
Latin America Malaysia - MALAYSIA
Vietnam - EU1
230V
Argentina - ARG
Others(Australia) - AUSTRALIA
Others(ASIA) - ASIA
Others(Latin) - EU1
2-57
2
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software Counter
2 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan
2-58
■■Fan ●● Fan Drive Sequence
●● Fan WUP STBY INI PTINT LSTR STBY JAM
/ERROR
Delivery Cooling Fan (FM1)
*2
FM2
Power Supply Cooling Fan
(FM2) *2
Image Formation Part
Cooling Fan (FM3) *1
: Full-speed
FM1
F-2-74
*1: In 1-sided, stops driving at 27 deg C or less and drives full speed at 27 deg C or more.
*2: Stops immediately when Door open is detected.

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DLVFN-SW : Set the delivery cooling fan operation
FM3
F-2-73
No Name Function Error Cord

FM1 Delivery Cooling Fan Cools delivery part E805-0000
FM2 Power Supply Cooling Fan Cools power supply E805-0002
FM3 Image Formation Part Cools image formation part E805-0001

Cooling Fan
T-2-36
2-58
2
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan
2 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power-Saving Mode
2-59
■■Power ■■Power-Saving Mode
●● Power Supply This is the function to save power consumed by the printer. The table below lists various
power-saving modes.
+3.3V Power-Saving Mode Status
Fixing Heater Main Controller +5V Stand-by at power-OFF on the reader
Reader
PCB +24V
Main Switch Power-saving at power-OFF on the reader and the display (LCD)
Heater
(SW93/94)
control +3.3V Sleep Sleep 1 at power-OFF on the reader, engine and the display (LCD)
circuit +3.3V +5V generation +24V ADF Sleep 2 at power-OFF on the reader and the engine.
(All-night) circuit
Sleep 3 (3W at power-off on the reader, the engine and the display (LCD)
+12V generation
circuit
+3.3V sleep) The main controller enters the power-saving mode.
+5V Control Panel *
Automatic shutdown The Main Power Switch is turned OFF when a specified period of
time has passed (default: 4 hours)
after the machine has entered sleep mode (excluding sleep 2).
+24V +3.3V
Laser Scanner *: In the case of a model without fax T-2-37
+24V Unit
AC Driver PCB +24V +12V generation
+3.3V circuit Explanation
Motor Service error of the status
(Not All +3.3V Power-off
Solenoid The automatic shutdown time has passed.
Power-on
-night） Clutch
+24V Power-saving
Fan
+12V Power-on
Sensor Power-off
+24V
+3.3V
Engine Controller Service call

+24V
PCB
depending on the conditions

Standby
+24 V +3.3V Sleep 1B Sleep 3
Automatically shifted
generation generation
circuit circuit +3.3V
OPTION
Left Cover Switch +24V Non-all-night
Cassette Module
Power Supply PCB (SW2) 24V OFF
The energy saver key is pressed.
Control Panel Automatically shifted
+3.3V The auto sleep time has passed. depending on the conditions
HVT PCB +24V Reader

Sleep 1A
OPTION Energy saver The auto sleep
The energy saver time has passed.
Engine
key is pressed. ↓A job is
F-2-75 Non-all-night
The energy saver generated 24V ON
Controller key is pressed. /completed.↑
Hook detection
* The reader is turned ON
The energy saver key is pressed.
only when it is used. Hook detection
The auto sleep time has passed.
Sleep 2
←A job is generated/completed.→
No service error (no error requiring a service visit) has occurred.
F-2-76
2-59
2
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power-Saving Mode
2 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Work of Service > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2-60
Work of Service
None
None

None

None
2-60
2
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Work of Service > Actions when Replacing the Parts
2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
2-61
Embedded RDS ■■Features and benefits

E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing
Product Overview of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware
equipment.
■■Overview
Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the ■■Major Functions
host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by making the setting on this machine,
●● Service mode menu Transmission
information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure
E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases:
information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance
• When a specific alarm and service call error are detected
server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/
• When the setting is changed in service mode
imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System).
The following device information/ status can be monitored. The following shows the transmission timing and the target data for transmission in service
• Billing counts mode menu:
• Parts counter Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry
• Firmware info When the following alarm is detected. COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG No
• Service call error log HV-STS
Alarm codes for transmission: CCD
• Jam log
0x060002,                     // Fixing
• Alarm log DPOT
0x060004 - 0x069999,  // Fixing
DENS
• Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.) 0x090005 - 0x099999,  // Dram
0x100006 - 0016, 0x100022 - 0099, FIXING
0x100101 - 9900,          // Development SENSOR
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs 0x300001 - 0x309999   // High voltage MISC
communication between this machine and the UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol. HT-C
HV-TR
Customer P-PASCAL
Environment UGW When the following service call error is detected. COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG No
This machine HV-STS
Error codes for transmission: CCD
E000 - E00F,  // Fixing
Internet DPOT
E020,              // Development ATR
Firewall DENS
E060 - E06F   // High voltage
Sales Company FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
Administrator
DNS Server Proxy Server HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
The e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system configuration When a value is set to [COPIER - ADJUST] COPIER ADJUST Yes
F-2-77 subordinate’s Service mode menu.
(Transmission will be done at 60 min, later of
setting)
2-61
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
2-62
Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry Limitations
When the first communication test is done. COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG Yes
(For transmission process, 5 minutes after the
execution)
HV-STS ■■Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
CCD
DPOT 1) In the following cases, service mode menu data is not transmitted.
DENS • When an unsent alarm log or service call log has been detected by E-RDS at power-
FIXING on
SENSOR • When an alarm log or service call log to be resent due to a transmission failure is
MISC
detected
HT-C
• When transmission of service mode menu executed at the time of detection of an
HV-TR
P-PASCAL alarm or a service call error ended in failure
ADJUST • If a new alarm or service call error occurs while service mode menu data is being
T-2-38 obtained after detection of an alarm or a service call error, the data being obtained is
not sent.
2) If alarms/service call errors successively occur, and if the time of the host machine is
corrected or changed while the log is being sent, service mode menu data may not be
properly sent. It is because a Link No.* may be applied to the old log although it should be
applied to the new log.
* Link No.:
A common number for linking the service mode menu data with the alarm log/service
call log data to be sent
After completion of log transmission, the service mode menu data is obtained, and is
sent with this number attached.
3) Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed
instantly, but performed when a specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of
service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication test is performed at the
time of power-on. (There is a time lag.)
4) When service mode menu settings ([COPIER] > [Adjust]) are made, transmission is
performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted.
Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the
service mode setting value not subject to transmission or when settlement of a value is
performed without changing the setting value.
2-62
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2-63
Service cautions E-RDS Setup
1) After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS- ■■Confirmation and preparation in advance
DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed.
To monitor this machine with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become
required.
unusual.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
1) Advance confirmation
Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e-Maintenance/
2) The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific
imageWARE Remote is registered in the UGW.
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
• Set port number of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
2) Advance preparations
Default : 443
The following network-related information needs to be obtained from the user's system
administrator in advance.
3) If the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn
OFF the E-RDS setting (ERDS : 0).
Information item 1
4) With this machine, a communication test can be conducted from the [Counter Check] on IP address settings
the Control Panel.* When conducting a communication test from the [Counter Check] on • Automatic setting : DHCP, RARP, BOOTP
the Control Panel, pay attention on the following points: • Manual setting : IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
• During a communication test, do not take any actions such as pressing a key. Actions
are not accepted until the communication test is completed (actions are ignored). Information item 2
• When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or from the [Counter Is there a DNS server in use?
Check] on the Control Panel, do not conduct a communication test from the other. If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
These operations are not guaranteed. • Primary DNS server address
• Secondary DNS server address
NOTE:
*The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result.
If the communication results in failure, the following screens are displayed. Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
Communication
failed. If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
• Proxy server address
Close • Port No. for proxy server
Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
• User name and password required for proxy authentication
2-63
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Initializing E-RDS settings
2-64
3) Network settings 5) Select [COM-TEST] and press the [OK] key.
Based on the results of the information obtained in 2) Advance preparations, make this
machine network related settings. NOTE:
This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.
See Users’ Guide for detailed procedures.
CAUTION: 6) Select [COM-RSLT] and press the [OK] key.

When changes are made to the above-mentioned network settings, be sure to turn OFF If the communication is successful, "OK" is displayed. If "NG" (failed) appears, refer to the
and then ON the main power of this machine. "Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK" is displayed.
NOTE:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM-
LOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule
■■Steps to E-RDS settings information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.
1) Start [Service Mode].
2) Select [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and press the [OK] key.
■■Initializing E-RDS settings
NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values. It is possible to clear the FLASH data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of "Initializing E-RDS settings". default value.
●● Initialization procedure
3) Select [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [ERDS].
4) Press the numeric key [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and press
2) Select [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and press the [OK] key.
the [OK] key. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
NOTE: ●● Setting values and data to be initialized

This operation enables the communication function with UGW. The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
ERDS ERDS
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG
0 1
(0-1) (0-1)
F-2-78
CAUTION:
The settings of RGW-PORT in Service mode must not be change unless there are
specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
2-64
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Initializing E-RDS settings
2 Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2-65
■■Report output procedure FAQ
1) Start Service Mode. No.1
2) Select [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [MISC-P] > [ERDS-LOG], and press [OK]. Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail?
Output sample A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming "NG!" case.
• Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been halted.
12/03 2015 10:14AM
*********************** • Network cable is blocked off.
*** E-RDS-COM-LOG *** • Proxy server settings is not correct.
***********************
No.01 DATE 12/03 2015 TIME 03:21 AM CODE 05000003 No.2

Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed. Q: When does E-RDS send counter information to UGW? How many data is sent?
A: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW
No.02 DATE 12/03 2015 TIME 03:21 AM CODE 00000000
side. The send time cannot be specified on the E-RDS side. Data is sent once every 16
Information SUSPEND: mode changed.
hours.
No.03 DATE 12/03 2015 TIME 03:18 AM CODE 05000003 The data size of counter information is approx. 285 KB.
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.
No.04 DATE 12/03 2015 TIME 03:18 AM CODE 00000000 No.3

Information SUSPEND: mode changed. Q: Will data which failed to be sent due to an error in communication with UGW be resent?
A: Data shown below will be resent.
No.05 DATE 12/03 2015 TIME 01:56 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed. • Jam log
• Service call log
• Alarm log
F-2-79 • Service mode menu
The newest data is resent only when the settings are changed in service mode.
• Browser information
It is resent only when the web browser option is enabled.
Data is resent endlessly (after 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 minutes since the occurrence of
communication error; once 30 minutes have passed, it is resent at 30-minute intervals) until it
is sent successfully. Resend continues even if the power is turned OFF and then ON.
No.4
Q: What is the upper limit of the number of COM-LOGs?
A: Up to 5 log data can be saved.
2-65
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2 Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2-66
No.5 No.10
Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed. Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu
Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA? transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of
A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic" while "Integrated" authentication is used for Microsoft ISA transmission?
(as default); therefore, authentication with E-RDS is available if you change the setting to A: No steps peculiar to Transmitting Service mode menu. As for the data that applies to
"Basic" authentication on the server. transmission of the service mode, see the "Service mode menu Transmission".
No.6 No.11
Q: Can I turn this machine power off during the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system Q: Counter information could not be sent at the scheduled send time due to the power of this
operation? machine being turned OFF. Will the counter information be sent later when the power of
A: While operating the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system, the power of the device this machine is turned ON?
must be ON. If power OFF is needed, do not leave the device power OFF for long time. A: Yes. When a scheduled send such as that for counter could not be executed due to the
It will become "Device is busy, try later" errors if the power supply of network equipment power of this machine being turned OFF, etc., and the scheduled send time has already
such as HUB is made prolonged OFF. passed at power-on, the send is executed immediately.
The following shows data send according to the status of this machine.
No.7
Q: Although a Service call error may not be notified to UGW, the reason is what? Status of this machine
Send types
Power ON Power OFF Sleep
A: If a service technician in charge turns off the power supply of this machine immediately
Scheduled send Sent Not sent*1 Sent*2
after error occurred once, It may be unable to notify to UGW because data processing does Immediate send
Sent - Sent*2
not take a time from the controller of this machine to NIC though, the data will be saved on (Service call log / Alarm log / Jam log)
the RAM. T-2-39
If the power supply is blocked off while starting up, the data will be inevitably deleted. *1: Immediately sent if the send time has already passed at power-on.
*2: Sent after recovery from sleep mode.
No.8
Q: How does E-RDS operate while this machine is placed in the sleep mode? No.12
A: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up Q: What is the number of the network port used by E-RDS?
asleep, then starts to send the data to the UGW. The system also waits for completion of A: The port number used by E-RDS for communication with UGW is "443".
data transmission and let the device to shift to asleep status again. If this setting is changed, an error occurs during communication with UGW. Therefore this
However, transition time to the Real Deep Sleep depends on the device, and the transition setting should not be changed unless otherwise instructed.
to sleep won’t be done if the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes.
No.13
No.9 Q: After the setting for E-RDS was made, the IP address of the host machine was changed. In
Q: Is E-RDS compatible with Department counter? that case, is it necessary to execute COM-TEST again?
A: No, E-RDS does not support Department counter. A: It is not necessary to execute COM-TEST again because the IP address used by E-RDS is
automatically changed. However, it is necessary to turn OFF and then ON the main power
of this machine to reflect the change in the setting of the IP address
2-66
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-67
Troubleshooting Does the screen display "Response from the host."?
YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
No.1 NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the
Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG! address with the user’s system administrator.
Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.
Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication error log (COM-LOG)
Remedy 1: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check network connections
Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which this machine is connected ON? 2) Select [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG].
YES: Proceed to Step 2). The communication error log list screen is displayed.
NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected.
3) When a code is displayed, take an appropriate action referring to "Error code and strings".
2) Confirm loop back address (* In case of IPv4 )
Select [Menu] > [Network Settings] and enter System Manager ID and PIN. No.2
Select [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter "127.0.0.1", and touch Symptom: A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly.
the [Apply] button. Cause: The network environment is inappropriate, or RGW-PORT settings for E-RDS have
been changed.
Does the screen display "Response from the host."? (See the next figure.)
Remedy: The following points should be checked.
YES: Proceed to Step 3).
1) Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
NO: There is a possibility that this machine’s network settings are wrong. Check the
details of the IPv4 settings once more. 2) Check the E-RDS setting values.
• Check the communication error log from COM-LOG.
3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network.
• Check RGW-PORT settings has changed. If RGW-PORT settings has changed, restore
Request the user to ping this machine from a PC connected to same network.
initial values. For initial values, see "Service cautions".
Does this machine respond?
YES: Proceed to Step 4).
No.3
NO: Confirm the details of this machine’s IP address and subnet mask settings.
Symptom: Registration information of the E-RDS machine was deleted from the device
4) Confirm DNS connection information on Web Portal, and then registered again. After that, if a communication test is
(a) Select [Menu] > [Network Settings] and enter System Manager ID and PIN. left unperformed, the device setting in the UGW becomes invalid.
Select [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > [DNS Settings] > [DNS Server Settings] Cause: When the registration information of the E-RDS machine is deleted, information
> [Primary DNS Server] and [Secondary DNS Server], write down the primary and related to E-RDS is also deleted.
secondary addresses of the DNS server, and press the [OK] key. Therefore, when 7 days have passed without performing a communication test after
registering the E-RDS machine again, the device setting becomes invalid.
(b) Select [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS server noted down
Remedy: Perform a communication test before the device setting becomes invalid.
in step a) as the IP address, and press the [OK] key.
Does the screen display "Response from the host."?

YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
NO: Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address, and
then press the [OK] key.
2-67
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-68
No.4
Error code and strings
Symptom: There was a log, indicating "Network is not ready, try later" in error details of COM-
LOG list. The following error information is displayed on the communication error log details screen.
Cause: A certain problem occurred in networking. (Here, "server" means UGW.)
Remedy: Check and take actions mentioned below. • The error information are displayed in the following form.
1) Check networking conditions and connections. [*] [Character strings] [Functional classification (Method name)] [Error details provided by
UGW]
2) Turn on the power supply of this machine and perform a communication test about 60
seconds later. NOTE:
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test
No.5 (method name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.
Symptom: "Unknown error" is displayed though a communication test (COM-TEST) has done
successfully.
Cause: It could be a problem at the UGW side or the network load is temporarily faulty. No. Code Cause Remedy
1 0000 0000 Unmatched Operation Mode Initialize the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT).
Remedy: Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists, check the UGW status
2 0500 0003 Turning OFF and then ON the main Perform a communication test (COM-
with a network and UGW administrator. power of this machine while the TEST).
communication test had not been
No.6 performed although E-RDS is enabled.
3 0xxx 0003 Blank schedule data have been received Perform and complete a communication
Symptom: When a communication test (COM-TEST) is repeatedly executed, an error occurs.
from UGW. test (COM-TEST).
Cause: During communication conducted after execution of a COM-TEST, another COM- 4 0xxx 0003 Communication test has not completed. Perform and complete a communication
TEST was executed again. test (COM-TEST).
Remedy: When repeatedly executing COM-TEST, execute COM-TEST at intervals of 5 5 84xx 0003 A communication test has been Set E-RDS switch (ERDS) to 1, and then
attempted with the E-RDS switch being perform a communication test (COM-
minutes or more.
OFF. TEST).
6 8600 0002 Processing (event processing) within the Turn the device OFF/ ON. If the error
8600 0003 device has failed. persists, replace the device system
8600 0101 software. (Upgrade)
8600 0201
8600 0305
8600 0306
8600 0401
8600 0403
8600 0414
8600 0415
7 8700 0306 Improper value is written in at the head Turn the device OFF/ ON.
of the NVMEM domain (nonvolatile
memory domain) of E-RDS.
8 8700 0306 Improper value is written in at the head Turn the device OFF/ ON.
of the NVMEM domain (nonvolatile
memory domain) of Ae-RDS.
9 8xxx 0004 Method which E-RDS is not supporting Contact help desk.
attempted.
2-68
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-69
No. Code Cause Remedy No. Code Cause Remedy
10 8xxx 0101 Communication with UGW has been Perform and complete a communication 23 8xxx 200B Server address name resolution has Check that Internet connection is
successful, but an error of some sort has test (COM-TEST). failed. available in the environment.
prevented UGW from responding. 24 8xxx 2014 Could not connect to proxy server due to Check proxy server address / port and
When (Null) is displayed at the end improper address. re-enter as needed.
of the message, this indicates that 25 8xxx 2015 Could not connect to proxy server due to • Check that the proxy server name is
there has been an error in the HTTPS name resolution error of proxy address. correct. If the proxy server name is
communication method. correct, check the DNS connection, as
11 8xxx 0201 During the communication test, there When the error occurs, report the details per the initial procedures described in
8xxx 0202 has been some kind of error in the to the support section. the troubleshooting.
8xxx 0203 schedule values passed from UGW. After the UGW side has responded, try • Specify the IP address as the proxy
8xxx 0204 the communication test again. server name.
8xxx 0206 26 8xxx 201E Proxy authentication is failed. Check the user name and password
12 8xxx 0207 The schedule data in the inside of Perform a communication test (COM- required in order to login to the proxy,
8xxx 0208 E-RDS is not right. TEST). and re-enter as needed.
13 8xxx 0221 Alarm/Alert filtering error: The number Alert filtering is not supported by UGW. 27 8xxx 2028 • No route certificate installed in device. • Install the latest device system
of elements of the list specified by the • Certificate other than that initially software. (Upgrade)
server is over restriction value. registered in the user's operating • Correctly set the date and time of the
14 8xxx 0222 Alarm filtering error: Unjust value is Alert filtering is not supported by UGW. environment is being used, but has device.
included in the element of the list not been registered with the device.
specified by the server. • The date and time of the device is not
15 8xxx 0304 The semaphore consumption error at the Try again a communication test after a correct.
time of a communication test. period of time. 28 8xxx 2029 The server certificate verification error Contact help desk.
16 8xxx 0709 When upgrading firmware, the Obtain the sublog, and contact the occurred.
TrackingID notified by Updater differs support department of the sales 29 8xxx 2046 • The route certificate registered with Check that the device time and date are
from the thing of UGW designates. company. the device has expired. correctly set.
17 8xxx 2000 Some other kind of communication error Perform and complete a communication • Certificate other than that initially If the device time and date are correct,
has occurred. test (COM-TEST). registered in the user’s operating upgrade to the latest system software.
18 8xxx 2001 The header of the URL of the registered Contact help desk. environment is being used, but has
UGW is not in https format. not been registered with the device.
19 8xxx 2002 A URL different to that specified by the Contact help desk. • The device time and date is outside of
UGW has been set. the certificated period.
20 8xxx 2003 Communication attempted without Check the network connection, as per 30 8xxx 2047 Due to network congestion, etc., the If this error occurs when the
confirming network connection, just the initial procedures described in the response from UGW does not come communication test is being run or
after turning OFF and then ON the main troubleshooting. within the specified time. (HTTPS level Service Browser is being set, try again
power of this machine in which the Perform a communication test (COM- time out) after a period of time.
network preparations are not ready. TEST) about 60 seconds later, after turn 31 8xxx 2048 There is a mistake in the UGW URL, Contact help desk.
on the device. and UGW cannot be accessed. (Path is
21 8xxx 2004 Communication with UGW has been Try again after a period of time. wrong)
successful, but an error of some sort has Check detailed error code (Hexadecimal) 32 8xxx 2052 The data which is not URL is inputted Contact help desk.
prevented UGW from responding. and [Error details in UGW] from UGW into URL field.
displayed after the message. 33 8xxx 2058 SOAP Client fails to obtain SOAP Perform and complete a communication
22 8xxx 200A • TCP/IP communication fault • Check the network connection, as per Response. test (COM-TEST).
• The IP address of device is not set. the initial procedures described in the Possibility of a problem in UGW or of a
troubleshooting. temporary problem in the network load.
• When proxy is used, make the settings 34 8xxx 2063 SOAP communication error has Check that the value of port number of
for proxy, and check the status of the occurred. UGW (RGW-PORT) is 443.
proxy server.
2-69
2
2-70
No. Code Cause Remedy
35 xxxx xxxx An internal error, such as memory Turn the device OFF/ ON.
unavailable, etc., has occurred during a Or replace the device system software.
device internal error phase. (Upgrade)
36 xxxx xxxx Internal error occurred at the initiating Turn the device OFF/ ON.
E-RDS.
T-2-40
*1:[Hexadecimal]: indicates an error code returned from UGW.
[Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from UGW.
2-70
2
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Function Overview > Purpose for Using the Function
2-71
Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) ■■Purpose for Using the Function
The purpose of using the DCM function is described below using three use cases.
Function Overview Case Export/import Use Case
A Export from and import to the • Used as backup in preparation for a device failure
This function (DCM: Device Configuration Management) is used to export/import setting value same device • Used as backup before changing settings
information in the host machine as a file (DCM file). B Export from and import to a • Collectively migrate data when replacing the host machine
different device of the same • Copy the settings to multiple devices (during kitting)
The following setting information is exported/imported.
model
• Setting information of [Settings/ Registration] C Export from and import to a • Migrate the settings from the old model to the new model
• Setting information of service mode different model when replacing the host machine
• Address Book • Migrate the settings of the base machine to a different
model for a large-scale user
The DCM file is exported to a USB flash drive or PC local disk from the Control Panel or
T-2-41
remote UI. ●● Export from and Import to the Same Device (Case A)
The exported DCM file can be returned to the original device or imported to a different device. In this use case, setting information is exported as backup in preparation for a device failure
When the file is returned to the original device, this can be used as a setting backup function, or backup before changing settings.
and when the file is imported to a different device, this can be used as a setting information Information of various settings is backed up just in case.
migration function.
Data can also be imported to or exported from an iR-ADV machine by using iW EMC/MC Export
DCM Plug-in.
Import
In the case of the setting value backup function before DCM, an exported file could be DCM file
imported to the same device, but the DCM function enables import of an exported file to a F-2-81
different device. ●● Export from and Import to a Different Device of the Same Model (Case B)
In this use case, the exported setting information is copied to a different device of the same
Image
model. This enables efficient installation in the case of installing multiple devices of the same
model at a time (for example, kitting).
DCM support device
USB memory
device DCM file
DCM file
Export Import
Settings/ A different machine
DCM file of the same model
Registration DCM support
DCM file device F-2-82
DCM file
Remote UI ●● Export from and Import to a Different Model (Case C)
Service mode In this use case, the exported setting information is copied to a device of a different model.
Not that all the information that can be exported using DCM can be imported, but this is
DCM file iW EMC/MC DCM support effective in the case of replacing an old device or copying the settings of the base machine in
with DCM Plug-in DCM file iR-ADV
an environment where various models exist.
F-2-80
NOTE: Export Import

In order to export or import setting information using DCM, it is necessary that the
device supports DCM. DCM file A different model
F-2-83
2-71
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Function Overview > Purpose for Using the Function
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Function Overview > Compatibility
2-72
■■Combination of Information Exported/Imported by DCM, Means, ■■Compatibility
and Storage Locations ●● Compatibility of DCM Files
Compatibility of DCM files differs depending on the export/import method as shown below.
●● Information Exported/Imported as a DCM File
Exported from Imported to
A DCM file is exported and imported using the Control Panel, remote UI, or the iW EMC
iR series not iR series supporting DCM iR-ADV series
server, depending on the situation of the site.
supporting DCM
The information exported/imported differs depending on the means. Remote UI Via DCM Plug-in Remote UI DCM Plug-in Remote UI/USB
Combinations of them are shown in the following table. iR series not Yes No With No No
supporting DCM conditions
*1
Menu used Operation Information exported iR series No Yes Yes With No
Setting values of Address Service mode supporting DCM conditions *2
menu options book*1 setting values iR-ADV series No With conditions No Yes Yes
[Settings/Registration] Control panel Yes (fixed) *2 Yes (fixed) *2 No *2
menu Remote UI Yes Yes With conditions *3 Yes: Compatible T-2-44
Service mode Control Panel No No Yes With conditions *1: Address books can be imported. Other information cannot be imported.
Remote UI No No Yes
With conditions *2: A part of address book can be imported using ABM Plug-in. Other
iW EMC DCM Plug-in Yes Yes With conditions *4
T-2-42
information cannot be imported. Compatibility of the DCM file imported via DCM Plug-in
depends on the specification of DCM Plug-in.
*1: Models without address books are excluded. In the case of a fax option model without
No: Incompatible
SEND function, address books are exported only if a fax option is connected with the
device.
*2: When the [Settings/ Registration] menu is used from the Control Panel, both the setting ●● Compatibility of Data
menu information and the address book are imported/exported. It is not possible to export/ The following table shows compatibility of data in the case where the device from which the
import only either of them. data is exported and the device to which the data is imported differ in model and/or serial
Information which is not included in the data to be imported is not imported. number.
*3: Service mode is added to the data to be exported only when service mode level 1 > For items that are imported in Cases A, B, and C, refer to "List of Items Which Can Be
COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT is set. Imported".
For items to be imported, refer to "List of Items Which Can Be Imported". Model Serial number Import Process
*4: It is included only in the data to be imported. If service mode data is not included in the Same Same Items corresponding to Case A are imported. *1
Same Different *3 Items corresponding to Case B are imported. *1
data to be imported, the data is not imported.
Different Different *3 Items corresponding to Case C are imported. *2
Different Same The file is judged to be invalid, and the process ends with an error.
●● DCM File Storage Location T-2-45
DCM files are saved in the following locations. *1: If the firmware version at the time of import differs from that at the time of export,
Operation Menu used Storage destination predetermined corrective processing may be performed.
Control Panel [Settings/ Registration] menu USB flash drive *2: Predetermined corrective processing may be performed.
Service mode *3: If a serial number is missing, the serial numbers are judged to be mismatched.
Remote UI [Settings/Registration] menu PC local disk
Service mode
DCM Pug-in Local disk of the iW EMC/MC server
T-2-43
2-72
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Function Overview > Compatibility
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Specifications > Specifications during Execution of a Process
2-73
Specifications ■■Specifications Related to Department ID Management
• Department ID information is exported only when the Department ID management setting
■■Specifications Related to DCM Files
is enabled.
●● Overall Specifications Related to DCM Files Regardless of the state of the department ID management setting, the state of department
• The DCM file to be exported is created directly under the root of the USB flash drive. ID management (enabled/disabled) and the system administrator information are exported.
• The file name is not case sensitive. The department ID counter is not exported.
• The DCM file exported/imported from the Control Panel or service mode is named as • When importing department ID information, the import process differs depending on the
shown below: combination of the department ID set in the host machine and the department ID set in the
• Control Panel: compact.dcm data to be imported.
• Service mode: service.dcm "ID_1" has not been set "ID_1" has been set in the host
• When the file is exported, if a file of the same name exists in the export destination, the in the host machine. machine.
behavior will be as shown below. "ID_1" has been set in the Information of "ID_1" is Information excluding the department ID
• When the file is exported from the Control Panel: A message asking whether the user data to be imported. imported. The department counter information of "ID_1" in the host
ID counter is "0". machine is imported.
nts to overwrite appears. "ID_1" has not been set in Not overwritten Information of "ID_1" is deleted.
• When the file is exported from service mode: The file is always overwritten. the data to be imported.
Department ID information Not overwritten Not overwritten
●● Import of an Invalid File has not been set in the data
• When an invalid file is imported, the process ends with an error. to be imported.
• When a file which does not contain any data to be imported is imported, the process ends * ID_1 indicates a department ID. T-2-46
with an error.
• When there is an error in the imported file, the import process ends with an error in some ■■Specifications during Execution of a Process
cases.
●● Control Panel/Remote UI during a Process
• When there is an error in the imported data, the data is skipped and the import process
• During export or import, a screen is displayed to prohibit operation from the Control Panel
continues.
and remote UI.
• When the imported file fails to be read in the middle of the reading process or when the
• During export or import, the keys excluding the energy saver key are disabled.
format is invalid, the import process is stopped. In that case, the machine is not rebooted.
The data is not rolled back to the state it was before import.
●● Cancel during a Process
●● Encryption Password During export or import, the process cannot be canceled by user operation.
• It is necessary to set a password during the export process because data such as the
password of the address book set by the user are encrypted when the DCM file is exported/
●● Behavior when a Service Error Occurs
imported.
Even when a service error has occurred, export and import can be executed.
• The password must consist of 32 or less ASCII characters. A password exceeding 32
However, this does not include errors which disable the DCM function.
characters cannot be entered.
• If a wrong password is entered at import, the encrypted setting values cannot be decoded,
●● Export/import process from service mode
and the import of the setting values end with an error.
When performing export/import process from service mode, no error is displayed even when
• It is necessary to specify a password even when the data to be exported does not contain
an error has occurred.
any data to be encrypted. However, in the case of export from service mode, it is not
necessary to enter the password, and the password (28282828) is entered automatically.。
2-73
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Specifications > Specifications during Execution of a Process
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Specifications > Specifications Related to Address Books
2-74
■■Process after Import • When an address book is imported, the data previously stored is not cleared but overwritten
with the records stored in the new address book. In other words, after the address book
After the setting file is imported using the DCM function, the following process is performed.
is overwritten with a new address book, some of the previously stored records remain in
Import method Process some cases. All the registered call keys will be cleared.
Operation Panel When the import process is completed successfully, the device will be restarted in
25 seconds.
Remote UI When the import process is completed successfully, the device will be restarted in Image of overwriting an address book
25 seconds. However, the device will not be restarted if only the address book is
imported. Current address book Address book New address book
to be imported
iW EMC DCM When the import process is completed successfully, the device will be restarted
Plug-in in 90 seconds (time for DCM Plug-in to obtain the import result). However, the Address 1 Address 1 Address 1
device will not be restarted if only the address book is imported.
Overwritten addresses
T-2-47
Address 2 Address 2 Address 2
■■Specifications Related to Address Books Import
Import
Address 3 Address 3 Address 3
●● Import of an Address Book
• The address book is imported after the existing address book in the host machine has been Address which remains
Address 4 Address 4
cleared. without being overwritten
• If an error occurs during import, the data is not returned to the state of data cleared before
F-2-84
import.
• Even if other data (settings of menu, service mode, etc.) is specified as data to be imported,
• Addresses which exceed the number of addresses that can be registered are not imported.
only the address book is imported.
• Group addresses which include addresses that were not imported are not registered.
• Addresses whose required field shown below is not filled in are skipped and the import
• When entering the password for the address book from the Control Panel, if authentication
process is executed. In that case, the import process is continued without displaying an
is skipped, the address book is excluded from the process.
error message.
●● Import of an Address Book in an Old Format Type Required field

It is possible to import an address book in an old format that was exported from a device not Group address Addresses included in the group
Fax Dial number
supporting DCM, but it is not possible to export an address book in an old format.
E-mail E-mail address
There is no encryption password for an address book of an old format, but something needs File server (SMB) Host name (IP address) protocol
to be entered, therefore a dummy password (enter anything and the passwords will match) T-2-48
needs to be entered. • When an address book is imported, if there is a field with an attribute that is not any of the
The specifications of import of an address book in an old format are as shown below. foregoing required fields and cannot be interpreted, import of only that attribute is skipped
• When an address book is imported, the consistency is checked while reading a record, not without abandoning the entire record. In that case, the import process is continued without
that the consistency of all records is checked before import. displaying an error message.
• If an accidental error (such as power discontinuity during import) occurs during import, the • If the number of characters exceeds the upper limit at import, the excess characters are
address book data which was partially imported does not remain and returns to the state truncated on the right.
before import.
• Passwords such as the password for SMB are not recorded in an address book in an old
format. Therefore these passwords are not set in the address book to be imported.
2-74
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Specifications > Specifications Related to Address Books
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Limitations > Corrective Processing
2-75
Limitations • When an out-of-range value is imported
Since the value is not comprehensible to the import destination device, the out-of-range
■■Job Control value is not imported.
In that case, the default value is not set but the originally registered value remains effective.
Do not execute the following processes during import or export.
• Reception of a new job (Execution of calibration requested by the engine is allowed.) • When a necessary license or software option does not exist
• Firmware update (during which faxes cannot be received due to busy line.) In that case, the specification differs depending on the setting value.
Depending on the type of the license or software option, import is executed without the
If any of the following conditions is met, import/export is not executed.
license or software option in some cases. Therefore the following behaviors may occur.
• A job exists. (If calibration is requested by the engine, import/export is executed, ignoring
the calibration job.) <Assumption>
• A firmware update is being performed. There is "Setting 1" (default value: 0) which is required only when "License 1" has been
• Another import or export is being executed. activated.
Device A: "License 1" activated, "Setting 1" set to "1"
CAUTION: Device B: "License 1" not activated, "Setting 1" set to "0"
During import, print/fax jobs from the PC are not received and are stuck in the spooler
Device C: "License 1" activated, "Setting 1" set to "2"
on the PC.
Those jobs stuck in the spooler may not be printed properly after reboot of the host <Operation>
machine. In that case, those jobs have not been received and are not even recorded in
history. Export the settings of Device A and import them to Device B.
Export the settings of Device B and import them to Device C.
■■Control Characters <Result>

"Setting 1" of Device C is set to "1".
If the character string to be exported (e.g. a destination name in the address book) includes
The foregoing behavior may occur because the setting value related to the license is not
an ASCII control character (0x01-0x08, 0xb, 0xc, 0xe-0x19, or 0x7f), the character string
always the default value in Device B where the license has not been activated.
excluding the control character is exported.
Image of DCM file import
■■Corrective Processing
Device A Device B Device C
When data is imported, corrective processing of setting values (changing a process to another
process that can be performed) may be performed. Corrective processing is performed to
process data so that it can be used by the import destination device.
Even when a setting value has been changed by corrective processing, the import process is
treated as successful. License 1: Not
License 1: Activated License 1: Activated
Examples are shown below. Please note that the following cases are just examples, and how activated Disabled
Export/import Export/import
each item is processed by corrective processing varies depending on the initial settings and
Setting value: 1 Setting value: 1 Setting value: 2 > 1
the service mode settings.
• When the length of the character string exceeds the limit F-2-85
If a character string exceeding the length permitted by the import destination device is
registered as, for example, a device name, only the length of the character string that can
be registered on the import destination device is registered. The excess characters of the
character string are deleted.
2-75
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Limitations > Corrective Processing
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information > Procedure for Export/Import Using the Control Panel (Service Mode)
2-76
• When a necessary hardware option does not exist
Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode
The corrective processing performed is the same as that performed when an option has
been changed during power discontinuity. Setting Information
<Example> This chapter describes the procedure for exporting/importing the service mode setting
Corrective processing performed when "Paper Source = Optional Deck" has been set information using DCM.
as a favorite setting. Examples are shown below: For the procedure for exporting/importing [Settings/Registration] or address book data that
• When this connection is released due to a failure of the optional deck, etc. can be performed by users, refer to the User's Guide (e-Manual).
• When a setting file exported from a device with an optional deck is imported to a
device without an optional deck
■■Procedure for Export/Import Using the Control Panel (Service
Please note that this rule does not always apply to all the setting values.
Mode)
■■Power Supply Control By operating from the Control Panel (service mode), it is possible to export/import a file
When power discontinuity occurs during export or import, the following behavior occurs. (service.dcm) containing service mode setting information from/to a USB flash drive
• The import process that had been performed before the power discontinuity remains connected to the host machine.
reflected, and the data is not rolled back. The following USB flash drives can be used as the export destination.
• When power discontinuity occurs during an export process, export is not executed. • USB flash drive in FAT 16 format (storage capacity: 2 GB)
Moreover, since the import/export history is not retained in the host machine, no records • USB flash drive in FAT 32 format (storage capacity: 32 GB)
remain.
●● Procedure for Export Using Service Mode
■■Sleep Operation during a Process 1) Connect a USB memory device to the USB memory port.
The device does not enter deep sleep mode during import or export.
Although this is not disclosed to users, sleep mode internally changes according to the usage
conditions of the host machine.
Sleep mode ranges from energy saver mode where indicators such as LEDs are turned OFF
to deep sleep mode where even the CPU stops.
Even if the conditions for entering deep sleep mode are met, the device does not enter deep
sleep mode during export or import.
If a process is started from remote UI or iW EMC/MC, the host machine recovers to energy F-2-86
saver mode and performs the process. However, if service mode data is not included in the 2) Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.
process, the process is started without waiting for recovery of the engine. COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
SERVICE MODE
COPIER DISPLAY
FEEDER IO CCD
FAX ADJUST CLEAR PANEL-UP
TESTMODE FUNCTION MISC-R LOGWRITE
OPTION MISC-P IMPORT
SYSTEM EXPORT
F-2-87
2-76
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information > Procedure for Export/Import Using the Control Panel (Service Mode)
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information > Procedure for Export/Import Using the Control Panel (Service Mode)
2-77
3) The message shown below which is displayed during the process will disappear. When the ●● Procedure for Import Using Service Mode
display has returned to the original state, remove the USB flash drive. 1) To the directory directly under the root of the USB flash drive, save a setting information file
(service.dcm) to be imported.
PANEL-UP
LOGWRITE 2) Connect a USB flash drive to the USB port.
Executing. . . IMPORT
EXPORT
F-2-88
The procedure for removing the USB flash drive is shown below.
1. Press the [Reset] key.
2. Press the [Status Monitor] key.
3. Select [Device Status] using the UP/Down key, and press [OK].
4. Select [Remove Memory Media], and press [OK]. F-2-89
5. Remove the USB flash drive. 3) Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT
CAUTION:
SERVICE MODE
When exporting setting information using the [Settings/Registration] menu, if a USB COPIER DISPLAY
flash drive is not connected, a message prompting the user to connect a USB flash FEEDER IO CCD
drive will appear and the process cannot be executed. FAX ADJUST CLEAR PANEL-UP
TESTMODE FUNCTION MISC-R LOGWRITE
On the other hand, when this function is used, export can be executed without OPTION MISC-P IMPORT
connecting a USB flash drive, therefore be sure to connect a USB flash drive before SYSTEM EXPORT
executing export.
F-2-90
4) The message shown below which is displayed during the process will disappear. When the
4) Check that a setting information file (service.dcm) exists in the directory directly under the display has returned to the original state, remove the USB flash drive.
root of the USB flash drive.
This completes the procedure for exporting a setting information file. PANEL-UP
LOGWRITE
Executing. . . IMPORT
EXPORT
F-2-91
5) Enter service mode, and check that the setting information is reflected.
This completes the procedure for importing a setting information file.
2-77
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information > Procedure for Export/Import Using the Control Panel (Service Mode)
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information > Procedure for Export/Import Using Remote UI (Service Mode)
2-78
■■Procedure for Export/Import Using Remote UI (Service Mode) CAUTION:
By operating from the remote UI, it is possible to export/import a file containing service mode When it is executed without connecting USB flash drive, the error message is not
setting information from/to a USB flash drive connected to the host machine or the local disk displayed.
on the PC. Processing doesn't export anywhere of any though it seems to have completed it
correctly.
●● Procedure for Export Using Service Mode (Remote UI) Confirm USB memory device has been connected before it executes it from the above-
With this model, service mode can be used from the remote UI. mentioned reason without fail.
Setting information can be exported by remote control by following the procedure shown
below.
Since the information can be output only to a USB flash drive connected to the host machine,
display has returned to the original state, remove the USB flash drive.
this is not strictly remote operation.
The following USB flash drives can be used for export/import.
• USB flash drive in FAT 16 format (storage capacity: 2 GB)
• USB flash drive in FAT 32 format (storage capacity: 32 GB)
1) Connect a USB memory device to the USB memory port.
F-2-94
4) Check that a setting information file (service.dcm) exists in the directory directly under the
root of the USB flash drive.
This completes the procedure for exporting a setting information file.
F-2-92 ●● Procedure for Import Using Service Mode (Remote UI)

2) Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode. Import the service mode setting file that was exported to the USB flash drive in the previous
Access service mode (remote UI), select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT, procedure into the host machine.
and click [EXEC]. 1) To the directory directly under the root of the USB flash drive, save a setting information file
(service.dcm) to be imported.
2) Connect a USB memory device to the USB memory port.
F-2-93
F-2-95
2-78
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information > Procedure for Export/Import Using Remote UI (Service Mode)
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information > Procedure for Export/Import Using Remote UI ([System Management S
2-79
3) Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode. ■■Procedure for Export/Import Using Remote UI ([System
Access service mode (remote UI), select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT,
and click [EXEC]. Management Settings] Menu)
●● Procedure for Export Using Remote UI ([System Management
Settings] Menu)
Service mode setting information can be exported from the [System Management Settings]
menu by setting the following service mode setting value to "1".
1) Enter service mode, and set the following item to "1".
COPIER > OPRION > USER > SMC-EXPT
F-2-96
display has returned to the original state, remove the USB flash drive.
TNRB-SW : 0
SCALL-SW : 0
SCALLCMP : 0
PC-MODE : 0
SMD-EXPT : 1
F-2-98
F-2-97
5) Enter service mode, and check that the setting information is reflected.
NOTE:
This completes the procedure for importing a setting information file. The [SMC-EXPT] setting can be specified either from the Control Panel or from the
remote UI.
2) Exit service mode, and start the remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode.
F-2-99
2-79
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information > Procedure for Export/Import Using Remote UI ([System Management S
2-80
3) Click [Settings/Registration]. 5) Specify the settings for exporting, and click [Start Exporting].
Enter the encryption password and click [Start Exporting]. The menu options data will be
exported.
F-2-100
4) Click [Import/Export] > [Export].
F-2-102
Address Book Select the check box to export the Address Book data.
Settings/Registration Select the check box to export the setting data of the menu options.
Service Mode Selected and grayed out. If this item does not exist, perform step 1 again
Encryption Password Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the encryption password. For
2 confirmation, enter the same password in the [Confirm:] text box. This
password will be required when you import the data to the machine.
6) Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where the exported data is saved.
F-2-101 F-2-103
2-80
2
2-81
●● Procedure for Import Using Remote UI ([System Management 3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Settings] Menu)
Import the service mode setting information file that was exported in the previous procedure.
1) Enter service mode, and check that the following item is set to "1".
COPIER > OPRION > USER > SMC-EXPT
TNRB-SW : 0
SCALL-SW : 0 F-2-106
SCALLCMP : 0
PC-MODE : 0 4) Click[Import/Export] > [Export].
SMD-EXPT : 1
F-2-104
NOTE:
The [SMC-EXPT] setting can be specified either from the Control Panel or from the 2
remote UI.
2) Exit service mode, and start the remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode.
F-2-107
F-2-105
2-81
2
2-82
5) Specify the settings for exporting, and click [Start Exporting]. 7) A message will appear to indicate that the process has been completed. Click the [OK]
Enter the encryption password and click [Start Exporting]. The menu options data will be button.
exported.
1
F-2-110
8) Restart the host machine, enter service mode, and then check that the setting information
is reflected.
2
F-2-108
[Browse..]button Click to select the file to import.
Decryption Password Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the password that
was set when the file was exported.
Address Book Select the check box to import the Address Book data.
Address Book PIN If the Address Book PIN is set, enter the PIN in the [Address
Book PIN:] text box. Setting a PIN for Address Book
Settings/Registration Select the check box to import the setting data of the menu
options.
6) A dialog box asking whether the user wants to execute import will appear. Click [OK].
F-2-109
2-82
2
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > List of Items Which Can Be Imported > Settings/Registration Basic Information
2-83
List of Items Which Can Be Imported Setting Information Case A Case B Case C
          Message Display Time Yes Yes Yes
The following shows the items to be imported for this model. Scrolling Speed Yes Yes Yes
Note that the setting values are not imported in cases such as below: Cursor Movement Yes Yes Yes
English Keyboard Layout Yes Yes Yes
• Items which are originally not included in a DCM file (e.g.:"Settings/Registration Basic
Timer Settings
Information" of a DCM file exported using service mode)      Date Format Yes Yes -
• Not included in the import coverage (Cases A to C)      Date Format Yes Yes Yes
• There are no options and functions related to setting values Time Format Yes Yes Yes
Current Date (DD/MM YYYY) Yes Yes -
Current Time (hh:mm) Yes Yes -
The import coverage shown in the table below is as shown below. Those that are not
Time Zone Yes Yes Yes
described here cannot be imported.
Use Daylight Saving Time Yes Yes Yes
Import coverage Description      Start Yes Yes Yes
Case A: The same machine Import to the same machine (for backup and restoration, etc.) End Yes Yes Yes
Case B: The same model Import to a different machine of the same model (the same series) Auto Sleep Time Yes Yes Yes
Case C: Different model Import to a different machine of a different model (a different series) Auto Reset Time Yes Yes Yes
T-2-49 Function After Auto Reset Yes Yes Yes
Auto Offline Time Yes Yes Yes
■■Settings/Registration Basic Information Auto Shutdown Time Yes Yes Yes
Setting Information Case A Case B Case C Common Settings
Preferences      Paper Drawer Auto Selection
     Sound Volume Control      Copy
     Fax Tone Yes Yes Yes      Multi-Purpose Tray Yes Yes Yes
Ring Tone Yes Yes Yes Drawer 1 Yes Yes Yes
TX Done Tone Yes Yes Yes Drawer 2 Yes Yes Yes
RX Done Tone Yes Yes Yes Printer
Scanning Done Tone Yes Yes Yes      Drawer 1 Yes Yes Yes
Entry Tone Yes Yes Yes Drawer 2 Yes Yes Yes
Fax
Invalid Entry Tone Yes Yes Yes
     Multi-Purpose Tray Yes Yes Yes
Restock Supplies Tone Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 1 Yes Yes Yes
Warning Tone Yes Yes Yes
Job Done Tone Yes Yes Yes
Other
Energy Saver Alert Yes Yes Yes
     Multi-Purpose Tray Yes Yes Yes
Original in Feeder Detection Tone Yes Yes Yes
Display Settings
     Default Screen after Startup/Restoration Yes Yes Yes
Switch Paper Feed Method
Language Yes Yes Yes
     Multi-Purpose Tray Yes Yes -
Remote UI Language Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 1 Yes Yes -
Brightness Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 2 Yes Yes -
Contrast Yes Yes -
Copy Settings
Invert Screen Colors Yes Yes Yes
     Default Settings Yes Yes -
Millimeter/Inch Entry Yes Yes Yes
Gram/Pound Switch Yes Yes Yes
Notify to Clean Original Scanning Area Yes Yes Yes
2-83
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > List of Items Which Can Be Imported > Settings/Registration Basic Information
2-84
Setting Information Case A Case B Case C Setting Information Case A Case B Case C
Fax Settings Scan Settings
     Basic Settings      E-Mail
     Unit Telephone Number Yes Yes -      Unit Name Yes Yes Yes
Select Line Type: Yes Yes Yes Scan Size Yes Yes Yes
     Pluse Yes Yes Yes Color Mode Yes Yes Yes
Tone Yes Yes Yes File Format Yes Yes Yes
Off-Hook Alarm Yes Yes Yes Density Yes Yes Yes
TX Function Settings Original Orientation Yes Yes Yes
2-Sided Original Yes Yes Yes Original Type Yes Yes Yes
Resolution Yes Yes Yes 2-Sided Original Yes Yes Yes
Density Yes Yes Yes Sharpness Yes Yes Yes
Sharpness Yes Yes Yes Data Size Yes Yes Yes
Unit Name Yes Yes Yes Subject Yes Yes Yes
ECM TX Yes Yes Yes Message Yes Yes Yes
Set Pause Time Yes Yes Yes Reply-to Yes Yes Yes
Auto Redial Yes Yes Yes Priority Yes Yes Yes
     Number of Times to Redial Yes Yes Yes Unit Name Yes Yes Yes
Redial Interval Yes Yes Yes File
Redial When Error Occurs Yes Yes Yes      Scan Size Yes Yes Yes
Add TX Terminal ID Yes Yes Yes Color Mode Yes Yes Yes
     Print Position Yes Yes Yes File Format Yes Yes Yes
Mark Number as Yes Yes Yes Density Yes Yes Yes
Check Dial Tone Before Sending Yes Yes Yes Original Orientation Yes Yes Yes
RX Function Settings Original Type Yes Yes Yes
     ECM RX Yes Yes Yes 2-Sided Original Yes Yes Yes
Use Incoming Ring Yes Yes Yes Sharpness Yes Yes Yes
     Number of Rings Yes Yes Yes Data Size Yes Yes Yes
Remote RX Yes Yes Yes USB Memory Settings
     Remote RX ID Yes Yes Yes Scan Size Yes Yes Yes
Remote RX ID Yes Yes Yes Color Mode Yes Yes Yes
     Ring Time Until Auto RX Yes Yes Yes File Format Yes Yes Yes
RX Print Settings Density Yes Yes Yes
     Print on Both Sides Yes Yes Yes Original Orientation Yes Yes Yes
Reduce RX Size Yes Yes Yes Original Type Yes Yes Yes
     Reduction Mode Yes Yes Yes 2-Sided Original Yes Yes Yes
Reduction Ratio Yes Yes Yes Sharpness Yes Yes Yes
Reduction Direction Yes Yes Yes Data Size Yes Yes Yes
Add RX Page Footer Yes Yes Yes Output File Image Settings
Use K-Paper Yes Yes Yes      YCbCr TX Gamma Value Yes Yes -
PDF (Compact) Image Quality Level
     Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Photo Mode Yes Yes Yes
Image Level in Text Mode Yes Yes Yes
2-84
2
2-85
     OCR (Text Searchable) Settings      PCL
     Smart Scan Yes Yes -      Paper Save Yes Yes Yes
PDF Encryption Type Settings Orientation Yes Yes Yes
     256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF Yes Yes Yes Font Number Yes Yes Yes
Memory Media Print Settings Point Size Yes Yes Yes
     Default Display Settings Yes Yes Yes Pitch Yes Yes Yes
File Sort Default Settings Yes Yes Yes Form Lines Yes Yes Yes
File Name Display Format Yes Yes Yes Character Code Yes Yes Yes
Printer Settings Custom Paper Yes Yes Yes
     Custom Settings Unit of Measure Yes Yes Yes
     Copies Yes Yes Yes X dimension Yes Yes Yes
2-Sided Printing Yes Yes Yes Y dimension Yes Yes Yes
Paper Yes Yes - Append CR to LF Yes Yes Yes
     Default Paper Size Yes Yes - Enlarge A4 Print Width Yes Yes Yes
Default Paper Type Yes Yes - Halftones
Paper Size Override Yes Yes Yes Text Yes Yes Yes
Print Quality Yes Yes Yes Graphics Yes Yes Yes
     Image Refinement Yes Yes Yes Image Yes Yes Yes
Density Yes Yes Yes BarDIMM Yes Yes Yes
     Fine Adjust Yes Yes Yes FreeScape Yes Yes Yes
Toner Save Yes Yes Yes PS
Layout      Job timeout Yes Yes Yes
     Binding Location Yes Yes Yes Print PS Error Yes Yes Yes
Gutter Yes Yes Yes Halftones
Offset Short Edge (Front) Yes Yes Yes Text Yes Yes Yes
Offset Long Edge (Front) Yes Yes Yes Graphics Yes Yes Yes
Offset Short Edge (Back) Yes Yes Yes Image Yes Yes Yes
Offset Long Edge (Back) Yes Yes Yes Grayscale Conversion Yes Yes Yes
Auto Error Skip Yes Yes Yes Adjustment/Maintenance
Timeout Yes Yes Yes      Printer Density Yes Yes -
Personality Yes Yes Yes Toner Saver Mode Yes Yes -
Black Text Processing for Color
     Feeder Yes Yes Yes
Platen Glass Yes Yes Yes
Special Processing
     Special Mode P Yes Yes -
Special Mode X Yes Yes -
Special Mode Z Yes Yes -
Special Mode M Yes Yes -
Special Mode N Yes Yes -
Special Mode O Yes Yes -
Special Mode S Yes Yes -
Special Mode Y Yes Yes -
Remove Streaks from Orig. Scanning Area Yes Yes Yes
2-85
2
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > List of Items Which Can Be Imported > System Management Settings
2-86
Setting Information Case A Case B Case C ■■System Management Settings
Report Settings
     Fax TX Result Report Yes Yes - ●● System Management
     Only When Error Occurs Yes Yes -
Setting Information Case A Case B Case C
E-Mail/File TX Result Report Yes Yes -
System Manager Information
Communication Management Report
     System Manager ID Yes Yes Yes
     Auto Print (40 Transmissions) Yes Yes -
System Manager PIN Yes Yes Yes
Separate TX/RX Yes Yes -
System Manager Name Yes Yes Yes
RX Result Report Yes Yes -
Contact Information Yes Yes Yes
T-2-50
E-Mail Address Yes Yes Yes
System Manager Comment Yes Yes Yes
Device Information
     Device Name Yes - -
Location Yes - -
Support Link Yes Yes Yes
Display Job Log
     Display Job Log Yes Yes Yes
USB Device Settings
     Use as USB Device Yes Yes Yes
Memory Media Settings
     Store to Memory Media Yes Yes Yes
Memory Media Print Yes Yes Yes
DL Selection (Plug and Play)
     USB Yes Yes -
Secure Print Settings
     Secure Print Yes Yes Yes
Secure Print Deletion Time Yes Yes Yes
T-2-51
●● Department ID Management
New Department Yes Yes Yes
(The settings can be configured only from the remote UI.)
     Department ID Yes Yes Yes
Set PIN Yes Yes Yes
PIN Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Functions
     Black & White Copy Yes Yes Yes
Black & White Print Yes Yes Yes
Scan Yes Yes Yes
Fax Yes Yes Yes
Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs Yes Yes Yes
Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs Yes Yes Yes
T-2-52
2-86
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > List of Items Which Can Be Imported > System Management Settings
2-87
●● Network Settings Setting Information Case A Case B Case C
          DNS Settings
     Primary DNS Server Address (The settings can Yes Yes Yes
TCP/IP Settings
be configured only from the remote UI.)
     IPv4 Settings
Secondary DNS Server Address (The settings Yes Yes Yes
     IP Address Settings can be configured only from the remote UI.)
     Auto Acquire Yes Yes Yes Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4 Yes - -
     Select Protocol Yes Yes Yes      Host Name Yes - -
Auto IP Yes Yes Yes Domain Name Yes - -
IP Address Yes Yes Yes      DNS Dynamic Update
Subnet Mask Yes Yes Yes      Register Manual Address Yes Yes Yes
Gateway Address Yes Yes Yes Register Stateful Address Yes Yes Yes
DNS Settings Register Stateless Address Yes Yes Yes
     Primary DNS Server Yes Yes Yes DNS Dynamic Update Interval Yes Yes Yes
Secondary DNS Server Yes Yes Yes mDNS Settings
Host Name Yes - -      Use mDNS Yes - -
Domain Name Yes - - Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4 Yes - -
DNS Dynamic Update Yes Yes Yes mDNS Name Yes - -
DNS Dynamic Update Interval Yes Yes Yes WINS Settings
mDNS Settings      WINS Resolution Yes Yes Yes
     Use mDNS Yes - - WINS Server Address Yes Yes Yes
mDNS Name Yes - - Scope ID Yes Yes Yes
DHCP Option Settings Yes - - LPD Settings
     Acquire Host Name Yes Yes Yes      Use LPD Printing Yes Yes Yes
DNS Dynamic Update Yes Yes Yes RX Timeout Yes Yes Yes
IPv6 Settings RAW Settings
     IP Address Settings      Use RAW Printing Yes Yes Yes
     Use IPv6 Yes Yes Yes RX Timeout Yes Yes Yes
Stateless Address Yes Yes Yes WSD Settings
Use Manual Address Yes - -      Use WSD Printing Yes Yes Yes
(The settings can be configured only from the      Use WSD Browsing Yes Yes Yes
remote UI.)
Use WSD Scanning
     IP Address (The settings can be configured Yes - -
     Use WSD Scanning Yes Yes Yes
only from the remote UI.)
Use Computer Scanning Yes Yes Yes
Prefix Length (The settings can be Yes - -
Use Multicast Discovery Yes Yes Yes
configured only from the remote UI.)
FTP PASV Mode Settings
Default Router Address (The settings can Yes - -
be configured only from the remote UI.) Use FTP PASV Mode Yes Yes Yes
Use DHCPv6 Yes Yes Yes HTTP Settings
     Use HTTP Yes Yes Yes
2-87
2
2-88
     Port Number Settings      Use SSL Yes Yes Yes
     LPD Yes Yes Yes Confirm Certificate Yes Yes Yes
RAW Yes Yes Yes      Add CN to Verification Items Yes Yes Yes
WSD Multicast Discovery Yes Yes Yes Use APOP Authenticatio Yes Yes Yes
HTTP Yes Yes Yes Use SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) Yes Yes Yes
Multicast Discovery Yes Yes Yes      User Name Yes Yes Yes
POP3 Yes Yes Yes Set/Change Password Yes Yes Yes
SMTP Yes Yes Yes Use SSL Yes Yes Yes
FTP Yes Yes Yes      Confirm Certificate for SMTP Sending Yes Yes Yes
SNMP Yes Yes Yes Add CN to Verification Items Yes Yes Yes
MTU Size Settings SMB Settings
     MTU Size Yes Yes Yes      NetBIOS Name Yes - -
SNTP Settings Workgroup Name Yes - -
     Use SNTP Yes Yes Yes SNMP Settings
NTP Server Name Yes Yes Yes      SNMPv1 Settings
Polling Interval Yes Yes Yes      Use SNMPv1 Yes Yes Yes
Multicast Discovery Settings Set Community Name 1
     Respond to Discovery Yes Yes Yes      Set Community Name 1 Yes Yes Yes
Scope Name: Yes Yes Yes Community Name Yes Yes Yes
Sleep Mode Notification Settings MIB Access Permission Yes Yes Yes
     Sleep Mode Notification Yes Yes Yes Set Community Name 2
Port Number Yes Yes Yes      Use Community Name 2 Yes Yes Yes
Number of Routers to Traverse Yes Yes Yes Community Name Yes Yes Yes
Notification Interval Yes Yes Yes MIB Access Permission Yes Yes Yes
Proxy Settings Dedicated Community Settings Yes Yes Yes
     Use Proxy Yes Yes Yes      Use Dedicated Community Yes Yes Yes
HTTP Proxy Server Address Yes Yes Yes MIB Access Permission Yes Yes Yes
HTTP Proxy Server Port Number Yes Yes Yes SNMPv3 Settings
Use Proxy within Same Domain Yes Yes Yes      Use SNMPv3 Yes Yes Yes
Use Proxy Authentication Yes Yes Yes Enable User
User Name Yes Yes Yes User Name Yes Yes Yes
Password Yes Yes Yes MIBAccess Permission Yes Yes Yes
Canon Mobile Scanning Settings Security Settings Yes Yes Yes
     Use Canon Mobile Scanning: Yes Yes Yes Authentication Agorithm Yes Yes Yes
E-Mail Settings Encryption Agorithm Yes Yes Yes
     E-Mail Settings Authentication Password Yes Yes Yes
     SMTP Server Addres Yes Yes Yes Encryption Password Yes Yes Yes
E-Mail Address Yes Yes Yes Context Settings
Authentication/Encryption Settings Context Name Yes Yes Yes
     Use POP Authentication Before Sending Yes Yes Yes Acquire Printer Management Information from Host Yes Yes Yes
     User Name Yes Yes Yes Dedicated Port Settings
Password Yes Yes Yes      Use Dedicated Port: Yes Yes Yes
POP Server Yes Yes Yes Waiting Time for Connection at Startup Yes Yes Yes
2-88
2
2-89
Setting Information Case A Case B Case C ●● Security Settings
Ethernet Driver Settings
     Waiting Time for Connection at Startup Yes Yes Yes
IPv4 Address Filter
Communication Mode Yes Yes Yes
     Outbound Filter
Ethernet Type Yes Yes Yes
     Use Filter Yes Yes Yes
Settings for Device Settings Management
Default Policy Yes Yes Yes
     Use Device Settings Management Yes Yes Yes
Exception Addresses Yes Yes Yes
Firmware Update Settings
Inbound Filter
     Use SSL Yes Yes Yes
Local CDS URL Yes Yes Yes
LDAP Server Settings
     LDAP Server (For Search)
IPv6 Address Filter
     Server Name Yes Yes Yes
Server Address Yes Yes Yes
Position to Start Search Yes Yes Yes
Port Number Yes Yes Yes
Search Timeout Yes Yes Yes
Inbound Filter
Login Information Yes Yes Yes
     User Name Yes Yes Yes
Password Yes Yes Yes
Domain Name Yes Yes Yes
MAC Address Filter
Display Authentication Screen When Searching Yes Yes Yes
Use Same Authentication Information as When Yes Yes Yes
Send Operation Started
LDAP Server (For Authentication)
     Server Name Yes Yes Yes
Inbound Filter
Server Address Yes Yes Yes
Position to Start Search Yes Yes Yes      Use Filter Yes Yes Yes
Port Number Yes Yes Yes Default Policy Yes Yes Yes
Search Timeout Yes Yes Yes Exception Addresses Yes Yes Yes
User Name Attribute Yes Yes Yes Authentication Settings for Send Function
E-Mail Address Attribute Yes Yes Yes      Basic Settings
Login Information Yes Yes Yes      Display Authentication Screen When Sending Operation Yes Yes Yes
Starts
     Use System Manager ID Yes Yes Yes
     User Name Yes Yes Yes      Display Confirmation Screen When Logging Out Yes Yes Yes
Password Yes Yes Yes E-Mail Sending Settings
Use SS Yes Yes Yes      E-Mail Sending Yes Yes Yes
     Authentication Method Yes Yes Yes
Domain Name Yes Yes Yes
Specify Authentication User Destination as Sender Yes Yes Yes
T-2-53
File Sending Settings
     File Sending Yes Yes Yes
When Sending File to Destination Registered in Address Book
     Authentication Method Yes Yes Yes
2-89
2
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > List of Items Which Can Be Imported > Preferences
2-90
Setting Information Case A Case B Case C ■■Preferences
          When Sending File to Myself
     Authentication Method Yes Yes Yes ●● Paper Settings
Display Authentication Screen Yes Yes Yes
Specify Destination Folder Yes Yes Yes
Multi-Purpose Tray
Host Name Yes Yes Yes
     Paper Size Yes Yes -
Folder Path Yes Yes Yes
Paper Type Yes Yes -
Add User Name Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 1
Fax Sending Settings
     Paper Size Yes Yes -
     Fax Sending Yes Yes Yes
T-2-54
Drawer 2
●● Communication Management Settings/Forwarding Settings      Paper Size Yes Yes -
Setting Information Case A Case B Case C Custom: Yes Yes -
Fax Settings T-2-56
     TX Start Speed Yes Yes Yes
RX Start Speed Yes Yes Yes ●● Address Book Settings (Model with FAX and/or SEND)
R-Key Setting Yes Yes Yes
     PBX Yes Yes Yes
Selecting Destinations Using One-Touch Keys
     Prefix Code Yes Yes Yes
FAX
Memory Lock Settings
Fax Number Yes Yes Yes
     Set/Change PIN Yes Yes Yes
Name Yes Yes Yes
Use Memory Lock Yes Yes Yes
Details Yes Yes Yes
Print Report Yes Yes Yes
Long Distans Yes Yes Yes
Specify Memory Lock Time Yes Yes Yes
Sending Speed Yes Yes Yes
     Start Time: hh Yes Yes Yes
ECM TX Yes Yes Yes
Start Time: mm Yes Yes Yes
E-Mail
End Time: hh Yes Yes Yes
E-Mail Address Yes Yes Yes
End Time: mm Yes Yes Yes
Name Yes Yes Yes
Store/Print When Forwarding File : SMB
     Print Images Yes Yes Yes Host Name Yes Yes Yes
Store Images in Memory Yes Yes Yes Name Yes Yes Yes
Restrict TX Function Folder path Yes Yes Yes
     Address Book PIN Yes Yes Yes User Name Yes Yes Yes
Restrict New Destinations Yes Yes Yes Password Yes Yes Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX Yes Yes Yes File : FTP
Restrict Resending from Log Yes Yes Yes Host Name Yes Yes Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Number Yes Yes Yes Name Yes Yes Yes
Confirm When Using Coded Dial TX Yes Yes Yes Folder path Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Sequential Broadcast Yes Yes Yes User Name Yes Yes Yes
T-2-55 Password Yes Yes Yes
T-2-57
2-90
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > List of Items Which Can Be Imported > Preferences
2 Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > List of Items Which Can Be Imported > Service Mode Settings
2-91
■■Service Mode Settings Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C
FUNCTION
●● COPIER SPLMAN
SPL14159 Yes Yes Yes
Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C
ADJUST
IMG-REG
MAGV-C1 Yes - -
MAGV-C2 Yes - -
MAGV-MF1 Yes - -
INSTALL
MAGV-MF2 Yes - -
ERDS Yes Yes Yes
MAGV-DU1 Yes - -
RGW-PORT Yes Yes Yes
MAGV-DU2 Yes - -
OPTION
HV-PRI
BODY
OFST1-DC Yes - -
MIBCOUNT Yes Yes Yes
OFST1-AC Yes - -
NS-CMD5 Yes - -
FEED-ADJ
NS-PLN Yes - -
ADJ-C1 Yes - -
NS-LGN Yes - -
ADJ-C2 Yes - -
ADJ-MF Yes - - SLPMODE Yes Yes Yes
ADJ-REFE Yes - - SDTM-DSP Yes Yes Yes
REG-MF Yes - - FNC-SW
REG-CST Yes - - T-DLV-BK Yes - -
REG-CST2 Yes - - D-DLV-BK Yes - -
REG-DUP Yes - - DLVFN-SW Yes - -
REG-MF2 Yes - - LCDSFLG Yes Yes Yes
REG-DUP4 Yes - - T-END-BK Yes Yes -
LOOP-CST Yes - - CUSTOM
LOOP-MF Yes - - TEMP-TBL Yes Yes -
LOOP-OP Yes - - FLK-RD Yes Yes -
LOOP-DU Yes - - DSPLY-SW
LOOP-THK Yes - - DRM-WARN Yes - -
BLANK DF-DSP Yes Yes -
BLANK-T Yes - - CLEANING
BLANK-B Yes - - FX-CN-SW Yes - -
DEVELOP IMG-FIX
DE-OFST Yes - - TMP-TBL2 Yes - -
TMP-TBL4 Yes - -
TMP-TBL6 Yes - -
EDG-WAIT Yes - -
FIX-SMR Yes - -
TMP-TBLC Yes - -
TMPTBLC2 Yes - -
TMP-TB14 Yes - -
2-91
2
Technology > Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) > List of Items Which Can Be Imported > Service Mode Settings
2-92
Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C ●● FAX (Only Machines with Fax Function)
IMG-LSR
SC-PR-SW Yes - -
SSSW
IMG-TR
SW01 Yes - -
TR-BS-SW Yes - -
SW02 Yes - -
SP-BS-SW Yes - -
SW03 Yes - -
FX-SP-H Yes - -
SW04 Yes - -
HUM-SW Yes - -
SW05 Yes - -
FX-BSSW1 Yes - -
SW06 Yes - -
FX-BSSW2 Yes - -
SW07 Yes - -
USER
SW08 Yes - -
COUNTER1 Yes - -
SW09 Yes - -
COUNTER2 Yes - -
SW10 Yes - -
COUNTER3 Yes - -
SW11 Yes - -
COUNTER4 Yes - -
SW12 Yes - -
COUNTER5 Yes - -
SW13 Yes - -
COUNTER6 Yes - -
SW14 Yes - -
CNT-SW Yes - -
SW15 Yes - -
CONTROL Yes - -
SW16 Yes - -
CTCHKDSP Yes - -
SW17 Yes - -
TNRB-SW Yes - -
SW18 Yes - -
SCALL-SW Yes Yes Yes
SW19 Yes - -
SMD-EXPT Yes - -
SW20 Yes - -
ACC-SLP Yes Yes Yes
SW21 Yes - -
DRMRP-SW Yes Yes -
SW22 Yes - -
ACC
SW23 Yes - -
CARD-SW Yes - -
SW24 Yes - -
CC-SPSW Yes - -
SW25 Yes - -
ENV-SET
SW26 Yes - -
IMG-BLD1 Yes - -
SW27 Yes - -
IMG-BLD2 Yes - -
SW28 Yes - -
IMG-BLD3 Yes - -
SW29 Yes - -
T-2-58
SW30 Yes - -
SW31 Yes - -
SW32 Yes - -
MENU
005 Yes - -
006 Yes - -
007 Yes - -
008 Yes - -
009 Yes - -
010 Yes - -
2-92
2
2-93
Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C
NUM DIALTONE
002 Yes - - BIT Yes - -
003 Yes - - 001 Yes - -
004 Yes - - 002 Yes - -
005 Yes - - 003 Yes - -
006 Yes - - 004 Yes - -
008 Yes - - 005 Yes - -
010 Yes - - 006 Yes - -
011 Yes - - 007 Yes - -
012 Yes - - 008 Yes - -
013 Yes - - 2ND DLTN
015 Yes - - BIT Yes - -
016 Yes - - 001 Yes - -
017 Yes - - 002 Yes - -
018 Yes - - 003 Yes - -
019 Yes - - 004 Yes - -
020 Yes - - 005 Yes - -
021 Yes - - 006 Yes - -
022 Yes - - 007 Yes - -
023 Yes - - 008 Yes - -
024 Yes - - BUSTONE0
025 Yes - - BIT Yes - -
026 Yes - - 001 Yes - -
027 Yes - - 002 Yes - -
029 Yes - - 003 Yes - -
049 Yes - - 004 Yes - -
051 Yes - - 005 Yes - -
053 Yes - - 006 Yes - -
054 Yes - - 007 Yes - -
NCU 008 Yes - -
TONE BUSTONE1
001 Yes - - BIT Yes - -
002 Yes - - 001 Yes - -
PULSE 002 Yes - -
FORM Yes - - 003 Yes - -
001 Yes - - 004 Yes - -
002 Yes - - 005 Yes - -
003 Yes - - 006 Yes - -
004 Yes - - 007 Yes - -
008 Yes - -
2-93
2
2-94
Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C
REORDRTN SW14 Yes - -
BIT Yes - - SW15 Yes - -
001 Yes - - SW16 Yes - -
002 Yes - - SW17 Yes - -
003 Yes - - SW18 Yes - -
004 Yes - - SW19 Yes - -
005 Yes - - SW20 Yes - -
006 Yes - - SW21 Yes - -
007 Yes - - SW22 Yes - -
008 Yes - - SW23 Yes - -
AUTO RX SW24 Yes - -
001 Yes - - SW25 Yes - -
002 Yes - - SW26 Yes - -
003 Yes - - SW27 Yes - -
004 Yes - - SW28 Yes - -
005 Yes - - SW29 Yes - -
006 Yes - - SW30 Yes - -
007 Yes - - SPECIALN
008 Yes - - 004 Yes - -
009 Yes - - 005 Yes - -
CNGDTCT 006 Yes - -
001 Yes - - 007 Yes - -
002 Yes - - 008 Yes - -
006 Yes - - 009 Yes - -
007 Yes - - 011 Yes - -
008 Yes - - 012 Yes - -
009 Yes - - 013 Yes - -
011 Yes - - 014 Yes - -
012 Yes - - 015 Yes - -
SPECIALB 016 Yes - -
SW01 Yes - - 017 Yes - -
SW02 Yes - - 019 Yes - -
SW03 Yes - - 020 Yes - -
SW04 Yes - - 024 Yes - -
SW05 Yes - - 025 Yes - -
SW06 Yes - - 026 Yes - -
SW07 Yes - - 027 Yes - -
SW08 Yes - - 030 Yes - -
SW09 Yes - - 040 Yes - -
SW10 Yes - - 041 Yes - -
SW11 Yes - - 042 Yes - -
SW12 Yes - - 044 Yes - -
SW13 Yes - - 045 Yes - -
2-94
2
2-95
046 Yes - -
047 Yes - -
048 Yes - -
065 Yes - -
066 Yes - -
RKEY
001 Yes - -
002 Yes - -
PBXDIALT
BIT Yes - -
001 Yes - -
002 Yes - -
003 Yes - -
004 Yes - -
005 Yes - -
006 Yes - -
007 Yes - -
008 Yes - -
PBXBUSYT
BIT Yes - -
001 Yes - -
002 Yes - -
003 Yes - -
004 Yes - -
005 Yes - -
006 Yes - -
007 Yes - -
008 Yes - -
T-2-59
2-95
2
3 Periodic Service
■
■Periodical Service
Operation Item
3
Periodic Service
3 Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item > Cleaning
3-2
Periodical Service Operation Item Cleaning
Periodically Replaced Parts

None
Consumable Parts
None
List of Periodical Servicing

None
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[6]
F-3-1
3-2
3
Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item > Cleaning
3 Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item > Cleaning
3-3
[13] No Part name Category Interval Cleaning item
[11] ADF Delivery Roller ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[8]
[10] [12] Feed Guide / Rib ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[9] [13] Delivery Roller / Roller ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[11]
- Various Rollers / Slave ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
Rollers
T-3-1
[12]
F-3-2
No Part name Category Interval Cleaning item

[1] Transfer Guide Developing Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
Assembly
[2] Transfer Roller Developing Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
Assembly
[3] Fixing Inlet Guide Fixing Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
Assembly
[4] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Main Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
Roller
[5] Multi-purpose Tray Main Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
Separation Pad
[6] Pre-registration Guide Main Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
Separation Static Charge
Eliminator
[7] Stream Reading Glass Reader Unit Timely Oil glass cleaner
[8] ADF Pickup Roller ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[9] ADF Separation Pad ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
[10] ADF Separation Roller ADF Unit Timely Lint-free paper soaked with alcohol
3-3
3
Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item > Cleaning
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning
■
■Parts
■
List
■External Cover/Interior System
■
■Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader)
■
■Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF)
■
■Controller System
■
■Laser Exposure System
■
■Image Formation System
■
■Fixing System
■
■Pickup/Feed System
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > External / Internal Cover > Rear
4-2
Parts List ■■Rear
External / Internal Cover

■■Front
[1] [2] [12]
[11]
[3]
[4]
[13]
[10] F-4-2
No. Name Reference

[5] [12] Rear Cover p. 4-9
[9]
[8] [13] Right Cover p. 4-10
T-4-2
[7]
[6]
F-4-1
No. Name Reference

[1] Feeder Cover p. 4-14
[2] Document Tray p. 4-15
[3] Delivery Tray p. 4-13
[4] Control Panel p. 4-13
[5] Front Right Cover p. 4-12
[6] Front Cover Unit p. 4-9
[7] Left Front Cover p. 4-11
[8] Front Upper Cover p. 4-11
[9] Multi-purpose Tray p. 4-54
[10] Left Door Unit p. 4-53
[11] Left Rear Cover p. 4-12
T-4-1
4-2
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > External / Internal Cover > Rear
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Main Unit > Main Unit
4-3
Main Unit [12]
■■Main Unit
[1]
[6]
[11] [13]
[7]
[2]
[5]
[3] [8]
[10]
[4] [9]
F-4-4
No. Name Reference

[6] Control Panel Unit p. 4-13
[7] Cassette 1 -
[8] Left Door Unit p. 4-53
[9] Multi-purpose Tray p. 4-54
[10] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit p. 4-54
[11] Fixing Assembly p. 4-45
[12] Laser Scanner Unit p. 4-36
[13] Developing Assembly p. 4-38
F-4-3 T-4-4
No. Name Reference

[1] ADF Unit p. 4-21
[2] ADF Pickup Feed Unit p. 4-23
[3] Scanner Unit p. 4-16
[4] CIS Unit p. 4-19
[5] Copyboard Glass Unit p. 4-18
T-4-3
4-3
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Main Unit > Main Unit
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > PCB
4-4
PCB
PCB6
PCB10
PCB5
PCB3
[16]
PCB2
[17]
[15] PCB9
[14]
F-4-5
No. Name Reference PCB4

[14] Main Drive Unit p. 4-56
[15] Fixing Drive Unit p. 4-58 PCB1
[16] Main Controller PCB p. 4-30 F-4-6
[17] Engine Controller PCB p. 4-32
No. Name Main Unit Reference Remarks
T-4-5
PCB1 Engine Controller PCB Main Unit p. 4-32
PCB2 Main Controller PCB Main Unit p. 4-30
PCB3 AC Driver PCB Main Unit -
PCB4 Power Supply PCB Main Unit p. 4-33
PCB5 Control Panel PCB Main Unit p. 4-35
PCB6 HVT PCB Main Unit p. 4-34
PCB9 Modem PCB Main Unit - iF model only
PCB10 USB PCB Main Unit - except J model
T-4-6
4-4
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > PCB
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Motor
4-5
Solenoid Motor
SL01 M2
M01
M02
SL1
SL2
SL5
M3
M1
F-4-7
F-4-8
No. Name Main Unit
SL1 Duplex Solenoid Main Unit No. Name Main Unit
SL2 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid Main Unit M1 Main Motor Main Drive Unit
SL5 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid Multi-purpose Tray Unit M2 Polygon Motor Laser Scanner Unit
SL01 ADF Disengagement Solenoid ADF Unit M3 Fixing Motor Fixing Drive Unit
T-4-7 M01 ADF Motor ADF Unit
M02 Reader Motor Reader Unit
T-4-8
4-5
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Motor
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Fan
4-6
Sensor Fan
SR03
SR02 FM2
SR01
SR10
SR15
SR16
FM1
SR5
SR11
SR14 SR13
SR6
SR12 SR17
FM3
F-4-9
F-4-10
No. Name Main Unit
SR01 Document End Sensor ADF Unit No. Name Main Unit
SR02 Document Sensor ADF Unit FM1 Delivery Cooling Fan Left Door Unit
SR03 CIS Unit HP Sensor Reader Unit FM2 Power Supply Cooling Fan Main Unit
SR5 Fixing Delivery Sensor Fixing Assembly FM3 Image Formation Part Cooling Fan Main Unit
T-4-10
SR6 Waste Toner Full Sensor Main Unit
SR10 Delivery Full Sensor Main Unit
SR11 Pre-registration Sensor Main Unit
SR12 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Unit
SR13 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor Main Unit
SR14 Arch Sensor Main Unit
SR15 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor 1 Fixing Assembly
SR16 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor 2 Fixing Assembly
SR17 Toner Sensor Main Unit
T-4-9
4-6
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Fan
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Clutch
4-7
Switch Clutch
SW93 / 94 CL1
SW2
SW3
F-4-12
F-4-11
No. Name Main Unit
No. Name Main Unit Remarks CL1 Registration Clutch Main Drive Unit
SW2 Left Cover Switch Main Unit T-4-12
SW3 Front Cover Switch Main Unit
SW93 Main Switch Main Unit EUR only
SW94 Main Switch Main Unit Except EUR
T-4-11
4-7
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Clutch
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Others
4-8
Others
TP2 / 3
H1
[1]
TH1
TH2
[2]
F-4-13
No. Name Main unit Reference

[1] Fixing Film Unit Fixing Assembly p. 4-45
[2] Pressure Roller Fixing Assembly p. 4-50
H1 Fixing Heater Fixing Assembly -
TP2/3 Thermo Switch Fixing Assembly -
TH1 Fixing Main Thermistor Fixing Assembly -
TH2 Fixing Sub Thermistor Fixing Assembly -
T-4-13
4-8
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Parts List > Others
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Rear Cover > Procedure
4-9
External Cover/Interior System Removing the Rear Cover

■■Procedure
Removing the Front Cover Unit
1) Remove the Rear Cover.
■■Procedure • 3 Screws
• 5 Bosses
1) Remove the Front Cover
3x
F-4-14
2) Remove the Front Cover Unit.
• 1 Screw F-4-16
• 2 Claws
1x
F-4-15
4-9
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Rear Cover > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Right Cover > Procedure
4-10
Removing the Right Cover 3) Remove the Right Cover.
• 5 Claws
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Rear Cover. "Removing the Rear Cover"(page 4-9).
2) Draw out the Cassette 1 in 10cm.
Clow
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Blindfold Cover.
• 2 Claws
3
F-4-17
2) Remove the screws.
• 4 Screws
F-4-19
4x
F-4-18
4-10
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Right Cover > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Left Front Cover > Procedure
4-11
Removing the Front Upper Cover Removing the Left Front Cover
■■Preparation ■■Preparation
1) Open the Left Door. 1) Open the Left Door.
2) Open the Front Cover Unit.
2) Draw out the Cassette 1 in 10cm.
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Left Front Cover.
• 2 Screws
• 1 Claw
2x
F-4-20
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Front Upper Cover.
• 2 Screws
• 2 Claws
2x
F-4-22
NOTE :
Open and hold the Left Door to remove the claw with ease.
F-4-21
4-11
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Left Front Cover > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Front Right Cover > Procedure
4-12
Removing the Left Rear Cover Removing the Front Right Cover
1) Open the Left Door. 1) Draw out the Cassette 1.
2) Remove the Rear Cover. "Removing the Rear Cover"(page 4-9). 2) Remove the Rear Cover. "Removing the Rear Cover"(page 4-9).
3) Remove the Right Cover. "Removing the Right Cover"(page 4-10).
■■Procedure 4) Remove the Front Cover Unit. "Removing the Front Cover Unit"(page 4-9).
1) Remove the Left Rear Cover

• 2 Screws
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Front Right Cover.
• 2 Bosses
2x • 2 Claws
F-4-23
NOTE :
Open and hold the Left Door to remove bottom part of the Left Rear Cover with ease.
F-4-24
4-12
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Front Right Cover > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Control Panel Unit > Procedure
4-13
Removing the Delivery Tray Removing the Control Panel Unit
1) Draw out the Cassette 1. 1) Draw out the Cassette 1.
2) Remove the Rear Cover. "Removing the Rear Cover"(page 4-9). 2) Remove the Rear Cover. "Removing the Rear Cover"(page 4-9).
3) Remove the Right Cover. "Removing the Right Cover"(page 4-10). 3) Remove the Right Cover. "Removing the Right Cover"(page 4-10).
4) Remove the Front Cover Unit. "Removing the Front Cover Unit"(page 4-9). 4) Remove the Front Cover Unit. "Removing the Front Cover Unit"(page 4-9).
5) Remove the Front Right Cover. "Removing the Front Right Cover"(page 4-12). 5) Remove the Front Right Cover. "Removing the Front Right Cover"(page 4-12).
6) Remove the Front Upper Cover. "Removing the Front Upper Cover"(page 4-11). 6) Remove the Front Upper Cover. "Removing the Front Upper Cover"(page 4-11).
7) Remove the Control Panel Unit. "Removing the Control Panel Unit"(page 4-13).
■■Procedure
■■Procedure 1) Remove the Control Panel Unit.
1) Remove the Delivery Tray. • 2 Screws
• 2 Bosses • 1 Flat Cable
2x
1x
F-4-26
F-4-25
NOTE :
Remove the Control Panel Unit in the direction of the arrow to release the 5 bosses.
4-13
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Control Panel Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the ADF Rear Cover > Procedure
4-14
Removing the Feeder Cover Removing the ADF Rear Cover
■■Procedure ■■Procedure
1) Open the Feeder Cover. 1) Open the Feeder Cover.
F-4-27 F-4-29
2) Loosen the screw and remove the Feeder Cover. 2) Remove the ADF Rear Cover.
• 2 Shafts • 1 Boss
• 5 Hooks
1x
Loosen F-4-30
F-4-28
4-14
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the ADF Rear Cover > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Document Tray > Procedure
4-15
Removing the Document Tray 2) Remove the Document Tray while releasing the claw.
• 1 Claw
■■Procedure
1) Open the Feeder Cover.
F-4-31
F-4-32
4-15
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Document Tray > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-16
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) Removing the Scanner Unit
■■Preparation
Layout
1) Draw out the Cassette 1.
2) Remove the Front Upper Cover. "Removing the Front Upper Cover"(page 4-11).
■■Procedure
1) Loosen the 4 screws and remove the Controller Cover.
[1]
4x
[2]
F-4-34
[3]
F-4-33
No. Name Main Unit Reference

[1] Scanner Unit Main Unit p. 4-16
[2] Reader Unit Main Unit p. 4-18
[3] CIS Unit Reader Unit p. 4-19
T-4-14
4-16
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the Scanner Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-17
2) Remove the screw at the earth terminal. 4) Remove the Scanner Unit.
• 1 Screw • 4 Screws
CAUTION :
1x Be careful not to drop the Scanner Unit.
F-4-35
3) Remove the flat cable and the connectors.
• 1 Flat Cable
• 2 Connectors F-4-37
3x
4x
F-4-36
F-4-38
4-17
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the Scanner Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit > Adjustment after Replacement
4-18
Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit ■■Adjustment after Replacement
"Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit"(page 5-6).
■■Procedure
CAUTION :
Be careful not to touch the glass with fingers when handling the Copyboard Glass Unit.
F-4-39
1) Open the ADF.

2) Remove the Copyboard Glass Unit.
• 2 Screws
2x
F-4-40
4-18
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit > Adjustment after Replacement
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the CIS Unit > Procedure
4-19
Cleaning the Copyboard Glass Unit Removing the CIS Unit
1) Remove the Copyboard Glass Unit. "Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit"(page 4-18). 1) Remove the Copyboard Glass Unit. "Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit"(page 4-18).
1) Clean inside and outside of the Copyboard Glass with lint-free paper. 1) Remove the Holder.
2) Clean the white plate. • 1 Claw
Cleaning the Stream Reading Glass

■■Preparation
1) Remove the Copyboard Glass Unit. "Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit"(page 4-18).
■■Procedure
1) Clean inside and outside of the Stream Reading Glass with lint-free-paper.
2) Apply the oil glass cleaner oil on the Stream Reading Glass.
F-4-41
4-19
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the CIS Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the CIS Unit > Adjustment after Replacement
4-20
2) Remove the CIS Unit.
• 1 Flat Cable
CAUTION : CAUTION :
Be careful not to touch the sensor part when handling the CIS unit. The groove of the CIS unit must be hooked on the belt when attaching the CIS unit.
F-4-44
F-4-42
■■Adjustment after Replacement

1x "Actions when Replacing Parts"(page 5-4).
F-4-43
4-20
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Removing the CIS Unit > Adjustment after Replacement
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Unit > Procedure
4-21
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) Removing the ADF Unit
■■Preparation
Layout
2) Loosen the 4 screws and remove the controller cover.
[5]
[1] 4x
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-4-46
■■Procedure
1) Remove the screw at the earth terminal.
• 1 Screw
1x
F-4-45
No. Name Main Unit Reference

[1] ADF Unit Main Unit p. 4-21
[2] ADF Pickup Unit ADF Unit p. 4-23
[3] ADF Separation Pad ADF Unit p. 4-24
[4] ADF Pickup Feed Unit ADF Unit p. 4-26
[5] ADF Feed Drive Unit ADF Pickup Feed Unit p. 4-28
T-4-15
F-4-47
4-21
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Unit > Adjustment after Replacement
4-22
2) Remove the connector. 4) Remove the ADF Unit while releasing the harness.
• 1 Connector • 1 Harness guide
CAUTION :
1x
Be careful not to damage the harness as it hooks while releasing.
F-4-48
3) Remove the reuse band.
• 1 Reuse Band.
F-4-50
■■Adjustment after Replacement

"Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit"(page 5-8).
F-4-49
4-22
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Unit > Adjustment after Replacement
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-23
Removing the ADF Pickup Unit
■■Procedure
2) Remove the ADF Pickup Unit.
CAUTION : • 1 Claw
• 1 Shaft
Be careful not to touch the ADF Pickup Roller when handling the ADF Pickup Unit.
F-4-53
F-4-51
F-4-52
4-23
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Pickup Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Separation Pad > Procedure
4-24
Cleaning the ADF Pickup Unit Removing the ADF Separation Pad
1) Open the Feeder Cover. CAUTION :
Be careful not to touch the ADF Separation Pad while handling it.
F-4-54
2) Clean the surface of the ADF Pickup Roller using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
F-4-55
F-4-56
4-24
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Separation Pad > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Cleaning the ADF Separation Pad > Procedure
4-25
2) Remove the ADF Separation Pad
Cleaning the ADF Separation Pad
• 2 Claws
■■Preparation
1) Remove the ADF Separation Pad. "Removing the ADF Separation Pad"(page 4-24).
■■Procedure
1) Clean the surface of the ADF Separation Pad using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
F-4-57
4-25
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Cleaning the ADF Separation Pad > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit > Procedure
4-26
Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit 2) Remove the 2 screws and close the ADF Unit.
• 2 Screws
■■Preparation
1) Remove the original tray. "Removing the Document Tray"(page 4-15). 2x
2) Remove the ADF rear cover. "Removing the ADF Rear Cover"(page 4-14).
■■Procedure
CAUTION :
Be careful not to damage the White Plate when handling the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.
F-4-60
3) Remove the screw from the earth.
• 2 Screws
1x
F-4-58
1) Open the ADF Unit and remove the white Plate.

• 4 Hooks
F-4-61
F-4-59
4-26
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit > Procedure
4-27
4) Remove the connector. 6) Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.
• 4 connectors
CAUTION :
Be careful not to touch the ADF Delivery Roller when handling the ADF Pickup Feed
4x
Unit.
F-4-62
5) Remove the screws and close the feeder cover.
• 4 Screws
F-4-64
4x
F-4-63
F-4-65
4-27
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit > Procedure
4-28
Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit
■■Preparation
1) Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit. "Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit"(page 4-26).
CAUTION :
• Be careful not to shift the phase of the inner gear when handling the ADF Feed Drive
■■Procedure
1) Loosen the screw and remove the Feeder Cover.
• 2 Shafts
1x . t in
U
F-4-68
• Be careful not to put the arm edge on top of the coupling when assembling the ADF
Feed Drive Unit.
Loosen
F-4-66
2) Remove the ADF Feed Drive Unit.
• 1 Harness guide
• 5 Screws
5x 1x
F-4-69
F-4-67
4-28
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Cleaning the ADF Delivery Roller > Procedure
4-29
Cleaning the ADF Delivery Roller
■■Preparation
1) Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit. "Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit"(page 4-26).
■■Procedure
1) Clean the surface of the ADF Delivery Roller using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
F-4-70
4-29
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Cleaning the ADF Delivery Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > Procedure
4-30
Controller System 2) Remove all flat cables and connectors and then remove the Main Controller PCB.
• 10 Connectors
• 4 Flat Cables
Removing the Main Controller PCB • 7 Screws
■■Preparation
14x
Back up user data (settings, registered data, etc.) and service mode data for setting and
registration after PCB replacement. Take notes if data is unable to back up.
1) In Remote UI, perform the following procedure to export the user data (login in
7x
administrator mode).
In Setting/Registration > Import/Export > Menu > Export, select an item and then start
export.
2) In service mode, perform the following procedure to export the service mode data (and
then import it after replacement).
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
3) Record the default settings shown on the service label (these are entered after
replacement).
■■Procedure F-4-72
1) Loosen the 4 screws and remove the controller cover.

NOTE :
Numbers of connectors and flat cables are different from each specification of the host
machine.
4x
F-4-71
4-30
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > After Replacing the Main Controller PCB
4-31
■■After Replacing the Main Controller PCB 5) Enter the All Setting Value other than W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the Service Label
5-1) Enter the all setting value other than W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the service label printed
NOTE: inside of the rear cover.
In the case of a model without the reader, start from step 5).
1) Turning ON the power.

2) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON.
3) Entering the Setting Value from the Service Label ( W-PLT-X/Y/Z)
3-1) Enter the setting value of W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the service label printed inside of the
rear cover by following service mode.
• COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z
F-4-74
6) Set the and paper size group.
• COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SIZE-LC (setting the paper size group)
[Setting value]
1: AB configuration, 2: Inch configuration, 3: A configuration, 4: AB/Inch configuration
7) Clearing the Settings/Registration data
Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL.
When executing this item, the following data is cleared according to the values of SIZE-LC
set in step 6).
F-4-73
4) Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit • Settings/Registration data
4-1) Rewrite "1000" for the setting value on following service mode. • Service mode data
• COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R, BW-G, BW-B = 1000 • Job ID
4-2) Rewrite "1100" for the setting value on following service mode. • Each log data
• COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R, CL-G, CL-B = 1100 • Date data
4-3) Press "OK" for each on following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC, BW-AGC Note that the following data is not cleared.
4-4) After the automatic adjustment, "executing" disappears. • Service counter
4-5) Check the setting value is changed. When it is not changed, readjust from procedure • Adjustment value of Reader/DADF
4-1) to 4-4). 8) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN (the setting value of Engine
Controller is backed up.)
9) Turn OFF and then ON the power.
10) Import the service mode data backed up before replacement.
Insert the USB memory storage device to the slot of the machine, and execute COPIER >
FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT.
11) Import user data using remote UI.
4-31
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > After Replacing the Main Controller PCB
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Engine Controller PCB > After Replacing the Engine Controller PCB
4-32
12) Uninstall Old Drivers.
Removing the Engine Controller PCB
• Printer Driver
• FAX Driver ■■Preparation
• Scanner Driver
1) Backup of Engine Controller PCB service mode setting value. Execute the following
• Network Scan Utility. (for machines with network connection)
• COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN
* For details on the uninstallation procedures, see the driver installation manuals that
2) Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete.
are included with the drivers.
13) Install the drivers which have been uninstalled in step 12).
* For details on the installation procedures, see the driver installation manuals that are
included with the drivers. ■■Procedure
1) Remove the Engine Controller PCB.
NOTE: • 15 Connectors
MAC address information is changed after replacement of the Main Controller PCB.
• 3 Flat Cables
Therefore, when the PC and the machine are connected by the network, the PC will
not be able to recognize the machine on the network. When the PC and the machine • 4 Screws
are connected by the USB memory device, the PC will not be able to recognize the
machine if the USB ID is changed. It becomes therefore necessary to reinstall the
driver. 18x 4x
In the case of a model without fax for EUR , perform the following works.
NOTE:
After replacing the Main Controller PCB, the value of the service mode (SDTM-DSP)
to set whether to display or hide the automatic shutdown menu becomes "0" (default
value).
In that case, the automatic shutdown menu is not displayed on the LUI of the machine.
To display the automatic shutdown menu on the LUI of the machine, it is necessary to
execute this process.
F-4-75
1) Setting of automatic shutdown menu display

Set 1 for automatic shutdown menu display in service mode (default: 0). ■■After Replacing the Engine Controller PCB
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SDTM-DSP
1) Restore the backup data.
2) Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Execute the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > RSTR-DCN
3) Checking the setting of Auto Sleep Time
2) When backup data cannot be uploaded before replacement due to reasons such as
In setting menu, check that the setting value of Auto Sleep Time is 1. (If the setting value is 0,
damage of the Engine Controller PCB, enter the value of each service mode item described
automatic shutdown does not work.)
on the service label.
Menu > Timer Settings > Auto Shutdown Time
3) Turn OFF and then ON the power (For accurate reflection of the restored items).
4-32
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Engine Controller PCB > After Replacing the Engine Controller PCB
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Power Supply PCB > Procedure
4-33
Removing the Power Supply PCB 3) Remove connectors from the Power Supply PCB.
• 4 Connectors
■■Preparation
2) Remove the Right Cover. "Removing the Right Cover"(page 4-10). 4x
3) Remove the Front Cover Unit. "Removing the Front Cover Unit"(page 4-9).
4) Remove the Front Right Cover. "Removing the Front Right Cover"(page 4-12).
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Power Supply PCB.
• 2 Claws
F-4-78
4) Remove the Power Supply PCB.
• 2 Screws
2x
F-4-76
2) Remove the Main Switch.
• 2 Screws
• 1 Edge Saddle
F-4-79
2x
CAUTION :
Be careful not to hang the power switch on the frame while removing the Power Supply
PCB or it may be damaged.
1x
F-4-77
4-33
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Power Supply PCB > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the HVT PCB > Procedure
4-34
Removing the HVT PCB 2) Remove the HVT PCB.
• 1 Connector
■■Preparation • 1 Flat Cable
• 2 Screws
1) Draw out the Cassette 1
7)Remove the Control Panel Unit. "Removing the Control Panel Unit"(page 4-35). 2x
8) Remove the Delivery Tray. "Removing the Delivery Tray"(page 4-13).
■■Procedure 2x
1) Remove the Heat Exhaust Fan Duct.
• 2 Claws
F-4-81
3) Remove the PCB stay.
• 3 Screws
3x
F-4-80
F-4-82
4-34
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the HVT PCB > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Control Panel PCB > Procedure
4-35
Removing the Control Panel PCB 2) Remove the Control Panel PCB.
• 8 Screws
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Rear Cover. "Removing the Rear Cover"(page 4-9). 8x
■ Procedure
1) Reverse the Control Panel and remove the stay.
• 5 Screws
5x F-4-84
F-4-83
4-35
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Removing the Control Panel PCB > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-36
Laser Exposure System 2) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit.

• 1 Connector
• 1 Flat Cable
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit • 4 Screws
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Rear Cover. "Removing the Rear Cover"(page 4-9). 2x
4x
■■Procedure
CAUTION : F-4-86
Be sure not to disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit as specific adjustment is needed.
A malfunction may occur when it is disassembled without the adjustment.
1) Remove the sponges.

• 6 Sponges
F-4-85
4-36
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit > Procedure
4-37
Image Formation System Removing the Drum Unit

■■Procedure
Removing the Toner Cartridge
■■Procedure CAUTION:
• Be careful not to touch the drum part when handling the Drum Unit.
1) Remove the Front Cover
2) Remove the Toner Cartridge by turning the knob in the direction of the arrow.
F-4-88
• Be sure to block light to the drum part covering with paper when the Drum Unit is
removed from the host machine.
F-4-89
F-4-87
4-37
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Remove the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4-38
1) Open the Left Door.
Remove the Developing Assembly
CAUTION: ■■Preparation
Open the Left Door to the 2nd step until the Drum Unit is unlocked. It may damage or
deform the Drum Unit when removing the Drum Unit at 1st step.
2) Remove the Drum Unit. "Removing the Drum Unit"(page 4-37).
3) Remove the Toner Cartridge. "Removing the Toner Cartridge"(page 4-37).Toner
Cartridge"Removing the Toner Cartridge"(page 4-37).
4) Remove the Front Cover Unit. "Removing the Front Cover Unit"(page 4-9).)
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Fan Frame.
• 2 Screws
• 2 Connectors
• 1 Wire Saddle
1st Step 2nd Step

2x
F-4-90
2) Remove the Drum Unit.

2x
1x
F-4-92
F-4-91
4-38
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Remove the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Remove the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4-39
NOTE :
Hold the Toner Sensor Holder while removing the screw on the right side of the Fan 2x
Frame.
1x
F-4-93
F-4-95
2) Remove the Developing Assembly.
• 2 Wire Saddles
• 1 Connector
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch or shock the Developing Cylinder when handling the Developing
Assembly.
F-4-94
4-39
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Remove the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder > Procedure
4-40
■■Adjustment after Replacement Removing the Developing Cylinder
Execute following service mode when replacing the Developing Assembly.
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Developing Assembly. "Remove the Developing Assembly"(page 4-38).
NOTE :
When abnormal termination occurs while stirring toner due to following cause, turn
OFF/ON the main power and re-execute "TONER-S" in the service mode.
■■Procedure
• Door open
• Service call error
CAUTION:
• Time out of stirring toner (Toner is not detected in 2 minutes).
Be careful not to touch or shock the Developing Cylinder when handling the Developing
Assembly.
F-4-96
4-40
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder > Procedure
4-41
1) Remove the Holder. 3) Remove the Bearing.
• 4 Screws • 2 Screws
4x 2x
F-4-99
F-4-97
4) Remove the Positioning guide.
2) Remove the Electrode Plate and the Gear.
• 1 Screw
1x
F-4-100
F-4-98
4-41
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller > Procedure
4-42
5) Remove the Bearing.
Removing the Transfer Roller
• 2 Screws
■■Procedure
2x
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the Transfer Roller when handling the Developing Assembly.
F-4-101
6) Remove the 2 Rollers and the Developing Cylinder.
F-4-103
F-4-102
4-42
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller > Procedure
4-43
2) Remove the Transfer Roller while releasing the claw.
Removing the Separation Static Charge Eliminator
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Left Front Cover. "Removing the Left Front Cover"(page 4-11).)
■■Procedure
1) Draw out the Separation Static Charge Eliminator.
F-4-104
F-4-105
4-43
4
4-44
Cleaning the Transfer Guide
■■Procedure
2) Clean the surface of the Transfer Guide using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
F-4-106
4-44
4
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure
4-45
Fixing System ■■Procedure

1) Remove the Front / Rear Fixing Cover.
Removing the Fixing Assembly • 2 Claws
• 2 Hooks
CAUTION :
It may cause burn injury to handle the Fixing Assembly just after turning OFF the host
machine. Be sure to cool down the Fixing Assembly before handling.
■■Preparation
F-4-107
4-45
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Remove the Fixing Film Unit > Procedure
4-46
2) Remove the Fixing Assembly.
Remove the Fixing Film Unit
• 3 Connectors
• 5 Screws ■■Preparation
1)Remove the Fixing Assembly. "Removing the Fixing Assembly"(page 4-45).
3x
■■Procedure
1) Turn the Fixing Assembly so that the [A] part faces to the bottom.
5x
F-4-108
[A]
F-4-109
2) Remove the Bearing Holder Unit.
• 2 Screws
2x
F-4-110
4-46
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Remove the Fixing Film Unit > Procedure
4-47
3) Remove the wire saddle. 4) Remove the Sensor Holder.
• 1 Wire saddle • 2 Claws
• 3 Bosses
• 1 Screw
1x
1x
F-4-111
F-4-112
4-47
4
4-48
5) Remove the Front Pressure Release Cam. 7) Remove the Fixing Stay.
• 1 Claw • 5 Screws
• 4 Bosses
5x
F-4-115
F-4-113
6) Remove the shaft.
F-4-114
4-48
4
4-49
8) Release the wire. 9) Remove the Fixing Contact Unit.
• 3 Claws
• 1 Boss
1x
Boss
F-4-117
NOTE :
Slide the Fixing Contact Unit while holding the boss.
F-4-116
4-49
4
4-50
10) Remove the Earth Holder Unit. 11) Remove the Front / Rear Pressure Plate.
• 1 Claw • 1 Spring for each
• 2 Bosses • 1 Claw for each
• 1 Spring
NOTE :
Record positions of the springs for re-assembly.
CAUTION :
Do not hook the spring, or it may be deformed.
F-4-119
F-4-118
4-50
4
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller > Procedure
4-51
12) Remove the Fixing Film Unit.
Removing the Pressure Roller
CAUTION : ■■Preparation
Be careful not to touch the Fixing Film Unit while assembling / disassembling. 1)Remove the Fixing Assembly. "Removing the Fixing Assembly"(page 4-45).
2) Remove the Fixing Film Unit. "Remove the Fixing Film Unit"(page 4-45).
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Lower Transfer Guide.
• 3 Claws
• 1 Boss
F-4-120
F-4-121
F-4-122
NOTE :
Slide the Lower Transfer Guide while holding the boss.
4-51
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller > Procedure
4-52
2) Remove the gears and the bearing. 4) Remove the E ring.
• 2 Bearings • 1 E Ring
• 2 Gears
• 1 Cam
CAUTION :
Be careful not to touch the Pressure Roller while assembling / disassembling.
F-4-123
3) Remove the Pressure Roller.

F-4-125
F-4-124
NOTE :
F-4-126
Slide the Lower Transfer Guide while holding the boss.
4-52
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide > Procedure
4-53
Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide
■■Preparation
■■Procedure
1) Clean the surface of the Fixing Inlet Guide using lint-free paper soaked with alcohol.
F-4-127
4-53
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Door Unit > Procedure
4-54
Pickup/Feed System 2) Remove the link arm and the stopper.

• 1 Screw
Removing the Left Door Unit

■■Preparation
1) Remove the Left Front Cover. "Removing the Left Front Cover"(page 4-11).
1x
2) Remove the Left Rear Cover "Removing the Left Rear Cover"(page 4-12).
3) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray. "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray"(page 4-54).
■■Procedure
1) Remove the connector.
• 1 Connector
• 1 Wire Saddle
F-4-129
1x 1x 3) Remove the Left Door Unit.
F-4-128
F-4-130
4-54
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Door Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-55
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
1) Remove the Left Front Cover. "Removing the Left Front Cover"(page 4-11). 1) Remove the Left Front Cover. "Removing the Left Front Cover"(page 4-11).
■■Procedure 3) Remove the Left Rear Cover. "Removing the Left Rear Cover"(page 4-12).
4) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray. "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray"(page 4-54).
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray.
5) Remove the Left Door Unit. "Removing the Left Door Unit"(page 4-53).
2) Expand the Multi-purpose Tray and remove the link part.
■■Procedure
1) Remove the connectors.
• 2 Connectors
2x
F-4-131
3) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray.
• 2 Bosses F-4-133
F-4-132
4-55
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-56
2) Remove the screw at the earth terminal. 3) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray.
• 1 Screw • 5 Screws
1x 5x
F-4-134 F-4-135
NOTE :
Remove the Multi-purpose Tray in direction of the arrow while avoiding the spring plate.
F-4-136
4-56
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure
4-57
Removing the Main Drive Unit 3) Remove the spring and the gear.
• 1 Spring
■■Preparation • 1 Gear
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Drive Cover.
• 4 Screws
4x
F-4-139
4) Remove the Drive Support Plate.
• 4 Screws
4x
F-4-137
2) Remove the gears.
• 3 Gears
F-4-140
F-4-138
4-57
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure
4-58
5) Remove the clutch. 7) Release the cable guide.
• 1 Connector • 1 Screw
• 1 Resin Ring • 1 Claw
1x 1x
F-4-141 F-4-143
6) Remove the bearing. 8) Remove the connectors.
• 1 Claw • 2 Connectors
2x
F-4-144
F-4-142
4-58
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Fixing Drive Unit > Procedure
4-59
9) Release the cable guide.
Removing the Fixing Drive Unit
• 1 Boss
• 2 Claws ■■Preparation
2) Remove the Left Rear Cover. "Removing the Left Rear Cover"(page 4-12).
■■Procedure
1) Remove the connectors.
• 4 Connectors.
4x
F-4-145
10) Remove the Main Drive Unit.
• 1 Connector
• 4 Screws
1x
F-4-147
4x 2) Remove the cable guide.

• 1 Claw
1x
F-4-146
F-4-148
4-59
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Fixing Drive Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit > Procedure
4-60
3) Remove the Fixing Drive Unit.
Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit
• 4 Screws
■■Preparation
4x 1) Draw out the Cassette 1
8) Remove the ADF Unit. "Removing the ADF Unit"(page 4-21).
■■Procedure
1) Remove the cover.
• 1 Boss
• 2 Hooks
F-4-149
NOTE :
Do not remove the screw (TP; M3 x 6).
F-4-150
4-60
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller > Procedure
4-61
2) Remove the Delivery/Reverse Unit.
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller
• 2 Claws
• 1 Connector ■■Procedure
CAUTION :
Do not tilt the host machine when removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller as toner
leakage might occur.
F-4-151
F-4-152
4-61
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller > Procedure
4-62
Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller
2) Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller.
■■Procedure
CAUTION :
Do not tilt the host machine when removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller as toner
F-4-154
F-4-153
4-62
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller > Procedure
4-63
1) Draw out the Cassette 1. 3) Remove the black bearing.
2) Remove the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit. • 1 Boss
F-4-156
NOTE :
Remove the bearing fitting boss of it with notch of the shaft hole.
F-4-157
F-4-155
4-63
4
4-64
4) Remove the shaft. 5) Remove the Cassette 1 Feed Roller.
CAUTION : CAUTION :
Be careful not to drop the Cassette 1 Feed Roller. Do not touch surface of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller as decrement of separation power
might occur.
NOTE :
2 different sizes of bosses are equipped with the shaft. Remove the thinner boss fitting
with notch of the shaft hole.
F-4-160
F-4-158
F-4-159
4-64
4
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller > Installation of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit
4-65
■■Installation of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit 2) Set the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit.
1) Insert the shaft of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit in the driving link part.
F-4-162
3) Install the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit.
F-4-161
• 2 Hooks
NOTE :
CAUTION :
To insert it with ease, hold pressure part of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit with
fingers. Push the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit until a click made.
F-4-163
4-65
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller > Installation of the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller > Procedure
4-66
Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller 1) Remove the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit.
■■Preparation
2) Remove the Cassette 1 Feed Roller Unit. "Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller"(page
4-61).
■■Procedure
CAUTION :
Do not tilt the host machine when removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller as toner
F-4-164
F-4-165
4-66
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller > Procedure
4-67
2) Remove the black bearing. 3) Remove the shaft.
• 1 Boss
CAUTION :
• Be careful not to drop the torque limiter and the Cassette 1 Separation Roller.
• Do not install dropped torque limiter.
F-4-166
NOTE :
Remove the bearing fitting boss of it with notch of the shaft hole.
F-4-168
F-4-167
4-67
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller > Installation of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller
4-68
4) Remove the Cassette 1 Separation Roller. ■■Installation of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller
CAUTION : 1) Insert the shaft of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit in the driving link part.
Do not touch surface of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller as decrement of separation

power might occur.
F-4-171
NOTE :
To insert it with ease, hold pressure part of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit with
fingers.
F-4-169
NOTE :
For installation of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller, fit boss of the shaft with notch of the
torque limiter as the removed shaft at procedure 2) might not be attached.
F-4-170
4-68
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Roller > Installation of the Cassette 1 Separation Roller
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Roller > Procedure
4-69
2) Install the Cassette 1 Separation Roller Unit.
Removing the Registration Roller
• 4 Bosses
■■Preparation
CAUTION :
Push the Cassette 1 Feed Separation until a click made.
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Drive Support Plate.
• 4 Screws
4x
F-4-173
F-4-172
4-69
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Roller > Procedure
4-70
2) Remove the clutch. 4) Remove the Registration Roller.
• 1 Connector • 1 Bearing
• 1 Resin Ring
1x
3) Remove the bearing. F-4-174

• 1 Claw F-4-176
NOTE :
Be careful that the step of the roller shaft is not hang on the shaft hole while moving the
Registration Roller toward "2" in the above figure.
F-4-175
F-4-177
4-70
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller > Procedure
4-71
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller NOTE :
Bend the Left door stopper while removing the Blindfold Cover.
■■Preparation
2) Remove the Left Front Cover. "Removing the Left Front Cover"(page 4-11).
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Blindfold Cover.
• 1 Screw
• 1 Boss
• 1 Shaft
F-4-179
1x 2) Remove the bearing and then remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.
• 1 Claw
F-4-178
4-71
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad > Procedure
4-72
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller . "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Roller"(page 4-70).
■■Procedure
1) Remove the bearings.
• 1 Claw
F-4-181
2) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad.
F-4-180
• 5 Claws
F-4-182
4-72
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Duplex Roller > Procedure
4-73
Removing the Duplex Roller 3) Release the bosses on the bearing.
• 2 Bosses
■■Procedure
1) Open the Left door.
2) Remove the Duplex Roller Gear Unit.
• 1 Claw
F-4-184
4) Remove the Duplex Roller.
• 4 Bosses
F-4-183
F-4-185
4-73
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Duplex Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Delivery Reverse Roller > Procedure
4-74
Removing the Delivery Reverse Roller 3) Remove the Gear.
• 1 Gear
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Delivery/Reverse Unit. "Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit"(page 4-59).
■■Procedure
1) Reverse the Delivery/Reverse Unit and remove the Delivery/Reverse Lower Guide.
• 1 Screw
• 4 Bosses
1x
F-4-188
4) Remove the Delivery Reverse Roller.
F-4-186
2) Remove the Bearing.
• 2 Resin Bearings
F-4-189
F-4-187
4-74
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Delivery Reverse Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller > Procedure
4-75
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller 2) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller.
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit."Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Unit"(page 4-54).
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup guide.
• 2 Screws
F-4-192
2x
F-4-190
NOTE :
Engage the link when assembling the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller.
F-4-191
4-75
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Vertical Path Roller > Procedure
5 Adjustment
■
■Basic
■
Adjustment
■Actions when Replacing
Parts
■
■Adjustment of Image
Position
5
Adjustment
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Pickup Feed System
5-2
Basic Adjustment Adjustment of Image Position

Procedures for adjustment of image position is described below.
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts
■■Pickup Feed System
Adjustment required in the field service works when following parts are replaced. The parts
Item Standard Reference
are classified by 3 function blocks. Adjustment of L1 = 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm), back side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) "Adjustment of Image
image leading Leading Edge Margin
Category Parts Reference
(front side)"(page
Original Exposure and Feed CIS Unit "Actions when Replacing Parts"(page 5-4). edge margin
5-12).
System (Reader Unit)
"Adjustment of Image
L1 Leading Edge Margin
Copyboard Glass "Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass (back side)"(page
Unit Unit"(page 5-6). 5-13).
Original Exposure and Feed

System (ADF Unit) "Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit"(page
ADF Unit
5-8). Adjustment of L1 = front side: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm), back side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) "Adjustment of
left edge margin Left Edge Margin
Controller
"Actions when Replacing the Main Controller of the Image (front
Main Controller PCB of the Image
PCB"(page 5-9). side)"(page 5-13).
"Adjustment of Left
Engine Controller "Actions when Replacing the Engine Controller Edge Margin of
PCB PCB"(page 5-11). the Image (back
side)"(page 5-14).
T-5-1
L1
T-5-2
5-2
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Pickup Feed System
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit)
5-3
■■Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) ■■Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit)
Item Standard Reference Item Standard Reference
Adjustment of L1 = 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) "Adjustment of Image Adjustment of L1 = 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm), front side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm), "Adjustment of Image
image leading Leading Edge Margin image leading back side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) Leading Edge Margin
(1-sided)"(page 5-14). (1-sided)"(page 5-15).
edge margin edge margin
Leading Edge Margin
L1
(front side)"(page
L1 5-16).
Leading Edge Margin
Adjustment of L1 = 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm) "Adjustment of Left (back side)"(page
Edge Margin of the 5-16).
left edge margin
Image (1-side)"(page
of the Image Adjustment of L1 = front side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm), back side: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) "Adjustment of
5-15).
left edge margin Left Edge Margin
of the Image (front
of the Image
side)"(page 5-17).
"Adjustment of Left
L1
Edge Margin of
the Image (back
side)"(page 5-17).
T-5-3 L1
Adjustment of L1 = front side:+/-0.5%, back side:+/-0.5% "Adjustment of

magnification Magnification Ratio
(front side)"(page
ratio
5-18).
"Adjustment of
L1 Magnification Ratio
(back side)"(page
5-18).
T-5-4
5-3
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit)
5 Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit
5-4
Actions when Replacing Parts ●● Adjustment of Image Reading Start Position
CAUTION:
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label.
■■Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit

Execute following procedure when replacing the CIS Unit.
1) Enter "-20" for the setting value on following service mode.
No. Item Reference • COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS = -20
1 Automatic gain offset adjustment for the "Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS
2) Select following service mode.
CIS unit unit"(page 5-4).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
2 Adjust of image reading start position "Adjustment of Image Reading Start Position"(page
5-4). 3) Press OK key and then the automatic adjustment is executed. After the automatic
3 Automatic white level adjustment adjustment, "executing" disappears.
"Automatic White Level Adjustment"(page 5-5).
4) Check the setting value is changed. When it is not changed, readjust from procedure 1) to 3).
4 Adjustment of image position "Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader
Unit)"(page 5-14).
T-5-5
●● Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit

1) Rewrite "1000" for the setting value on following service mode.
• COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R, BW-G, BW-B = 1000
• COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R, CL-G, CL-B = 1100
3) Press "OK" for each on following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC, BW-AGC
4) After the automatic adjustment, "executing" disappears.
5-4
5
Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit
5 Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit
5-5
●● Automatic White Level Adjustment • COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4
15) Press OK key and then the automatic adjustment is executed. After the automatic
CAUTION: adjustment, "executing" disappears.
1. The adjustment is executed when ADF is installed. 16) Check the setting value is changed. When it is not changed, readjust from procedure 10)
2. The adjustment is to match white level by stream reading with white level by to 15).
copyboard reading. It may occur following error without the adjustment. 17) Test copy with paper used by user as usual. When image error occurs, readjust procedure
• Inappropriate background density of images in stream reading from 10) to 16).
• Dust detection error in stream reading

●● Adjustment of Image Position
1) Enter the setting value for each on following service mode. "Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)"(page 5-14).
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R = 209
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G = 309
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B = 307
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW = 315
2) Set white paper used by user as usual on the Copyboard glass unit and then close the ADF
unit.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
adjustment, "executing" disappears.
5) Remove the paper from the copyboard glass unit and then set it on the document tray of
the ADF Unit.
9) Test copy with paper used by user as usual. When image error occurs, readjust procedure
from 1) to 8).
10) Set white paper used by user as usual on the copyboard glass unit and then close the
ADF unit.
the ADF Unit.
5-5
5
Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Actions when Replacing the CIS Unit
5 Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit
5-6
■■Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit ●● Adjustment of Image Reading Start Position
Execute following procedure when replacing the copyboard glass unit.
CAUTION:
No. Item Reference After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label.
1 Entering white level data of the "Entering White Level Data of the Standard White
standard white plate Plate"(page 5-6).
2 Automatic gain offset adjustment for "Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS 1) Enter "-20" for the setting value on following service mode.
the CIS unit unit"(page 5-6). • COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY >STRD-POS = -20
3 Adjust of image reading start position 2) Select following service mode.
"Adjustment of Image Reading Start Position"(page 5-6).
• COPIER >FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
4 Automatic white level adjustment 3) Press OK key and then the automatic adjustment is executed. After the automatic
"Automatic White Level Adjustment"(page 5-7).
5 Adjustment of image position "Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader 4) Check the setting value is changed. When it is not changed, readjust from procedure 1) to 4).
Unit)"(page 5-14).
T-5-6
●● Entering White Level Data of the Standard White Plate

• COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z
2) Enter the value from the barcode label on the Copyboard Glass.
●● Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit

• COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R, BW-G, BW-B = 1000
5-6
5
Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit
5 Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit
5-7
●● Automatic White Level Adjustment adjustment, "executing" disappears.
CAUTION: from 9) to 14).
The adjustment is to match white level by stream reading with white level by copyboard 16) Exit service mode.
reading. It may occur following error without the adjustment.
• Inappropriate background density of images in stream reading
• Dust detection error in stream reading ●● Adjustment of Image Position
"Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)"(page 5-14).
1) Enter the setting value for each on following service mode.

2) Set white paper used by user as usual on the copyboard glass unit and then close the ADF
unit.
the ADF Unit.
from 1) to 7).
unit.
the ADF Unit.
5-7
5
Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Actions when Replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit
5 Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit
5-8
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) 9) Set white paper used by user as usual on the copyboard glass unit and then close the ADF
unit.
■■Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit 10) Select following service mode.
Execute following procedure when replacing ADF Unit.
No. Item Reference adjustment, "executing" disappears.
1 Automatic White Level Adjustment "Automatic White Level Adjustment"(page 5-8).
the ADF Unit.
2 Adjustment of image position "Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)"(page
5-14). 13) Select following service mode.
T-5-7
●● Automatic White Level Adjustment
CAUTION:
from 9) to 14).
The adjustment is to match white level by stream reading with white level by copyboard 16) Exit service mode.
reading. It may occur following error without the adjustment.
• Inappropriate background density of images in stream reading
• Dust detection error in stream reading
●● Adjustment of Image Position
"Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)"(page 5-14).
1) Enter the setting value for each on following service mode.
unit.
the ADF Unit.
from 1) to 7).
5-8
5
Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > Actions when Replacing the ADF Unit
5 Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Main Controller PCB > Actions when Replacing the Main Controller PCB
5-9
Main Controller PCB 4) Automatic Gain Offset Adjustment for the CIS unit
4-1) Rewrite "1000" for the setting value on following service mode.
■■Actions when Replacing the Main Controller PCB • COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R, BW-G, BW-B = 1000
4-2) Rewrite "1100" for the setting value on following service mode.
< Preparation >
Back up user data (settings, registered data, etc.) and service mode data for setting and
4-3) Press "OK" for each on following service mode.
registration after PCB replacement. Take notes if data is unable to back up.
1) In Remote UI, perform the following procedure to export the user data (login in 4-4) After the automatic adjustment, "executing" disappears.
administrator mode). 4-5) Check the setting value is changed. When it is not changed, readjust from procedure
In Setting/Registration > Import/Export > Menu > Export, select an item and then start 4-1) to 4-4).
export.
5) Enter the All Setting Value other than W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the Service Label
2) In service mode, perform the following procedure to export the service mode data (and
5-1) Enter the all setting value other than W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the service label printed
then import it after replacement).
inside of the rear cover.
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
3) Record the default settings shown on the service label (these are entered after
replacement).
< Procedure >
NOTE:
In the case of a model without the reader, start from step 5).
1) Turning ON the power.

2) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON.
3) Entering the Setting Value from the Service Label ( W-PLT-X/Y/Z)
3-1) Enter the setting value of W-PLT-X/Y/Z from the service label printed inside of the
rear cover by following service mode. 6) Set the paper size group.
F-5-2
• COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z • COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SIZE-LC (setting the paper size group)
[Setting value]
1: AB configuration, 2: Inch configuration, 3: A configuration, 4: AB/Inch configuration
F-5-1
5-9
5
Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Main Controller PCB > Actions when Replacing the Main Controller PCB
5 Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Main Controller PCB > Actions when Replacing the Main Controller PCB
5-10
7) Clearing the Settings/Registration data In the case of a model without fax for EUR , perform the following works.
Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL.
When executing this item, the following data is cleared according to the values of SIZE-LC NOTE:
set in step 6). After replacing the Main Controller PCB, the value of the service mode (SDTM-DSP)
to set whether to display or hide the automatic shutdown menu becomes "0" (default
• Settings/Registration data value).
• Service mode data In that case, the automatic shutdown menu is not displayed on the LUI of the machine.
• Job ID To display the automatic shutdown menu on the LUI of the machine, it is necessary to
execute this process.
• Each log data
• Date data
Note that the following data is not cleared. 1) Setting of automatic shutdown menu display
• Service counter Set 1 for automatic shutdown menu display in service mode (default: 0).
• Adjustment value of Reader/DADF COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SDTM-DSP
8) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN (the setting value of Engine 2) Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Controller is backed up.) 3) Checking the setting of Auto Sleep Time
9) Turn OFF and then ON the power. In setting menu, check that the setting value of Auto Sleep Time is 1. (If the setting value is 0,
10) Import the service mode data backed up before replacement. automatic shutdown does not work.)
Insert the USB memory storage device to the slot of the machine, and execute COPIER > Menu > Timer Settings > Auto Shutdown Time
FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT.
11) Import user data using remote UI.
12) Uninstall Old Drivers.
• Printer Driver
• FAX Driver
• Scanner Driver
• Network Scan Utility. (for machines with network connection)
* For details on the uninstallation procedures, see the driver installation manuals that are
included with the drivers.
13) Install the drivers which have been uninstalled in step 12.
* For details on the installation procedures, see the driver installation manuals that are
included with the drivers.
NOTE:
MAC address information is changed after replacement of the Main Controller PCB.
Therefore, when the PC and the machine are connected by the network, the PC will
not be able to recognize the machine on the network. When the PC and the machine
are connected by the USB memory device, the PC will not be able to recognize the
machine if the USB ID is changed. It becomes therefore necessary to reinstall the
driver.
5-10
5
Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Main Controller PCB > Actions when Replacing the Main Controller PCB
5 Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Engine Controller PCB > Actions when Replacing the Engine Controller PCB
5-11
■■Actions when Replacing the Engine Controller PCB
< Preparation >
1) Backup of Engine Controller PCB service mode setting values.
Execute the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN
2) Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete.
< Procedure >

1) Restore the backup data.
Execute the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > RSTR-DCN
2) When backup data cannot be uploaded before replacement due to reasons such as
damage of the Engine Controller PCB, enter the value of each service mode item described
on the service label.
3) Turn OFF and then ON the power (For accurate reflection of the restored items).
5-11
5
Adjustment > Actions when Replacing Parts > Engine Controller PCB > Actions when Replacing the Engine Controller PCB
5 Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Pickup/ Feed System > Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (front side)
5-12
Adjustment of Image Position ■■Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (front side)
●● Adjustment for Each Cassette and Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup/ Feed System Print sheets of paper from each pickup parts and then check that L1 (image leading edge
margin) on front side is within 2.5+/-1.5mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of
standard.
CAUTION:
After the setting value is changed in the service mode, write the changed value on the
service label.
Print 10 sheets of paper by 1-sided / 2-sided from each pickup parts. Check that the image
margin and the non-image width are within the standard. Execute adjustment as follows when
L1
it is out of standard.
F-5-3
Adjustment Procedure
1) Adjustment the setting value on following service mode.
• Cassette 1: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-CST
• Cassette 2: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-CST2
• Multi-purpose tray: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-MF, REG-MF2
NOTE:
• Setting range: -12 to 12 (0.5mm by 1 setting value)
• L1 increases 0.5mm by setting value 1.
2) Exit service mode.

3) Print sheets of paper by 1-sided from each pickup parts and then check that L1 on front
side is within the 2.5+/-1.5mm. Return to procedure 1) when it is out of standard.
4) After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label.
5-12
5
Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Pickup/ Feed System > Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (front side)
5 Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Pickup/ Feed System > Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (front side)
5-13
■■Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (back side) ■■Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (front side)
Print sheets of paper from each pickup parts and then check that L1 (image leading edge ●● Adjustment for Each Cassette and Multi-purpose Tray
margin) on back side is within 2.5+/-2.0mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of Print sheets of paper from each cassette and multi-purpose tray. Check that L1 (left edge
standard. margin ) on front side is within 2.5+/-1.5mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of
standard.
NOTE:
Adjusting L1 on front side is also applied to the back side.
L1
F-5-4
• 2-sided: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP (rear)
NOTE:
• L1 increases 0.5mm by setting value 1. L1
F-5-5
2) Exit service mode. • Cassette 1: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1
3) Print sheets of paper by 2-sided from each pickup parts and then check that L1 on back • Cassette 2: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2
side is within 2.5+/-2.0mm. Return to procedure 1) when it is out of standard. • Multi-purpose tray: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MF
NOTE:

3) Print sheets of paper from each cassette and multi-purpose tray. Check that L1 on front
side is within 2.5+/-1.5mm. Return to procedure 1) when it is out of standard.
5-13
5
Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Pickup/ Feed System > Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (front side)
5 Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (1-sided)
5-14
■■Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (back side) Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit)
Print sheets of paper by 2-sided from cassette 1 and then check that L1 (left edge margin) on Set the test chart on the reader unit and then print 1 sheet of paper. Check that the image
back side is within 2.5+/-2.0mm. Execute adjustment as follows when it is out of standard. margin and the non-image width are within the standard. Execute adjustment as follows when
NOTE:
Adjusting L1 on back side is also applied to the back side from all pickup parts.
CAUTION:
service label.
■■Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (1-sided)

Check that L1 (image leading edge margin) is within 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm. Execute adjustment as
follows when it is out of standard.
1) Adjust the setting value on following service mode.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X
L1
NOTE:
F-5-6 • Setting range: -30 to 30 (0.1mm by 1 setting value)
1) COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE Adjust the setting value on following service • L1 increases 0.1mm by setting value 1.
mode.
NOTE:
L1

3) Print sheets of paper by 2-sided from cassette 1 and then check that L1 on back side is
within 2.5+/-2.0mm. Return to procedure 1) when it is out of standard.
4) After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label. F-5-7
3) Print sheets of paper by 1-sided on the reader unit and then check that L1 is within 2.5+/-
1.5mm. Return to procedure 1) when it is out of standard.
5-14
5
Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader Unit) > Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (1-sided)
5 Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit) > Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (1-sided)
5-15
■■Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (1-side) Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit)
Check that L1 (left edge margin of the image) is within 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm. Execute adjustment as
follows when it is out of standard. CAUTION:
Adjustment Procedure service label.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
Set the test chart on the ADF unit and then print 1 sheet of paper. Check that the image
NOTE: margin and the non-image width are within the standard. Execute adjustment as follows when
■■Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (1-sided)

Check that L1 (image leading edge margin) is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm. Execute adjustment as
follows when it is out of standard.
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
NOTE:
• L1 decreases 0.1mm by setting value 1.
L1
F-5-8

3) Print sheets of paper by 1-sided on the reader unit and then check that L1 is within 2.5+/-
L1
F-5-9

3) Print sheets of paper by 1-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 is within 2.5+/-
5-15
5
Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit) > Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (1-sided)
5 Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit) > Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (back side)
5-16
■■Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (front side) ■■Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (back side)
Check that L1 (image leading edge margin) on front side is within 2.5 +/- 2.0mm. Execute Check that L1 (image leading edge margin) on back side is within 2.5 +/- 2.0mm. Execute
adjustment as follows when it is out of standard. adjustment as follows when it is out of standard.
Adjustment Procedure Adjustment Procedure

1) Adjust the setting value on following service mode. 1) Adjust the setting value on following service mode.
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCSTDUP • FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
NOTE:
• Setting range: -50 to 50 (0.1mm by 1 setting value) NOTE:
• L1 decreases 0.1mm by setting value 1. • Setting range: -50 to 50 (0.1mm by 1 setting value)
• L1 decreases 0.1mm by setting value 1.
L1
L1
F-5-10
2) Exit service mode. F-5-11

3) Print sheets of paper by 2-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on front side is
3) Print sheets of paper by 2-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on back side is
5-16
5
Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit) > Adjustment of Image Leading Edge Margin (back side)
5 Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit) > Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (back side)
5-17
■■Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (front side) ■■Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (back side)
Check that L1 (left edge margin of the image) on front side is within 2.5 +/- 2.0mm. Execute Check that L1 (left edge margin of the image) on back side is within 2.5 +/- 2.0mm. Execute
adjustment as follows when it is out of standard. adjustment as follows when it is out of standard.

• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF • COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF2
NOTE: NOTE:
• Setting range: -16 to 16 (0.1mm by 1 setting value) • Setting range: -16 to 16 (0.1mm by 1 setting value)
• L1 increases 0.1mm by setting value 1. • L1 increases 0.1mm by setting value 1.
L1 L1
F-5-12 F-5-13
2) Exit service mode. 2) Exit service mode.
3) Print sheets of paper by 2-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on front side is 3) Print sheets of paper by 2-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on back side is
within 2.5+/-2.0mm. Return to procedure 1) when it is out of standard. within 2.5+/-2.0mm. Return to procedure 1) when it is out of standard.
4) After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label. 4) After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label.
5-17
5
Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit) > Adjustment of Left Edge Margin of the Image (back side)
5 Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit) > Adjustment of Magnification Ratio (back side)
5-18
■■Adjustment of Magnification Ratio (front side) ■■Adjustment of Magnification Ratio (back side)
Check that L1 (magnification ratio) on front side is within +/-0.5%. Execute adjustment as Check that L1 (magnification ratio) on back side is within +/-0.5%. Execute adjustment as
follows when it is out of standard. follows when it is out of standard.

• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD • FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
NOTE: NOTE:
• Setting range: -200 to 200 (0.01% by 1 setting value) • Setting range: -200 to 200 (0.01% by 1 setting value)
• The image decreases 0.01% in vertical direction by setting value 1. • The image decreases 0.01% in vertical direction by setting value 1.
L1 L1
F-5-14 F-5-15
2) Exit service mode. 2) Exit service mode.
3) Print sheets of paper by 1-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on front side is 3) Print sheets of paper by 2-sided on the ADF unit and then check that L1 on back side is
within +/-0.5%. Return to procedure 1) when it is out of standard. within +/-0.5%. Return to procedure 1) when it is out of standard.
4) After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label. 4) After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label.
5-18
5
Adjustment > Adjustment of Image Position > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF Unit) > Adjustment of Magnification Ratio (back side)
6 Troubleshooting
■
■Initial
■
■Test
Check
Print
■
■Troubleshooting Items
■
■Version Upgrade
■
■Debug Log
6
Troubleshooting
6 Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Each Unit / Function System Check Item List
6-2
Initial Check Item No. Detail Check

1 Check that the fixing film and pressure roller is not worn and deformed
and has no cut/dirt.
Fixing system 2
Initial Check Item List Check that the fixing thermistor wire is not cut.
3 Check that there is electrical conductivity among thermo switch.
Item No. Detail Check 1 Check that there is no foreign particle such as paper dust etc.
2 Check that the pickup/feed/separation roller does not accumulate the
1 The voltage of the power supply is as rated (+/-10%). paper dust. Check that these rollers are not worn and deformed and
2 The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near have no cut/dirt.
a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier), and it is not in a cold 3 Check that the registration roller/paper path roller is not worn and
place. The machine is not near a source of fire or dust. Pickup feed deformed and has no cut/dirt.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas. system 4 Check that the feed guide is not worn and deformed and has no cut/
Site Environment The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, dirt.
4
provide curtains.) 5 Check that there is no edge fold/curl/wave/moisture absorption
5 The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine occurred on the paper.
level. 6 Check if using Canon recommended paper/transparency makes it
The machine's power plug remains connected to the power better or not.
6
outlet. 1 Check that the drive system does not get heavy load.
7 The paper is of a recommended type. Drive system 2
Checking the Paper Check that the gear is not worn and not get chipped.
8 The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package. 1 Check that the cassette is installed properly and the paper size
Checking the 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the is configured properly. Check if the symptom appears or not after
Placement of Paper paper is not in excess of a specific level. replacing the cassette with the cassette that works normally.
10 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed Cassette 2 Check that the cassette middle plate moves smoothly and is not
in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray. deformed.
Checking the 11 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end 3 Check that the cassette side guide plate/ trailing edge guide plate is
Durables of its life. properly set.
Checking the 12 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically 1 Check that the sensor/clutch/motor/solenoid works properly (Make
replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached sure to check the power source and signal transmission route with the
Periodically Replaced
the time of replacement. general circuit diagram).
Parts 2 Check that there is no wire wedged/screw loosened.
T-6-1 3 Check that all the external covers are installed.
General 4 Check that the main power switch/control panel power switch is ON.
Each Unit / Function System Check Item List 5 Check that the wiring of power cable/signal cable to each option is
properly installed.
Item No. Detail Check 6 Check that the fuse on each PCB does not burn out.
1 Check that there is no cut, dirt or any foreign particle on the scanner 7 Check that there is no error in customer's usage method.
system parts.
2 Check that the CIS unit moves smoothly and there is no dirt on the rail.
Reader 3 Check that the lump light does not blink.
4 Check that there is no dew condensation found on the scanning
system parts.
1 Check that the drum unit and developing assembly are properly
Image installed.
formation 2 Check that there is no cut and dirt on the photosensitive drum.
system 3 Check that the transfer roller is not worn and deformed and has no cut/
dirt.
6-2
6
Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Each Unit / Function System Check Item List
6 Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Each Unit / Function System Check Item List
6-3
Item No. Detail Check
1 If moving the machine from the cold place such as storage etc to a
warm place abruptly, dew condensation is generated inside machine
and it may cause various troubles.
• E100 occurs due to dew condensation on BD sensor.
• Low image density in the vertical scanning direction due to dew
condensation on the dust-proof glass.
• Low image density due to dew condensation on the reader CIS and
copyboard glass.
Others
• Paper feed failure due to dew condensation on the pickup, feed
guide.
2 If the symptom appears described above, wipe the pickup/feed unit
with dry cloth. Moreover, if storing the toner container/developing
assembly/drum unit in the cold place and unpacking them abruptly in
warm place, dew condensation may be generated.
To prevent dew condensation, place them in warm place sufficiently (for
1 to 2 hours) before unpacking.
T-6-2
6-3
6
Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Each Unit / Function System Check Item List
6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > Select the Test Print TYPE > Procedure
6-4
Test Print
Overview
The host machine is equipped with following "test print TYPE" and an image failure can be checked with each test print TYPE which is processed on the main controller PCB (PCB2). If an image
failure is not occured on the test print at normal printing, the error may be caused by the PDL input or reader side.
Select the Test Print TYPE

PG-TYPE TYPE Pattern Items
Gradation Fogging Transfer Fault Black line White line Uneven Pitch Front/Rear Right Angle Straight Lines Magnification
Uneven Ration
Density
0 Grid - - - - - - - Yes Yes Yes
1 Half Tone - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - -
2 Solid Density (black) - - Yes - Yes Yes Yes - - -
3 Solid Density (white) - - - Yes - - - - - -
4 17-Gradation Yes Yes - - Yes - Yes - - -
5 to 7 (For R&D) - - - - - - - - - -
T-6-3
■■Procedure
1) Select PG TYPE on the following service mode.
• TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE
6-4
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > Select the Test Print TYPE > Procedure
6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE = 1)
6-5
How to View the Test Print ■■Halftone (TYPE = 1)
■■Grid (TYPE = 0)
F-6-2
Check item Check method Assumed cause

F-6-1 Transfer failure Check the evenness of halftone density. Transfer system failure or transfer roller
Check item Check method Assumed cause Check whether uneven image or foggy failure is considered.
image appears.
Right angle Check whether lines in the horizontal/ Feed system failure or Laser Scanner
vertical scanning directions are Unit failure is considered. Black line Check whether black lines appear on Laser light path failure, grid failure,
accuracy/
paralleled to the paper and these lines the image. developing system failure, cleaning
Straight line (drum) failure or transfer roller failure is
are at right angles to one another.
accuracy considered.
Magnification Check whether the grid is printed at Roller’s feed system failure or laser White line Check whether white lines appear on Developing system failure is
ratio 9.99mm intervals. (Check the image on exposure system failure (drum, Laser the image. considered.
the second side at duplex printing.) Scanner) is considered. Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the Drum failure, developing system
T-6-4 image in the horizontal scanning failure, laser exposure system failure
direction. or drive related failure is considered.
Uneven density Check the density difference between Drum failure or developing system
the front and rear sides. failure is considered.
T-6-5
6-5
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE = 1)
6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Solid white (TYPE = 3)
6-6
■■Solid black (TYPE = 2) ■■Solid white (TYPE = 3)
F-6-3 F-6-4
Check item Check method Assumed cause Check item Check method Assumed cause
Transfer failure Check the evenness of halftone density. Transfer system failure or transfer roller Black line Black line Check whether black lines Laser light path failure, developing
Check whether uneven image or foggy failure is considered. appear on the image. system failure, cleaning (drum) failure
image appears. or transfer roller failure is considered.
White line Check whether white lines appear on Developing system failure is T-6-7
the image. considered.
Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the Drum failure, developing system
image in the horizontal scanning failure, laser exposure system failure
direction. or drive related failure is considered.
Uneven density Check the density difference between Drum failure or developing system
the front and rear sides. failure is considered.
T-6-6
6-6
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Solid white (TYPE = 3)
6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE = 4)
6-7
■■17 gradations (TYPE = 4)
F-6-5
Check item Check method Assumed cause

Gradation Check whether gradation in density is Drum failure, laser exposure system
made appropriately. failure or developing system failure is
considered.
Fogging Check whether foggy image appears in Drum failure, laser exposure system
the blank area. failure or developing system failure is
considered.
Black line Black line Check whether black lines Laser light path failure, developing
appear on the image. system failure, cleaning (drum) failure
or transfer roller failure is considered.
Transfer failure Check the evenness of halftone density. Transfer system failure or transfer roller
Check whether uneven image or foggy failure is considered.
image appears.
T-6-8
6-7
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE = 4)
6 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Edge Dirt
6-8
Troubleshooting Items Image Failure

■■Edge Dirt
Troubleshooting Items
Category Item Reference
Image failure Dirt Edge dirt p. 6-8
Void Feed failure p. 6-9
- Irregular pitch (94mm) of the drum unit p. 6-9

F-6-6
Operation failure Paper jam Large curl p. 6-10 ●● Location

Paper path
T-6-9
●● Cause
Floating toner in the host machine stains paper by paper feeding.
●● Condition
When floating toner occurs.
●● Field Remedy
Clean paper path.
6-8
6
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Edge Dirt
6 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Irregular pitch (94mm) of the drum unit
6-9
■■Feed Failure ■■Irregular pitch (94mm) of the drum unit
F-6-7
●● Location
Feed roller
F-6-8
●● Location
●● Cause
Drum unit : approx. 94mm pitch
Amount of charge, only at a part where the roller contacts, is changed by friction between the
feed roller and paper so that amount of toner, transfers to paper, is changed.
●● Cause
Remaining toner adheres surface of the drum unit by vibration caused when the drum unit is
●● Condition
re-installed or re-rotates, as amount of toner adhesion is larger than the developing process,
It occurs at high printing chart such as halftone and black when static electricity eliminating is
the drum unit is vibrated by load while the cleaning blade is removing remaining toner. As a
decreased.
result, laser beam exposure is blurred by the vibration and an irregular pitch occurs.
●● Field Remedy
●● Condition
Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing > Special Mode M (Transfer failure prevention
High temperature / High humidity
mode)
●● Field Remedy
Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing > Special Mode Y (Extend initial rotation
mode)
6-9
6
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Irregular pitch (94mm) of the drum unit
6 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Special mode (User mode)
6-10
Operation Failure Special mode (User mode)
■■Large Curl The setting of the special mode in user mode is described below.
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing Settings/Registration
●● Location > Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing
Fixing Assembly
Special Mode O
●● Cause Outline Separation priority mode
Curl is increased when water amount of the paper on surface and back are changed by high Use case When separation failure from the drum unit occurs
fixing temperature. Details Increase separation bias output in a area of leading edge of paper at
-2500V (duty 89.2%). Other than the above area is used separation
bias output on separation bias setting mode or normal mode.
●● Condition Set range OFF, ON
Paper stored at high temperature and high humidity for a long time. Default value OFF
Special Mode M
Outline Transfer failure prevention mode
●● Field Remedy Use case When transfer failure occurs by low / high transfer output
Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing > Special Mode N (Curl correction mode) Details Change transfer current value setting.
Set range HIGH DOWN, DOWN, OFF, UP, HIGH UP
Default value OFF
Special Mode N
Outline Curl correction mode
Use case When paper jam occurs in 2-sided printing using the curled paper
and absorbed moisture paper.
Details Paper jam frequently occurs when performing 2-sided printing,
especially with the curled paper and absorbed moisture paper. In this
case, change the setting value to Mode 1 (N1 mode) or Mode 2 (N3
mode).
• N1 mode: Lower the fixing target temperature for plain paper.
• N3 mode: The through-put decreases during the wait.
Set range AUTO, OFF, N1 Mode, N3 Mode
Default value AUTO
6-10
6
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Special mode (User mode)
6 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Special mode (User mode)
6-11
Special Mode S Special Mode X
Outline Performance priority mode Outline Streaks reduction mode (only for media printing and printing from
Use case Shorten the wait after changing paper size PS/PCL printer driver)
Use case When black streaks appears.
Details Cooling down operation is controlled without dropping the through-
Details Black streaks appears on printouts in condition of paper type or print
put as far as possible. The temperature judgement value of the fixing
environment. In such case, change the setting value.
sub thermistor is changed between the start of cooling down and the
• Paper curl or crinkle may be improved without the setting when
end in the last rotation.
changing paper type or print environment.
Set range OFF(190 deg C), ON(220 deg C) • Print speed becomes slow when Mode2 is set.
Default value OFF Set range OFF, Mode1 (Effect: low), Mode2 (Effect: High)
Special Mode P Default value OFF
Outline Thin paper mode Special Mode Z
Use case When paper cling or high-temperature offset occurs with out-of- Outline Streaks reduction mode (only for copying)
specific thin paper.
Use case When black streaks appears.
Details Control paper cling while changing following conditions.
Details Black streaks appears on printouts in condition of paper type or print
environment. In such case, change the setting value.
Transfer
• Paper curl or crinkle may be improved without the setting when
• Turns ON at 8mm inside of paper.
changing paper type or print environment.
• Turns OFF at the sheet-to-sheet.
• Print speed becomes slow when Mode2 is set.
Separation
Set range OFF, Mode1 (Effect: low), Mode2 (Effect: High)
• -2500V until 6mm inside of paper (leading edge strong bias) Default value OFF
• -1500V other than the above (weak bias) T-6-10
Fixing temperature control

• The target temperature in the "Thin paper mode" is set -10
deg C less than the target temperature during the wait,
printing and sheet to sheet.
Set range OFF, ON
Default value OFF
Special Mode G
Outline Special setting for fixing mode
Use case When electrostatic offsetting (adhere toner on the film) occurs.
Details Extend initial rotation by sheet to sheet after print setting and charge
positive film bias in order to remove the charge from the film.
Set range Default, Low ( processed by 38 sheet to sheet), High ( processed by
6 sheet to sheet )
Default value Default
Special Mode Y
Outline Extend initial rotation mode
Use case When irregular pitch (94mm) horizontal streak occurs caused by
shock as startup.
Details Extend initial rotation to discharge frictional charging caused as
remaining toner adheres surface of the drum unit at startup.
Set range 0: OFF
1: Mode 1 - Extend initial rotation in 3 sec
2: Mode 2 - Extend initial rotation in 7 sec
Default value OFF
6-11
6
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Special mode (User mode)
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Upgrading by UST > Preparation
6-12
Version Upgrade ■■System Requirements

• OS (one of the following)
Overview • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows Vista
This machine supports the following two methods for upgrading the firmware. • Microsoft Windows Server 2008
1. User Support Tool (UST) • Microsoft Windows 7
2. Via Internet • Microsoft Windows Server 2012
• Microsoft Windows 8
• PC
Upgrading by UST • Compatible to the selected OS
• Memory (RAM): 32MB or more free space
• Hard Disk: 100MB or more free space
• Display: 640x480 pixels or more in resolution, 256 tones or more
• With USB ports
Firm ware
• UST file for this product*

*: Download the corresponding file from the system CD or the service site (ask the
service technician in charge for details)
USB cable
• USB cable (USB1.1/2.0)
PC
F-6-9
■■Preparation
Firmware configuration 1) Start the PC.
Firmware Function Stored in 2) Connect the device to the PC with the USB cable.
Boot ROM Start the main controller. Main controller PCB 3) Turn on the device on standby.
4) Press [Menu] key to upgrade firmware in User mode.
Main Controller Control overall performance. Main controller PCB
System Settings > Update Firmware
LANGUAGE Manage languages used in panel / Main controller PCB The message, "Will you restart the device to upgrade firmware?", is shown on the display.
Remote UI and font data. Select [Yes].
DCON Control the printer unit. DC controller PCB
5) Press [OK] to automatically restart the device. "***DOWNLOAD MODE***" is shown on the
T-6-11
display.
6) Wait for the motor of the host machine to stop.
Some UST versions meet less numbers of firmware than those listed above.
NOTE:
Press STOP key to cancel Download mode and return to the normal operation.
6-12
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Upgrading by UST > Preparation
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Upgrading by UST > Downloading System Software
6-13
■■Downloading System Software 4) Select [USB Device] and click [Next] button.
1) Open UST.
USTUPD.exe
F-6-10
2) Take a note of the firmware version to upgrade and click [Next] button.
F-6-13
5) Click [Start] button.
F-6-11
3) Click [Next] button.
F-6-14
F-6-12
6-13
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Upgrading by UST > Downloading System Software
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Upgrading by UST > Downloading System Software
6-14
6) Click [Yes] button for the warning message to start download.
F-6-15
7) Click [OK] button when download is completed.
F-6-16
8) Turn off and on the power to restart the device.
9) Output the spec report from Service mode to confirm if the firmware version is the same as
that on the note taken in Step 2).
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> SPEC
6-14
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Upgrading by UST > Downloading System Software
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Upgrading via Internet > Messages
6-15
Upgrading via Internet ■■Messages
Select to automatically install the firmware update without using a computer. The message displayed on the device operation panel is as follows.
■■Preparation No. Error message The timing of Remedy

occurrence
1) Check that there are no other jobs being executed.
1 Job in progress... If there is a job 1. Wait until the job is completed.
2) In an environment where access is obtained via a proxy server, the proxy setting is made Wait a moment, then try again. being executed: 2. Cancel the job.
from the remote UI. 2 Cannot check the firmware Network error 1. Check whether the device can be
3) Check that the serial number of the host machine is shown on the Main Controller PCB. version. connected to the external network.
(Server communication error.) 2. Check whether the proxy setting has
NOTE: been made (in case of access via a
To upgrade the firmware of the host machine via Internet, the serial number of the proxy server).
machine need to be written on the Main Controller PCB. 3 Cannot download the firmware. 1. Check whether the device can be
Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P> SPEC, and check that the BODY No. is (Error during download.) connected to the external network.
registered. 2. Check whether the proxy setting has
If the BODY No. has not been registered, register the serial number. been made (in case of access via a
proxy server).
3. Check that the serial number of the
host machine is shown on the Main
Controller PCB.
■■Procedure
4 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** If update (writing) 1. Update the firmware again using UST.
1) Press the [Menu] key, and update the firmware via the Internet in user mode. NETWORK AVAILABLE of the firmware
System Management Settings > Update Firmware > Via Internet IP ADRESS has ended in
IP address of the machine failure:
PRESS STOP KEY TO EXIT
NOTE:
• Refer to the User's Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external 5 ***DOWNLOAD MODE***
network. FAILED TO UPDATE
• This is applicable either in a wired LAN environment or a wireless LAN environment. 6 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** If the update of -
UPDATE IS COMPLETE the firmware is
successful
T-6-12
6-15
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Upgrading via Internet > Messages
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Overview > Collection procedure
6-16
Debug Log ●● What is necessary to collect logs

A USB flash drive that satisfies the following conditions is required to obtain the debug logs of
the machine:
Overview • Formatted in FAT 16/FAT32
• With sufficient free space (of several MB)
■■Function Overview
• Can be recognized by the machine
The debug log is a log that analyzes the program behavior of the machine to enable
developers to identify problems.
■■Collection procedure
This machine is embedded with a function that compiles the log of the behavior of each
software module as debug log and outputs it as integrated log for analyzing problems. The following shows the procedure for collecting the debug log from the Control Panel.
Be sure to collect the debug log when the Support Dept. of sales company so instructs. Note 1) Connect a USB flash drive to the machine.
that there is no need for service technicians to check the content of collected debug log. 2) Execute the following service mode from the Control Panel or remote UI.
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > LOGWRITE
●● Cases in which collection of debug log is effective

"Executing..." is displayed while log collection is executed. When it is completed, the screen
Collection of debug log is effective in the following cases:
shows the service mode screen again.
• Neither the Support Dept. of sales company nor CINC can reproduce the trouble that
3) Remove the USB flash drive by the correct procedure.
occurred at the customer site
Connect the USB flash memory to the PC, and check that the log file (SUBLOG.TXT) has
• When the error frequency is low
been saved.
• When the failure is suspected to be due to firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical
failure.
CAUTION:
NOTE: The debug log file (SUBLOG.TXT) that can be collected from the machine is saved in
If the procedure for reproducing the failure is clear and the Support Dept. of sales clear text data that is not encrypted.
company and CINC can reproduce it, collection of debug log is not necessary. As this data may contain information attributed to the user, it is necessary to gain
approval from the user before collecting it.
Also, the collected file needs to be handled in the same manner as that for user data
■■Conditions for collecting logs necessary for reproduction.
●● Conditions for not being able to collect logs

In the following cases, the procedure for obtaining logs is not required because logs cannot NOTE:
be obtained. The following information is not included in the debug log of the machine:
• Service mode screen cannot be accessed • Job list (job name, user name, address)
• Communications log (address, user name)
• The machine cannot recognize a USB flash drive • Job log (user name, job name)
• No USB port is installed in the machine (when the model has only a copy function)
6-16
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Overview > Collection procedure
7 Error Code
■
■Overview
■
■Error Code
■
■Jam Code
■
■Alarm Code
7
Error Code
7 Error Code > Overview > Outline
7-2
Overview ●● Jam Log

Meaning of each section of a jam log displayed on the control panel is described below.
Outline △:Space
Location Pickup position
This chapter describes various codes displayed on the control panel when a failure occurs on
the host machine. These are classified into 3 codes as follows. 150227 △ 1306 △ 3-0184-7-02
Y/M/D: “Y” indicates last Jam Cord Paper size
Type Item Reference two numbers of the year 16hex 16hex
Error code Displays when an error occurs from the host machine. p. 7-3
HH/MM:
*1. 20 errors are maximum numbers to display. in 24-hour notation
Jam code Displays when a jam occurs in the host machine. p. 7-8
F-7-2
*2. 20 errors are maximum numbers to display. Location Code
Alarm code Displays when a part of function is lost. p. 7-10
Jam code includes location and occurrence division information. Location and occurrence
*3. 30 errors are maximum numbers to display.
division information are displayed as 1-digit number as follows.
T-7-1
*1 Errors are displayed on the control panel on the following service mode. Device Location Code
• COPIER> DISPLAY> ERR Host machine 3
ADF 4
T-7-2
*2 Jams are displayed on the control panel on the following service mode.
• COPIER> DISPLAY> JAM
Pickup Position Code
*3 Alarms are not displayed on the control panel. To check the alarms, print error log report on When a jam occurs, pickup location is indicated by following pickup position code.
the following service mode.
• COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ERR-LOG Device Pickup Position Code
ADF -
Multi-purpose Tray 0
Cassette 1 1
●● Error Log Cassette 2 2
Meaning of each section of a error log displayed on the control panel is described below. Duplex 7
T-7-3
△:Space
Error Cord
150227 △ 1407 △ E001-0000

Y/M/D: “Y” indicates last HH/MM:
two numbers of the year in 24-hour notation
F-7-1
7-2
7
Error Code > Overview > Outline
7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code
7-3
Error Code E Detail Item Description

Code Code
E001 0001 Title Fixing assembly abnormal high temperature (sub thermistor )
Error Code Detection Abnormal high temperature is detected at the sub thermistor in the fixing
description assembly.
E Detail Item Description Remedy 1. Clear error on the following service mode. Turn OFF and then ON the
Code Code main power switch.
Fixing assembly temperature rising error during the startup COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR
E000 0000 Title
2. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the engine
Detection The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature within controller PCB (PCB1).
description specified time. 3. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the power supply
Remedy 1. Clear error on the following service mode. Turn OFF and then ON the PCB (PCB4).
main power switch. 4. Check connection between the engine contorller PCB (PCB1) and the
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR power supply PCB (PCB4).
2. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the engine 5. Replace the fixing assembly.
controller PCB (PCB1). 6. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
3. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the power supply 7. Replace the power supply PCB (PCB4).
PCB (PCB4). E002 0000 Title Fixing assembly temperature rising error
4. Check connection between the engine contorller PCB (PCB1) and the Detection The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature within
power supply PCB (PCB4).
description specified time.
5. Replace the fixing assembly.
Remedy 1. Clear error on the following service mode. Turn OFF and then ON the
6. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
main power switch.
7. Replace the power supply PCB (PCB4).
Fixing assembly abnormal high temperature (main thermistor ) COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR
E001 0000 Title
Detection Abnormal high temperature is detected at the main thermistor in the fixing controller PCB (PCB1).
description assembly. 3. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the power supply
Remedy 1. Clear error on the following service mode. Turn OFF and then ON the PCB (PCB4).
main power switch. 4. Check connection between the engine contorller PCB (PCB1) and the
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR power supply PCB (PCB4).
2. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the engine 5. Replace the fixing assembly.
controller PCB (PCB1). 6. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
3. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the power supply 7. Replace the power supply PCB (PCB4).
PCB (PCB4). E003 0000 Title Fixing assembly abnormal low temperature (main thermistor )
4. Check connection between the engine contorller PCB (PCB1) and the Detection The main thermistor detects abnormal low temperature.
description
6. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1). Remedy 1. Clear error on the following service mode. Turn OFF and then ON the
main power switch.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR
controller PCB (PCB1).
3. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the power supply
PCB (PCB4).
4. Check connection between the engine contorller PCB (PCB1) and the
6. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
7-3
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code
7-4
E Detail Item Description E Detail Item Description
Code Code Code Code
E003 0001 Title Fixing assembly abnormal low temperature (sub thermistor ) E014 0001 Title Fixing motor (M3) rotation error
Detection The sub thermistor detects abnormal low temperature. Detection Fixing motor (M3) rotation error
description description
Remedy 1. Clear error on the following service mode. Turn OFF and then ON the Remedy 1. Check connection to the fixing motor (M3).
main power switch. 2. Replace the fixing motor (M3).
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR 3. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
2. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the engine E014 0002 Title Fixing motor (M3) pressure releasing error
controller PCB (PCB1). Detection "Speed lock signal =0" is detected more than 1.0 sec continuously
3. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the power supply description after the fixing motor (M3) starts to drive and "Speed lock signal =1" is
PCB (PCB4). detected.
4. Check connection between the engine contorller PCB (PCB1) and the Remedy 1. Check connection to the fixing motor (M3).
power supply PCB (PCB4). 2. Replace the fixing motor (M3).
5. Replace the fixing assembly. 3. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
6. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1). E014 0003 Title Fixing motor (M3) pressure error
7. Replace the power supply PCB (PCB4). Detection Fixing pressure is never detected more than 3 sec or more by the fixing
E004 0000 Title Error in fixing power supply drive circuit. description pressure release sensor (SR15/16) after fixing pressure drives.
Detection When thermistor disconnection is detected. Remedy 1. Check connection to the fixing motor (M3).
description Abnormally high temperature detected by thermistor. 2. Replace the fixing motor (M3).
Remedy 1. Check connection of the thermistor relay connector. 3. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
-Main thermistor relay connector: J37 E024 0000 Title Developing Assembly error
-Sub thermistor relay connector: J37 Detection Disconnection is detected 10 times in 10 ms cycle by connection
2. Check connection between the fixing assembly and the engine description detection signal of the toner sensor (SR17).
controller (PCB1). Remedy 1. Check connection between the Developing Assembly and the engine
3. Replace the fixing assembly. controller PCB (PCB1).
4. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1). 2. Replace the Developing Assembly
E010 0000 Title Main motor (M1) rotation error 3. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
Detection "Speed lock signal =1" is not detected more than 2.0 sec or more after the E110 0000 Title Polygon motor (M2) rotation error
description main motor (M1) starts to drive. Detection The laser scanner unit is not prepared after controlling the polygon motor
Remedy 1. Check connection to the main motor (M1). description rotation speed starts.
2. Replace the main motor (M1). Remedy 1. Check connection to the polygon motor (M2).
3. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1). 2. Replace the laser scanner unit.
E010 0001 Title Main motor (M1) start error 3. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
Detection "Speed lock signal =0" is detected more than 1.0 sec continuously E196 0000 Title Error of reading data in the EEPROM
description after the main motor (M1) starts to drive and "Speed lock signal =1" is Detection Fail to read EEPROM data at startup.
detected.
description
Remedy 1. Check connection to the main motor (M1).
2. Replace the main motor (M1). Remedy 1. Update the set of main controller firmware
3. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1). 2. Replace Engine controller PCB
Fixing motor (M3) start error E196 0001 Title Error of access data in the EEPROM
E014 0000 Title
Detection "Speed lock signal =1" is not detected more than 2.0 sec or more after the Detection Fail to access EEPROM data.
description fixing motor (M3) starts to drive. description
Remedy 1. Check connection to the fixing motor (M3). Remedy Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
2. Replace the fixing motor (M3). E196 0002 Title Error of writing data in the EEPROM
3. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1). Detection Fail to write EEPROM data.
description
Remedy Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
7-4
7
7-5
Code Code Code Code
E196 1000 Title Main Controller PCB reading/writing error E250 0000 Title One-touch Key Cover sensor error
Description Error in reading/writing of main program in the Main Controller PCB Detection One-touch Key Cover sensor error
Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. description
E196 2000 Title Main Controller PCB reading/writing error Remedy 1. Check the One-touch Key Cover sensor.
Description Error in reading/writing of setting values storage area in the Main 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Controller PCB 3. Replace Control Panel PCB.
Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware. E261 0000 Title Driving circuit error
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Detection Zero cross detection error
E202 0001 Title CIS unit HP error
description
Detection When the CIS unit is not detected by the CIS unit HP sensor (SR03). Remedy 1. Check connection of the connectors.
description 2. Replace the engine controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy 1. Replace the CIS unit HP sensor (SR03). 3. Replace the AC driver PCB (PCB3).
2. Replace the reader motor (M02). E280 0005 Title System error
3. Replace the main controller PCB (PCB2). Detection System error
E202 0002 Title CIS unit HP error
description
Detection When the CIS unit is not moved from the CIS unit HP sensor (SR03). Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
description E350 0000 Title System error
Remedy 1. Replace the CIS unit HP sensor (SR03). Detection System error
2. Replace the reader motor (M02).
description
3. Replace the main controller PCB (PCB2).
E225 0001 Title CIS unit light intensity is under the standard level Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
E351 0000 Title System error
Detection CIS unit light intensity is under the standard level while shading.
description Detection System error
Remedy 1. Remove/connect the flat cable. description
2. Replace the flat cable. Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Replace the CIS unit. 2. Replace main controller PCBs
4. Replace the main controller PCB (PCB2). E354 0000 Title System error
E246 0000 Title System error Detection System error
Detection System error description
description Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
Remedy Contact to the sales companies. E355 0000 Title System error
E247 0000 Title System error Detection System error
Detection System error description
Remedy Contact to the sales companies. E355 0004 Title System error
E248 0001 Title Error in access to backup data for Reader (reading error at power-on) Detection System error
Detection The Reader-related adjustment values could not be read. description
Remedy 1. Clear the backup RAM of RCON. E355 0005 Title System error
Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>RCON. Detection System error
2. Enter all the values written on the service label in service mode again.
description
3. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
7-5
7
7-6
Code Code Code Code
E719 0000 Title Card Reader communication error (serial communication) E744 4000 Title Engine ID error
Detection Communication with the Card Reader could not be started at startup. Detection Invalid engine connection was detected.
description description
Remedy 1. Check the connection of the Card Reader-F1, and turn OFF and then Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
ON the main power switch. 2. Check the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Remove the Card Reader-F1. 3. Install the Engine Controller PCB.
4. Install the set of the controller firmware.
NOTE: 5. Check the model code. (When the model code and the engine code
After performing the remedy work above, go through the following to clear are mismatched, E744-4000 occurs.)
the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> E719-CLR. E744 5000 Title Error in the Control Panel PCB
E732 0000 Title Scanner communication error Detection Error in the Control Panel PCB (microcomputer).
Detection Scanner communication error description
description Remedy 1. Check the Control Panel PCB, and install the firmware (PANEL).
Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware. 2. Install the set of the controller firmware.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
E733 0000 Title Error in printer communication E746 0000 Title Error in main controller PCBs
Detection Failure between DC controller PCB and controller PCB Detection Communication error occurred in main controller PCB (other than
description description scanner-related)
Remedy 1. Check connectors of DC controller PCB and main controller PCB Remedy Replace main controller PCBs
2. Replace DC controller PCBs E766 xxxx Title Firmware error
3. Replace main controller PCBs
Error in CCU communication *1 Detection An error due to the controller software occurred so that print could not be
E736 0000 Title proceeded.
description
Detection Error in CCU-modem communication
Remedy Due to firmware error, the possibility of solving the error by replacing the
description Main Controller PCB is low.
Remedy 1. Update the set of main controller firmware Check the installed engine again.
2. Replace FAX-NCU PCBs
E766 8000 Title Digital registration error
3. Replace main controller PCBs
E744 0001 Title Language file version error Detection Information at digital registration could not be obtained.
Detection Language file version was not matched with the main program. description
description Remedy 1. Install the Engine Controller firmware.
2. Install the set of the controller firmware.
Remedy Install the set of the controller firmware. 3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
E744 0002 Title Language file size error
E804 0004 Title Controller Fan error
Detection The size of the language file exceeded the upper limit. Detection Since the startup of the Controller Fan, the Fan was locked for a specified
description description consecutive period of time.
Remedy Install the set of the controller firmware. Remedy 1. Check power supply to the Controller Fan.
E744 1001 Title Firmware version error 2. Replace the Controller Fan.
Detection Version of the main program and the version of the start-up program was E805 0000 Title Delivery cooling fan (FM1) error
description not matched. Detection • FAN driving:
Remedy Install the set of the controller firmware. description When "Lock signal = High" is detected more than 5 sec or more
continuously.
• FAN suspended:
When "Lock signal = Low" is detected more than 10 sec or more
continuously
Remedy 1. Check connection to the delivery cooling fan (FM1).
2. Replace the delivery cooling fan (FM1).
7-6
7
7-7
E Detail Item Description
Code Code
E805 0001 Title Image formation part cooling fan (FM3) error
Detection • FAN driving:
description When "Lock signal = High" is detected more than 5 sec or more
continuously.
• FAN suspended:
continuously.
Remedy 1. Check connection to the Image formation part cooling fan (FM3).
2. Replace the Image formation part cooling fan (FM3).
E805 0002 Title Power supply cooling fan (FM2) error
Detection • FAN driving:
description When "Lock signal = High" is detected more than 5 sec or more
continuously.
• FAN suspended:
continuously.
Remedy 1. Check connection to the power supply cooling fan (FM2).
2. Replace the power supply cooling fan (FM2).
E996 0071 Title Sequence jam error
Detection 30 sec JAM timer (timing error jam), which sets at the timing when ADF
description motor is driven, occurs time out.
Remedy 1. Check connection of the connectors.
2. Replace the main controller PCB (PCB2).
3. Replace the reader unit.
T-7-4
7-7
7
7 Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type
7-8
Jam Code
Jam Type
Type Description
DELAY Delay jam
STNRY Stationary jam
OVERLAP Double feed detection
TIMING Timing error
OHP NG Incorrect paper
ADF OP ADF open
COVER OP Cover open
RESIDUAL Residual jam
PICKUP NG Pickup error
POWER ON Power ON
DOOR OP Door open
SEQ NG Sequence jam
DELAY ESC Delay jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
OTH JAM Other jams
STNRY ESC Stationary jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
STP Staple
SDL STP Saddle stitch staple
INIT ROT Residual (at initial rotation)
UP DEVICE Upper stream device jam
OTHER Others
ERROR Error
RETRY ERR Retry error
STOP Press Stop key
ROT Keeps rotating
PROGRAM Program
TIME OUT Time-out
PUNCH Punch
MEDIA NG Misprint
T-7-5
7-8
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type
7 Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit (including Cassette Feeding Module-AC1)
7-9
Main Unit (including Cassette Feeding Module-AC1) ACC ID Jam code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name
3 0104 DELAY SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
3 0144 SR5/SR10/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Delivery Full Sensor/
SR02 SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
SR01 3 01C4 SR5/SR10/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Delivery Full Sensor/
SR10 SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
3 014C SR5/SR10/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Delivery Full Sensor/
SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
SR5 3 018C SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
3 01CC SR5/SR10/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Delivery Full Sensor/
SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
3 0208 STNRY SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
SR14
3 0248 SR5/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Pre-registration Sensor
3 02C8 SR5/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Pre-registration Sensor
SR11
3 0250 SR5/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Pre-registration Sensor
3 02D0 SR5/SR11 Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Pre-registration Sensor
3 1014 POWER ON SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
3 1054 SR5/SR11/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Pre-registration
SR14 Sensor/ Arch Sensor
3 10D4 SR5/SR11/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Pre-registration
SR14 Sensor/ Arch Sensor
3 1118 DOOR OP SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
F-7-3
3 1158 SR5/SR10/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Delivery Full Sensor/
ACC ID Jam code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name SR11/SR14 Pre-registration Sensor/ Arch Sensor
4 0001 DELAY SR01 Document End Sensor 3 1198 SR11 Pre-registration Sensor
4 0002 STNRY SR01 Document End Sensor 3 11D8 SR5/SR10/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Delivery Full Sensor/
4 0004 DELAY SR01 Document End Sensor SR11/SR14 Pre-registration Sensor/ Arch Sensor
4 0005 STNRY SR01 Document End Sensor T-7-6
4 0071 SEQ NG *1 - - *1: The state is recovered by opening / closing the doors, or turning OFF / ON the power
4 0094 POWER ON SR01 Document End Sensor/ Document Sensor supply.
SR02
4 0095 PICKUP NG SR02 Document Sensor
7-9
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit (including Cassette Feeding Module-AC1)
7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code
7-10
Alarm Code
Alarm Code
Alarm Title A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Action
Code
10-0020 Toner low alarm The host machine requests UGW for pre-delivery
of the toner either when remaining quantity of the
toner reaches to the setting value (%) or toner
empty is detected by the toner sensor (SR17).
The alarm log is reported on the following service
mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ERR-LOG
10-0100 Toner cartridge replacement alarm When the toner cartridge replacement is detected.
The alarm log is reported on the following service
mode.
35-0073 Drum unit replacement completion When the drum unit replacement completion
alarm is detected. The alarm log is reported on the
following service mode.
35-0091 ADF pickup roller unit replacement ADF pickup roller unit replacement completion is
completion alarm notified.
35-0092 ADF separation pad replacement ADF separation pad replacement completion is
completion alarm notified.
40-0073 Drum low alarm The host machine requests UGW for pre-delivery
of the drum unit either when life of the drum unit
reaches to the setting value (%) or full of waste
toner is detected by the waste toner full sensor
(SR6). The alarm log is reported on the following
service mode.
85-0001 System error Contact the sales company.
85-0004 System error Auto recovery due to replacement with a new

Main Controller PCB, which is a service part.
85-0005 System error Auto recovery due to replacement with a used
Main Controller PCB.
T-7-7
7-10
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code
8 Service Mode
■
■Outline
■
■COPIER
■
■FEEDER
■
■TESTMODE
■
■FAX
8
Service Mode
8 Service Mode > Outline > Back Up of Service Mode
8-2
Outline Back Up of Service Mode

Each device is adjusted at the time of shipment and the adjusted values are written on the
Outline of Service Mode service label. When replacing the main controller PCB, engine controller PCB or clearing
RAM, ADJUST and OPTION values are reset to default. Re-adjustment must be executed in
Service mode field and ensure to write the changed setting values on the service label. If the corresponding
item is not found on the service label, write the setting values on the blank space.
COPIER Service mode for copier

• The service label is affixed inside the rear cover.
DISPLAY State display mode
I/O I/O display mode
ADJUST Adjustment mode
FUNCTION Operation / inspection mode
OPTION Specification setting mode
COUNT ER Counter mode
FEEDER ADF service mode
ADJUST Adjustment mode
FUNCTION Operation / inspection mode

F-8-2
FAX FAX service mode
SSSW Bit switch registration mode

MENU Menu switch registration mode
NUM Numeric parameter setting mode
NCU NCU parameter setting mode
(Service adjustment is not available）
TESTMODE Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.
PRINT Print test mode

FAX FAX test mode
F-8-1
8-2
8
Service Mode > Outline > Back Up of Service Mode
8 Service Mode > Outline > Caution when Changing the Setting Value
8-3
Service Mode Structure Screen Flow of Service Mode
• Initial / Category / Sub category screen
Select the item : ▼/▲ key
User screen SERVICE MODE
Go to Sub category screen : OK key
Go to Initial screen : Return key COPIER
FEEDER
FAX
TESTMODE
Initial screen F-8-4
• Item selection screen

1)Up-arrow / down-arrow key Return key
2)OK key Select the item : ▼/▲ key
Go to Setting screen : OK key ADJ-X :0
Up-arrow / down-arrow key Go to Sub category screen : Return key ADJ-Y :0
Category Category ADJ-Y-DF :0
ADJ-X-MG :0
STRD-POS :0
1)Up-arrow / down-arrow key Return key
2)OK key
F-8-5
Up-arrow / down-arrow key
• Input value screen
Sub category Sub category
Enter the setting value : Numeric key
Increment the setting value :▲ ADJ-X
1)Up-arrow / down-arrow key
2)OK key
Return key one by one ▲
Decrease the setting value :▼ 0
one by one
▼
Nullify the setting value : Clear key (-30 - 30)
Item Item
Change the setting : OK key
Maintain the setting : Return key F-8-6
1)Up-arrow / down-arrow key
2)OK key OK / Return key Change the +/- of the : * key
setting value
Setting screen
Caution when Changing the Setting Value
F-8-3 When the setting value is changed in the service mode, check and overwrite the value every
5 sec. When turning OFF the main power within 5 sec after changing the value, it is not
saved.
CAUTION:
Wait 10 seconds from when "executing..." disappears to when the main power is turned
OFF.
8-3
8
Service Mode > Outline > Caution when Changing the Setting Value
8 Service Mode > Outline > Remote UI Service Mode > Usage Method
8-4
Remote UI Service Mode ●● Authentication Screen
1) PSWD-SW: 0
■■Function Overview
Remote UI can be used to display, set and implement various service mode in addition to
rebooting the machine. In this case, machine's UI displays "Remote service mode".
F-8-7
■■Operating Condition 2) PSWD-SW: 1
Operation of service mode using remote UI becomes possible in the following cases:
• Service mode is not used on LUI.
• There is no user who has been logged in to the remote UI service mode (this function).
• Remote UI is enabled in the setting of LUI.
Setting Menu > System Management Settings > Remote UI On/Off
• “RMT-SW” is enabled in service mode (Enabled when the setting value is “1”.) F-8-8
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > RMT-SW (remote UI service mode function) 3) PSWD-SW: 2
0: OFF, 1: ON (default)
■■Usage Method
1. Activate the Web browser.
2. Enter the following URL in the address input field.
http://<IP address of the machine or host name>/servicemode.html
3. Enter the password and click "Log In".
* Password required for authentication differs depending on the service mode setting. F-8-9
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PSWD-SW 4) Click “Logout” to end the operation.
NOTE :
PSWD-SW Password required for authentication After login, if you close the browser without “logout”, it is recognized that you have
0 1. Password of RUI service mode been “logged in”. Therefore, in order to log in to service mode again, you must wait for
a certain period of time (3 minutes) from the last access to make the system timeout or
1 1. Password of RUI service mode turn OFF/ON the power.
2. Password of service mode
2 1. Password of RUI service mode
2. User's system administrator ID
3. Password of system administrator
4. Password of service mode
T-8-1
* Password of service mode can be changed in COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SM-PSWD.
8-4
8
Service Mode > Outline > Remote UI Service Mode > Usage Method
8 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
8-5
COPIER COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

TARGET-R Display of Red shading target value
Details Display the shading target value of Red. Continuous display of 128
DISPLAY (minimum) or 384 (maximum) is a failure of the CIS unit.
Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit.
■■MISC - When scanning image failure occurs.
Adj/set/operate method None (Display only)
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC Display/adj/set range 128 to 384
TNRB-IDK Display of Bk-color Toner Container ID Default value 272
Details Display the ID of installed Bk-color Toner Container Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
Use case Check the barcode ID on the Toner Container is read correctly COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z
Display/adj/set range 12 decimal digits 000000000000 to 999999999999 TARGETBW Display of BW shading target value
Default value 000000000000 Details Display the shading target value of BW. Continuous display of 128
(minimum) or 384 (maximum) is a failure of the CIS unit.
T-8-2
- When scanning image failure occurs.
■■CCD Display/adj/set range 128 to 384
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD Default value 278
Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
TARGET-B Display of Blue shading target value
T-8-3
Details Display the shading target value of Blue. Continuous display of 128
(minimum) or 384 (maximum) is a failure of the CIS unit.
Display/adj/set range 128 to 384
Default value 282
Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
TARGET-G Display of Green shading target value
Details Display the shading target value of Green. Continuous display of
128 (minimum) or 384 (maximum) is a failure of the CIS unit.
Default value 277
Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
8-5
8
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
8 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
8-6
■■VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
PANEL PANEL version
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
Details To display the version of PANEL.
MAIN Display of MAIN (main program) version
Use case When upgrading the firmware
Details To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB. Adj/set/operate N/A (Display only)
Use case When upgrading the firmware method
Adj/set/operate N/A (Display only) Display/adj/set range 00.00 to 99.99
method Default value 0
Display/adj/set range 00.00 to 99.99 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> PANEL-UP
Default value 0 T-8-4
BOOT Boot ROM version
Details To display the version of Boot ROM (BOOT program).
Adj/set/operate N/A (Display only)
method
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Default value 0
LANG Language pack version
Details To display the version of language pack.
method
Default value 0
DEMODATA Demo print data version
Details To display the version of demo print data.
Since this machine does not have demo print function, "FF.FF" is
displayed.
method
Default value 0
ECONT Display of the recording engine's ROM version
Details Display of the recording engine's ROM version
method
00.00 to 99.99
Default value 0
8-6
8
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
8-7
■■USER ADJUST
COPIER > DISPLAY > USER
■■ADJ-XY
SPDTYPE splay of Ctrollr Board engine speed type
Details To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board. COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
Use case When checking the engine speed type ADJ-X Adjustment of image position in book mode: vertical scan
Adj/set/operate None (display only) Details - Adjust the image reading start position in the vertical scanning
method direction for copyboard reading.
Display/adj/set range 25 to 35 - The image position is moved 0.1mm to rear side by setting value 1.
T-8-5 Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data.
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
press OK key.
Caution Do not use for usual service.
■■ERR After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the
service label.
COPIER > DISPLAY > ERR
Display/ad/set range -30 to 30
ERR Display of error log
Unit 0.1 mm
Details To display the errors that occurred in the past and the date and time
Default value 0
they occurred.
ADJ-Y Adjustment of image position in book mode: horizontal scan
Adj/set/operate None (display only)
Details - Adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning
method direction for copyboard reading.
T-8-6 - The image position is moved 0.1mm to front side by setting value 1.
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data.
■■JAM press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the
COPIER > DISPLAY > JAM service label.
JAM Display of jam log Display/ad/set range -16 to 16
Details To display the jam that occurred in the past and the date and time Unit 0.1 mm
they occurred. Default value 0
Adj/set/operate None (display only) ADJ-Y-DF Adjustment of image position in ADF mode: horizontal scan [front
method side]
T-8-7 Details - Adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning
direction for ADF reading.
- The front image position is moved 0.1mm to rear side by setting
value 1.
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data.
press OK key.
service label.
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 0
8-7
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
8-8
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY ■■CCD
ADJ-Y-DF2 Adjustment of image position in ADF mode: horizontal scan [back
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
side]
Details - Adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning W-PLT-X Entering white level data (X) of the standard white plate
direction for ADF reading. Details - Enter white level data (X) of the standard white plate.
- The rear image position is moved 0.1mm to rear side by setting - When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data,
value 1. enter the value from the service label.
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit, enter the value from
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then the barcode label on the Copyboard Glass.
press OK key. Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit / the Main Controller
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the PCB.
service label. - When clearing RAM data.
Display/ad/set range -16 to 16 Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
Unit 0.1mm Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the
Default value 0 service label.
ADJ-X-MG Fine Adjustment of image magnification ratio in book mode: vertical Display/ad/set range 7000 to 9999
scan Default value 8290
Details - Fine-adjust image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction Related service mode COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD > TARGET-R
for copyboard reading by changing speed of the reader motor. COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD > TARGET-G
- The image magnification ratio is increased/decreases 0.1% by COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD > TARGET-B
setting value 1. W-PLT-Y Entering white level data (Y) of the standard white plate
Details - Enter white level data (Y) of the standard white plate.
+: Reduction - When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data,
-: Enlargement enter the value from the service label.
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit, enter the value from
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then the barcode label on the Copyboard Glass.
press OK key. Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit / the Main Controller
Caution The Fine-adjustment over the image magnification standard in PCB.
vertical direction may occur image error. - When clearing RAM data.
Display/ad/set range -100 to 100 Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
Unit 0.01% Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the
Default value 0 service label.
STRD-POS Adjustment of reading position for ADF reading: vertical scan Display/ad/set range 7000 to 9999
Details Adjust reading position in vertical scanning for ADF reading Default value 8746
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data. Related service mode COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD > TARGET-R
COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD > TARGET-G
COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD > TARGET-B
press OK key.
COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD > TARGETBW
service label.
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
T-8-8
8-8
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
8-9
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
W-PLT-Z Entering white level data (Z) of the standard white plate DFTAR-B Adjustment of shading target value (Blue color for ADF)
Details - Enter white level data (Z) of the standard white plate. Details - Adjust blue shading target value for ADF reading
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data, - When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value from the
enter the value from the service label. service label
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit, enter the value from - After executing COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-
the barcode label on the Copyboard Glass. WLVL2, write the automatic adjustment value on the service label.
Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit / the Main Controller PCB. Use case When replacing the Reader Unit / the CIS Unit / the Copyboard
- When clearing RAM data. Glass Unit / the Main Controller PCB.
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the Display/ad/set range 128 to 384
service label. Default value 307
Display/ad/set range 7000 to 9999 Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2
Default value 9451 DFTAR-BW Adjustment of shading target value (BW color for ADF)
Related service mode COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD >TARGET-R Details - Adjust BW shading target value for ADF reading
COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD >TARGET-G - When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value from the
COPIER > DYSPLAY > CCD >TARGET-B service label
DFTAR-R Adjustment of shading target value (Red color for ADF) - After executing COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-
Details - Adjust red shading target value for ADF reading WLVL2, write the automatic adjustment value on the service label.
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value from the Use case When replacing the Reader Unit / the CIS Unit / the Copyboard
service label Glass Unit / the Main Controller PCB.
- After executing COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF- Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
WLVL2, write the automatic adjustment value on the service label. Display/ad/set range 128 to 384
Use case When replacing the Reader Unit / the CIS Unit / the Copyboard Default value 315
Glass Unit / the Main Controller PCB.
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
50-RG None
Display/ad/set range 128 to 384
50-GB None
Default value 299
100-RG None
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2
100-GB None
DFTAR-G Adjustment of shading target value (Green color for ADF)
50DF-RG None
Details - Adjust green shading target value for ADF reading
50DF-GB None
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value from the
service label 100DF-RG None
- After executing COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF- 100DF-GB None
WLVL2, write the automatic adjustment value on the service label. OFST-BW0 CIS offset level adjustment: BW, rear
Use case When replacing the Reader Unit / the CIS Unit / the Copyboard Details Adjust rear side of CIS offset level when original BW reading.
Glass Unit / the Main Controller PCB. Use case Check that the adjusted CIS offset value is appropriate in case that
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. an image failure occurs due to CIS error.
Display/ad/set range 128 to 384 Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
Default value 309 Display/ad/set range 0 to 255
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 Default value 246
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
8-9
8
8-10
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
OFST-BW1 CIS offset level adjustment: BW, center GAIN-BW0 CIS gain level adjustment: BW
Details Adjust center of CIS offset level when original BW reading. Details Adjust CIS gain level when original BW reading.
Use case Check that the adjusted CIS offset value is appropriate in case that Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit.
an image failure occurs due to CIS error. - When image failure occurs for original BW reading.
Display/ad/set range 0 to 255 Display/ad/set range 1 to 255
Default value 246 Default value 18
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
OFST-BW2 CIS offset level adjustment: BW, front GAIN-CL0 CIS gain level adjustment: CL
Details Adjust front side of CIS offset level when original BW reading. Details Adjust CIS gain level when original color reading.
Use case Check that the adjusted CIS offset value is appropriate in case that Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit.
an image failure occurs due to CIS error. - When image failure occurs for color reading.
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
OFST-CL0 CIS offset level adjustment: CL, rear LED-BW-R Red color LED lighting time adjustment for original BW reading
Details Adjust rear side of CIS offset level when original color reading. Details Adjust red color LED lighting time for original BW reading.
Use case Check that the adjusted CIS offset value is appropriate in case that Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data related
an image failure occurs due to CIS error. to reader.
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
OFST-CL1 CIS offset level adjustment: CL, center LED-BW-G Green color LED lighting time adjustment for original BW reading
Details Adjust center of CIS offset level when original color reading. Details Adjust green color LED lighting time for original BW reading.
OFST-CL2 CIS offset level adjustment: CL, front LED-BW-B Blue color LED lighting time adjustment for original BW reading
Details Adjust front side of CIS offset level when original color reading. Details Adjust blue color LED lighting time for original BW reading.
8-10
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG
8-11
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD ■■IMG-REG
LED-CL-R Red color LED lighting time adjustment for original color reading
COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG
Details Adjust red color LED lighting time for original color reading.
MAGV-C1 Adjustment of magnification ratio: CST1
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data related
to reader. Details Adjust magnification ration in vertical scanning direction
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. magnification ratio is decreased 0.01% by setting value 1 as feed
speed is increased and an image size is decreased.
Default value 1834 Use case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB.
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
press OK key.
LED-CL-G Green color LED lighting time adjustment for original color reading
Caution Paper size error may occur when extra change of the initial value is
Details Adjust green color LED lighting time for original color reading. performed.
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data related Display/ad/set range -35 to 35
to reader.
Default value 6
MAGV-C2 Adjustment of magnification ratio: CST2
Details Adjust magnification ration in vertical scanning direction
Default value 2155 magnification ratio is decreased 0.01% by setting value 1 as feed
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC speed is increased and an image size is decreased.
LED-CL-B Blue color LED lighting time adjustment for original color reading Use case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB.
Details Adjust blue color LED lighting time for original color reading. Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data related press OK key.
to reader. Caution Paper size error may occur when extra change of the initial value is
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. performed.
Display/ad/set range 1 to 2500 Display/ad/set range -35 to 35
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC MAGV-MF1 Adjustment of magnification ratio: 1/1 SPD, MP
T-8-9 Details Adjust magnification ration in vertical scanning direction
magnification ratio is decreased 0.01% by setting value 1 as feed
Use case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB.
press OK key.
performed.
Default value 4
8-11
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
8-12
COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG ■■PASCAL
MAGV-MF2 Adjustment of magnification ratio: 1/2 SPD, MP
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
Details Adjust magnification ration in vertical scanning direction
magnification ratio is decreased 0.15% by setting value 1 as feed OFST-P-K Bk density adjustment at test print reading
speed is increased and an image size is decreased. Details - Adjust the Bk-color offset when test print is read at the auto
Use case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB. gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then - The more the value is increased, the more image becomes dark.
press OK key. - When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value from the
Caution Paper size error may occur when extra change of the initial value is service label.
performed. Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB.
Display/ad/set range -20 to 20 Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
Default value 4 press OK key.
MAGV-DU1 Adjustment of magnification ratio: 1/1 SPD, back side, MP Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the
Details Adjust magnification ration in vertical scanning direction service label.
magnification ratio is decreased 0.01% by setting value 1 as feed Display/ad/set range -32 to 32
speed is increased and an image size is decreased. Unit 0.5mm
Use case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB.
Default value 0
T-8-11
press OK key.
performed.
Default value 0
MAGV-DU2 Adjustment of magnification ratio: 1/2 SPD, back side, MP
■■FEED-ADJ
Details Adjust magnification ration in vertical scanning direction COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
magnification ratio is decreased 0.15% by setting value 1 as feed
ADJ-C1 Adjustment of image left edge margin: CST1
Use case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB. Details Image left edge margin is increased/decreased 0.25mm by setting
value 1.
+: Image left edge margin is increased (An image moves rigt).
press OK key.
-: Image left edge margin is decreased (An image moves left).
Use case - When adjusting an image position.
performed.
- When replacing the Engine Controller PCB.
T-8-10
service label.
Unit 0.25mm
Default value 0
8-12
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
8-13
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C2 Adjustment of image left edge margin: CST2 Details Image leading edge margin is increased/decreased 0.5mm by
Details Image left edge margin is increased/decreased 0.25mm by setting setting value 1.
value 1. +: Image leading edge margin is increased (An image moves
+: Image left edge margin is increased (An image moves rigt). downward).
-: Image left edge margin is decreased (An image moves left). -: Image leading edge margin is decreased (An image moves
upward).
- When replacing the Engine Controller PCB. Use case - When adjusting an image position.
press OK key. Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
press OK key.
service label. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the
service label.
Unit 0.25mm
Unit 0.5mm
ADJ-MF Adjustment of image left edge margin: MP REG-CST Adjustment of image leading edge margin: CST1
Details Image left edge margin is increased/decreased 0.25mm by setting Details Image leading edge margin is increased/decreased 0.5mm by
value 1. setting value 1.
+: Image left edge margin is increased (An image moves rigt). +: Image leading edge margin is increased (An image moves
-: Image left edge margin is decreased (An image moves left). downward).
Use case - When adjusting an image position. -: Image leading edge margin is decreased (An image moves
- When replacing the Engine Controller PCB. upward).
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then Use case - When adjusting an image position.
press OK key. - When replacing the Engine Controller PCB.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
service label. press OK key.
Display/ad/set range -12 to 12 Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the
service label.
Unit 0.25mm
Default value 0 Unit 0.5mm
ADJ-REFE Adjustment of image left edge margin: 2-sided Default value 0
Details Image left edge margin is increased/decreased 0.25mm by setting
value 1.
+: Image left edge margin is increased (An image moves rigt).
-: Image left edge margin is decreased (An image moves left).
press OK key.
service label.
Unit 0.25mm
Default value 0
REG-MF Adjustment of image leading edge margin: 1/1 SPD, MP
8-13
8
8-14
REG-CST2 Adjustment of image leading edge margin: CST2 Details Image leading edge margin is increased/decreased 0.5mm by
Details Image leading edge margin is increased/decreased 0.5mm by setting value 1.
setting value 1. +: Image leading edge margin is increased (An image moves
+: Image leading edge margin is increased (An image moves downward).
downward). -: Image leading edge margin is decreased (An image moves
-: Image leading edge margin is decreased (An image moves upward).
upward). Use case - When adjusting an image position.
Use case - When adjusting an image position. - When replacing the Engine Controller PCB.
- When replacing the Engine Controller PCB. Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then press OK key.
press OK key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label.
service label. Display/ad/set range -12 to 12
Display/ad/set range -12 to 12 Unit 0.5mm
Unit 0.5mm Default value 0
Default value 0 REG-DUP4 Adjustment of image leading edge margin: 1/2 SPD, back side
REG-DUP Adjustment of image leading edge margin Details Image leading edge margin is increased/decreased 0.5mm by
Details Image leading edge margin is increased/decreased 0.5mm by setting value 1.
setting value 1. +: Image leading edge margin is increased (An image moves
+: Image leading edge margin is increased (An image moves downward).
downward). -: Image leading edge margin is decreased (An image moves
-: Image leading edge margin is decreased (An image moves upward).
upward). Use case - When adjusting an image position.
Use case - When adjusting an image position. - When replacing the Engine Controller PCB.
- When replacing the Engine Controller PCB. Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then press OK key.
press OK key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the service label.
service label. Display/ad/set range -24 to 24
Display/ad/set range -12 to 12 Unit 0.5mm
Unit 0.5mm Default value 0
Default value 0 LOOP-CST Adjustment of registration loop amount: CST1
REG-MF2 Adjustment of image leading edge margin: 1/2 SPD, MP Details Paper feed distance is increased/decreased 0.5mm by setting value
1.
+: The loop amount is increased.
-: The loop amount is decreased.
Use case - When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data.
- When paper skew occurs from the CST1.
Unit 0.5mm
Default value 10
8-14
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
8-15
LOOP-MF Adjustment of registration loop amount: MP LOOP-THK Adjustment of registration loop amount: MP
Details Paper feed distance is increased/decreased 0.5mm by setting value Details Paper feed distance is increased/decreased 0.5mm by setting value
1. 1.
+: The loop amount is increased. +: The loop amount is increased.
-: The loop amount is decreased. -: The loop amount is decreased.
Use case - When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data. Use case - When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data.
- When paper skew occurs from the MP. - When paper skew occurs on heavy paper 1, heavy paper 2,
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. envelope, OHP and label.
Display/ad/set range 0 to 20 Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
Unit 0.5mm Display/ad/set range 0 to 20
Default value 8 Unit 0.5mm
LOOP-OP Adjustment of registration loop amount: CST2 Default value 8
Details Paper feed distance is increased/decreased 0.5mm by setting value T-8-12
1.
+: The loop amount is increased.
-: The loop amount is decreased.
Use case - When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data. ■■HV-PRI
- When paper skew occurs from the CST2.
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
Display/ad/set range 0 to 20 OFST1-DC Adjustment of DC offset at primary charge
Unit 0.5mm Details Adjust the DC offset at the primary charge. The less the value is
Default value 8 decreased, the more image becomes dark.
LOOP-DU Adjustment of registration loop amount: back side Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
press OK key.
Details Paper feed distance is increased/decreased 0.5mm by setting value
1. Display/ad/set range -128 to 127
+: The loop amount is increased. Unit 0.4% (duty)
-: The loop amount is decreased. Default value 0
Use case - When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data. OFST1-AC Adjustment of AC offset at primary charge
- When paper skew occurs at the back side setting. Details Adjust the AC offset at the primary charge. The less the value is
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. decreased, the more image becomes dark.
Display/ad/set range 0 to 20 Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
Unit 0.4% (duty)
Default value 0
T-8-13
8-15
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
8-16
■■DEVELOP COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
ADJ-C2 Adjustment of the left edge registration: CST2
COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP
Details As the input value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of
DE-OFST Entering offset value determined by developing DC bias paper is increased by 0.25 mm.
Details Enter the offset value determined by the developing DC bias with +: Left margin becomes larger.
manual. -: Left margin becomes smaller.
+: Increment Use case - When adjusting image position
-: Decrement - When clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB or replacing the
The less the value is decreased, the more image becomes dark. PCB
Use case Image error (fogging, low image density) Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and press
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then method OK key.
press OK key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
Display/ad/set range -128 to 127 service label.
Unit 0.4% (duty) Display/adj/set range 12 to -12
Unit Approx. 0.25 mm
Default value 0
Default value -4
T-8-14
ADJ-MF Adjustment of the left edge registration: MP
paper is increased by 0.25 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger.
■■CST-ADJ -: Left margin becomes smaller.
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ Use case - When adjusting image position
- When clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB or replacing the
ADJ-C1 Adjustment of the left edge registration: CST1
PCB
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and press
paper is increased by 0.25 mm. OK key.
+: Left margin becomes larger. method
-: Left margin becomes smaller. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
Use case - When adjusting image position
- When clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB or replacing the Display/adj/set range 12 to -12
PCB Unit 0.25mm
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and press Default value -4
method OK key. ADJ-REFE Adjustment of the left edge registration: 2-sided
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Details As the input value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of
service label. paper is increased by 0.25 mm.
Display/adj/set range 12 to -12 +: Left margin becomes larger.
-: Left margin becomes smaller.
Unit Approx. 0.25 mm
Use case - When adjusting image position
Default value -2
- When clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB or replacing the
PCB
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and press
method OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
Display/adj/set range 12 to -12
Unit 0.25mm
Default value -4
T-8-15
8-16
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
8-17
■■BLANK FUNCTION
COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
■■CCD
BLANK-T Adjustment of leading edge margin
Details To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper. COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the DF-WLVL1 White level adjustment in copyboard reading: Color
center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423mm). Details Automatic white level adjustment for copyboard scanning by
Use case - When reducing the margin upon user's request scanning white paper used by user as usual.
- When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit / the CIS Unit / the ADF
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Unit.
Display/ad/set range 0 to 1000 Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2) Select the item and then press OK key.
Default value 59
Caution Execute DF-WLVL2 continuously.
BLANK-B Adjustment of trailing edge margin Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B
Details To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper. COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the DF-WLVL2 White level adjustment in ADF mode: Color
center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423mm). Details Automatic white level adjustment for ADF scanning by scanning
Use case - When reducing the margin upon user's request white paper used by user as usual.
- When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit / the CIS Unit / the ADF
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then Unit.
press OK key. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the ADF Unit.
Display/ad/set range Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Select the item and then press OK key.
Unit 0.4% (duty) Caution Execute after DF-WLVL1.
Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B
Default value 59
COPIER > FUNCTION> CCD > DF-WLVL1
T-8-16 DF-WLVL3 White level adjustment in copyboard reading: BW
Details Automatic white level adjustment for copyboard scanning by
scanning white paper used by user as usual.
Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit / the CIS Unit / the ADF
Unit.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution Execute DF-WLVL4 continuously.
Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
DF-WLVL4 White level adjustment in ADF mode: BW
Details Automatic white level adjustment for ADF scanning by scanning
white paper used by user as usual.
Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit / the CIS Unit / the ADF
Unit.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the ADF Unit.
Caution Execute after DF-WLVL3.
Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
8-17
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
8-18
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
CL-AGC Light intensity adjustment for CIS in copyboard reading: Color SYS-DMP Output of system dump list
Details Automatic adjustment in copyboard reading for gain adjustment
Details To execute report output of the system dump list.
value and LED light intensity.
The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received,
Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit / the CIS Unit. the number of sheets printed/read, the number of errors, etc. are
Adj/set/operate method Select the item and then press OK key. output.
Required time Approx. 5 seconds Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related service mode COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R CNTR Output of counter report
COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G Details To output the counter report.
COPIER >ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B Counter values that indicate usage of functions (reading, recording,
BW-AGC Light intensity adjustment for CIS in copyboard reading: BW communication and copy) are displayed.
Details Automatic adjustment in copyboard reading for gain adjustment Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
value and LED light intensity. ERR-LOG Output of error log report
Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit / the CIS Unit.
Details To output the error log report.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Required time Approx. 5 seconds
SPEC Output of the spec report
Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R Details To output the spec report.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G The current device specifications such as the location, model
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B information, and ROM version are output.
T-8-17
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
ERDS-LOG Output of the log information of E-RDS
Details To execute report output of the log relating to Embedded-RDS.
The date, time, code, and details (up to 130 characters) of each error
that occurred are output.
■■MISC-P Use case When using Embedded-RDS
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
SRVC-DAT Output of system data list/system dump list TNRB-PRT Output of the Bottle ID log report
Details To output the Bottle ID log report.
Details To execute report output of the system data list and the system dump
T-8-18
list.
System data list: The service software switches and parameters used
in FAX function
System dump list: The number of sends/receives, the number of
pages sent/received, the number of sheets printed/read, the number
of errors, etc.
SYS-DAT Output of system data list
Details To execute report output of the system data list.
The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function
are output.
8-18
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN
8-19
■■MISC-R ■■SPLMAN
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN
SCANLAMP Check LED light up of the CIS Unit SPL41971 Decrement of downward curl during heavy paper feeding
Details - Light up LED of the CIS Unit for 3 seconds. Details Decrease downward curl during heavy paper feeding.
- Light up in the following order: R->G->B->R->G-B Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Unit / the CIS Unit. Display/ad/set range 0 to 1
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then 0: OFF
press OK key. 1: ON
Required time 3 seconds Default value 0
SCAN-ON Copyboard reading operation SPL14159 Fixation of USB device ID
Details Operate the reading an original on the copyboard Details To fix the USB device ID to "000000000000".
Use case When replacing the CIS Unit. Driver for each machine is installed to a PC. However, by fixing the
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass. serial number, the PC considers that any connected machine to be
2) Select the item and then press OK key. the same machine; thus, there will be no need to install the drivers
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 many times.
Default value 0 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value, and then press OK key.
T-8-19
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
SPL65677 Switching of the leading edge margin (enlarge)
■■VIFFNC Details Switching of the leading edge margin (enlarge)
The leading edge margin is enlarged. When the leading edge
COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC margin is already set to small beforehand, the margin will be
STOR-DCN Backup NVRAM on the Engine Controller PCB standard.
Details Backup the setting data from the NVRAM on the Engine Controller Display/adj/set range 0 to 20
PCB Unit 0.1mm
Use case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB for troubleshoot. Default value 0
Adj/set/operate method Select the item and then press OK key. SPL68676 Switching of the leading edge margin (reduce)
Caution Operate it during standby when the Main Motor stops. Details Switching of the leading edge margin (reduce)
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > RSTR-DCN The leading edge margin is reduced. When the leading edge margin
is already set to large beforehand, the margin will be standard.
RSTR-DCN Restore to NVRAM on the Engine Controller PCB
Details Restore the backup setting data from the NVRAM on the Engine
Controller PCB. Unit 0.1mm
Use case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB for troubleshoot. SPL68677 Switching of the right and left edge margins (reduce)
Adj/set/operate method Select the item and then press OK key. Details Switching of the right and left edge margins (reduce)
The right and left margins of the printed paper are reduced. When
Caution - Operate it during standby when the Main Motor stops.
the right and left edge margins are already set to large beforehand,
- Wait 10 seconds from when "executing..." disappears to when the
the margins will be standard.
main power is turned OFF.
- Turn OFF/ON the main power after the above procedure. Display/adj/set range 0 to 20
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN Unit 0.1mm
T-8-20 Default value 0
8-19
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN
8-20
COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN
SPL25607 Switching of the right and left edge margins (reduce) SPL00171 Change of the maximum auto sleep shift time
Details Switching of the right and left edge margins (reduce) Details To change the maximum value of auto sleep shift time in Settings/
The right and left margins of the printed paper are reduced. When Registration> Timer Settings> Auto Sleep Time.
the right and left edge margins are already set to large beforehand, Use case When changing the setting time to shift to auto sleep mode
the margins will be standard. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 20 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Unit 0.1mm Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0 0: 0 to 60, 1: 0 to 240
SPL80925 Maximum value of the number of hosts retained at the time of Default value 0 (For Europe), 1 (For locations other than Europe)
pseudo Push Scan SPL80100 Mask setting at copyboard scanning
Details Maximum value of the number of hosts retained at the time of Details To cancel the image mask occurs on the left edge at copyboard
pseudo Push Scan scanning.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Use case Upon request from user who does not satisfy with the mask on the
Default value 0 left edge
SPL93822 Setting of department ID count all clear Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Details To set whether to disable clearing of all department ID counts. Display/adj/set range 0: Mask value according to the specifications of each job
Use case Used to prevent the value of the department ID counter from being 1: No mask (0 mm)
unintentionally cleared Default value 0
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. SPL27354 For R&D use
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system Details For R&D use
administrator at user's site. Default value Default value is not changed.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 SPL84194 ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Details To set ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS function.
Default value 0 Use case When using Embedded-RDS
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL78788 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value, and then press OK key.
SPL78788 Setting of department ID count clear 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Details To set whether to disable clearing of department ID count. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Use case Used to prevent the value of the department ID counter from being 0: OFF, 1: ON
unintentionally cleared Default value 0
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system RSLT, COM-LOG
administrator at user's site. Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
Default value 0 SPL32620 PC-less update
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL93822 Details Switching to enable/disable PC-less update
SPL71100 Setting of the duty of Off-hook PCB Display/adj/set range 0: Disable
Details To set the duty of Off hook PCB. 1: Enable (default)
This is the mode to make handsets of particular manufacturers to Default value 1
ring when fax reception mode is set to "Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)". T-8-21
Default value 50
8-20
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
8-21
■■INSTALL COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
ERDS ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
Details To set ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS function.
STRD-POS Adjustment of read position in ADF mode
Use case When using Embedded-RDS
Details Adjust the read position in ADF mode
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value, and then press OK key.
Use case When replacing or removing the ADF unit. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item and then press OK key. Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and
2) Write the changed value of COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG as a set.
STRD-POS on the service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the 0: OFF, 1: ON
service label. Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-
TONER-S Toner supply to Developing Assembly RSLT, COM-LOG
Details Execute all operations for supplying toner to the Developing Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
Assembly/Toner Supply area including preparing Developing device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
Cylinder, Toner Stirring/Feed Member, Photosensitive Drum and UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
output developing bias. After the executing, the operation stops RGW-PORT Setting of UGW port number when using E-RDS
automatically.
Details To display the USW port (which can be changed)
Use case - For installation
- When replacing the Developing Assembly.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range Operating: xxx sec (estimated time), Complete: END
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and
Required time Approx. 120 seconds COM-LOG as a set.
DRM-INIT For R&D Display/adj/set range 1 to 65535
CARD-NUM Card first number setting Default value 443
Details To set the card first number to be used for Copy Card Reader-F1. Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> ERDS, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT,
Use case At installation of the Card Reader-F1 COM-LOG
Adj/set/operate method Enter the value, and then press OK key. Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
Display/adj/set range 1 to 2701 device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
Default value 1 UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
CARD Setting of Card Reader management information COM-TEST Execution of Embedded-RDS communication test
Details To set the following management information at installation of the Details To execute Embedded-RDS communication test.
Card Reader-F1. If the connection fails, the information is added to the communication
- Register numbers of 300 cards from the number set in CARD-NUM error log.
to the department ID. Use case When using Embedded-RDS
- Initialize ID and password of the system administrator. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Use case - At installation of the Card Reader-F1 Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. COM-LOG as a set.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Default value 0
Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-RSLT,
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> CARD-NUM COM-LOG
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
8-21
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
8-22
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
COM-RSLT Embedded-RDS communication test result ERR Clearing error code
Details To display the Embedded-RDS communication test result. Details Clear error code (E000, E001, E002, E003)
Use case When using Embedded-RDS Use case When error occurs
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) Adj/set/operate method Select the item and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and SRVC-DAT Clearing service counter
COM-LOG as a set. Details To clear the service mode setting values.
Display/adj/set range When not in execution: Unknown, When connection is completed: The user mode setting values are not cleared.
OK, When connection is failed: NG The factory adjustment values of the Reader/ADF are not initialized.
Default value Unknown Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
COM-LOG COUNTER Clearing of parts counters
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the Details To clear the counter by maintenance/part/mode.
device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol The numerator printed on a system dump list becomes 0.
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
COM-LOG Display of E-RDS communication error log 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Details To display the Embedded-RDS communication error log. HIST Clear of logs
The dates, times, and error codes of the latest 5 errors that occurred Details To clear the communication management/print/jam/error log.
are displayed. Use case When clearing logs
As for the error detail information, the report can be output by
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
executing COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ERDS-LOG.
CARD Clearing Card Reader connection information
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Details To clear the information on connection of the Copy Card Reader-F1.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and The data related to the card ID (department) is cleared, and the ID
COM-LOG as a set. and password of the system administrator are initialized.
Display/adj/set range No.: 2 digits, Date: 8 digits, Time: 4 digits, Error code: 8 digits Adj/set/operate method When removing the Card Reader-F1
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, 1) Disable the department ID management.
COM-RSLT 2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ERDS-LOG 3) Execute E719-CLR.
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the 4) Turn OFF the main power switch.
device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol 5) Remove the Card Reader-F1.
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system 6) Turn ON the main power switch.
T-8-22 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> E719-CLR
E719-CLR Clearing E719 error
Details To clear E719 error (communication error with the Card Reader).
■■CLEAR Use case When removing the Card Reader-F1
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
R-CON Initializing the setting value for reader /ADF Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CARD
Details Initialize the setting value for reader /ADF
Use case • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
• When E248-0001 occurs.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power.
8-22
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
8-23
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR ■■SYSTEM
ALL Clearing setting information
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
Details - User mode setting values
- Service mode setting values (excluding the Service counter) DOWNLOAD Switching to the mode for downloading from USB flash drive
- ID and password of the system administrator Details Switching to the mode for downloading from USB flash drive
- Communication management/print/jam/error log Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
- E719 error Default value 0
PANEL-UP Download from USB memory (PANEL)
the following items are not cleared/initialized.
Details To perform downloading when PANEL exists in the root directory of
- Service counter
the USB memory.
- Factory adjustment values of the Reader/ADF
Use case At upgrade
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB.
Adj/set/operate 1) Install the USB memory.
method 2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> BODY> SIZE-LC
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
ERDS-DAT Initialization of Embedded-RDS setting value
LOGWRITE Writing sublog to USB memory
Details To initialize the Embedded-RDS setting values.
Details To write sublog that includes the following information to the USB
ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS, UGW (remote monitoring service
memory.
system) port number, and communication error log set in service
- Job list (job names, user names, and destinations)
mode are initialized.
- Communications log (destinations and user names)
Use case When upgrading the Bootable in the Embedded-RDS environment
- Job log (user names and job names)
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Caution The method of using the SRAM in Embedded-RDS differs
depending on the Bootable version. Therefore, unless initialization is 2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
executed at the time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs. method
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
IMPORT Reading of service mode setting value from USB memory
device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
Details To write the service mode setting values (excluding those related to
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
Reader/ADF) to the USB memory.
T-8-23
■■
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB as a measure against
failures
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
EXPORT Writing service mode setting value to USB memory
Details To write the service mode setting values (excluding those related to
Reader/ADF) to the USB memory.
Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB as a measure against
failures
Caution "Executing..." disappears when writing is completed.
T-8-24
8-23
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > BODY
8-24
OPTION COPIER > OPTION > BODY
JM-ERR-R Display "0071" jam as error
■■BODY Details Display "0071" jam as E996-0071. Displaying log as error to acquire
log when "0071" jam occurs at a specific user. Log acquisition is
COPIER > OPTION > BODY available when "E996-0071" occurs.
DFDST-L1 Adjustment of dust detect level: paper interval, ADF Use case Acquiring log when "0071" jam occurs.
Details Adjustment of the black line correction level with the dust detection Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
correction control at paper interval in ADF reading. Increase the Display/adj/set range 0: Display as jam
value when the black line occurs. The more the value is increased, 1: Display as error
the more the black line disappears. Default value 0
Use case - When the black line occurs due to dust. SIZE-LC Setting of paper size configuration
- User request Details To set the paper size configuration.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. At installation in areas other than Japan, perform the following
Caution Excessive increment of the value displays frequent cleaning procedure to match the setting information with that of the location.
instruction as extra small dust which is not shown on the image is Use case - At installation
even detected. Excessive decrement of the value may cause the - Upon user's request
black line on the image. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the location under LOCALE.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 2) Enter the setting value under SIZE-LC, and then press OK key.
Default value 210 3) Execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL.
Supplement/memo Black line occurs on the image by dust. The dust detection 4) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
correction control corrects the image to prevent black line when dust Caution Since COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL is executed when
is detected. changing the location, the setting information of user mode, service
DFDST-L2 Adjustment of dust detect level: after job, ADF mode, etc. is initialized.
Details Dust detection with the dust detection correction control after job The setting information of this item is not initialized.
completion in ADF reading. Decrease the value when frequent Display/adj/set range 1 to 4
cleaning instruction displays. Increase the value when the black line 1: AB configuration, 2: Inch configuration, 3: A configuration, 4: AB/
occurs, the more value is increased, the more small dust is detected. Inch configuration
Use case - When the black line occurs due to dust. Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL
- User request COPIER> OPTION> BODY> LOCALE
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. MIBCOUNT Setting of MIB collection charge counter
Caution Excessive increment of the value displays frequent cleaning Details To set the range of charge counter information that can obtain MIB
instruction as extra small dust which is not shown on the image is (Management Information Base).
even detected. Excessive decrement of the value may cause the Use case When preventing the Charge Counter MIB from being used by a
black line on the image. third party
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Default value 210 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Supplement/memo Black line occurs on the image by dust. The dust detection Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
correction control corrects the image to prevent black line when dust 0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only the displayed counter*
is detected. is obtained, 2: All charge counters are not obtained
* : Counter specified by the following: COPIER > OPTION > USER
> COUNTER 1 to 6
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 to 6
8-24
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > BODY
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > BODY
8-25
COPIER > OPTION > BODY COPIER > OPTION > BODY
NS-CMD5 Setting of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at SMTP NS-LGN Setting of LOGIN authentication at SMTP authentication
authentication Details To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP
Details To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of authentication.
SMTP authentication. When 1 is set, LOGIN authentication is not used.
When 1 is set, CRAM-MD5 authentication method is not used. Use case Upon user's request
Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Used (SMTP server-dependent), 1: Not used
0: Used (SMTP server-dependent), 1: Not used Default value 0
Default value 0 Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication
Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used
function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this
for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the
protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail
password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.
transmission only when it's authenticated. SLPMODE Setting of shift to sleep mode
NS-PLN Setting of plaintext authentication at SMTP authentication Details To restrict shift to sleep mode 1/sleep mode 3.
Details To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext When 1 is set, the machine does not shift to sleep mode.
authentication, at the time of SMTP authentication under the Use case When sleep failure occurs
environment where the communication packet is not encrypted. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
When 1 is set, plaintext authentication is not used. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case Upon user's request Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: Shift is available., 1: Shift is not available.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Default value 0
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 SDTM-DSP Setting of automatic shutdown menu display
0: Used (SMTP server-dependent), 1: Not used
Details When setting COPIER> OPTION> BODY> SDTM-DSP to 1, menu
Default value 0 is displayed. When 0 is set, menu is hidden.
Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication Use case When setting the automatic shutdown menu display
function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this
protocol executes authentication of the user account and the
password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail
0: Menu is hidden., 1: Menu is displayed.
transmission only when it's authenticated.
Default value 0
Supplement/memo Even with the fax model for locations other than Europe, the service
mode is displayed. However, the menu will not be displayed on UI
even 1 is set.
8-25
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > BODY
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
8-26
COPIER > OPTION > BODY COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
RMT-SW ON/OFF setting of RUI service mode function D-DLV-BK Set drum low alarm notice timing
Details To set ON/OFF of RUI service mode function. Details Set timing of the drum low alarm. When COPIER > COUNTER > LF
Use case When setting ON/OFF of RUI service mode function > K-DRM-LF reaches to the setting value (%), the alarm (35-0073)
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. is notified to the UGW.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Use case When changing the timing to notify the end of life.
0: OFF, 1: ON Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
Default value 1 Display/adj/set range 50 to 200
PSWD-SW Setting of service mode password level Unit %
Details To set the password level required to get into service mode. Default value 100
Use case When getting into service mode Related service mode COPIER > COUNTER > LF > K-DRM-LF
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. DLVFN-SW Set the delivery cooling fan operation
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Details Deodorize exhaust air to stop the delivery cooling fan operation
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 Use case When smell of exhaust air is consideration.
0: Password is not required (RUI service mode password only) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
1: Password for service engineer is required Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
2: Passwords for service engineer and system administrator at 0: Operate the fan following the specifications.
user's site are required 1: Stop operation of the fan.
SM-PSWD Password for service engineer LCDSFLG Setting of local CDS server usage
Details To set the password required to enter when the level is set to 1 or 2 Details To set whether to use the local CDS server.
in PSWD-SW at the time of getting into service mode.
Use case When using the local CDS server
Use case When the level is set to 1 or 2 in PSWD-SW at the time of getting
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
into service mode.
0: Not used, 1: Used
Default value 0
Display/adj/set range 1 to 99,999,999
Supplement/memo iW EMC device firmware update plug-in is required to use local
Default value 11111111
CDS.
T-8-25
T-END-BK For R&D
T-8-26
■■FNC-SW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
T-DLV-BK Set toner low alarm notice timing
Details Set timing of the toner low alarm. When the toner level in the Toner
Container reaches to the setting value (%), the alarm is notified.
Use case When changing the timing to notify the end of life.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
Caution Count error may occur as remaining toner is calculate by toner
supply count.
Unit %
Default value EUR: 0, Others: 26
8-26
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
8-27
■■CUSTOM ■■DSPLY-SW
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW
TEMP-TBL Fixing temperature setting at plain, 1/1 speed DRM-WARN Display / Hide a drum unit replacement message
Details Offset the fixing temperature at plain, 1/1 speed. The temperature is Details Set display or hide a drum unit replacement message in LUI,
increased 1 to 2 deg C by setting value 1. Increase the value when either when the day elapsed 7 days after the full of the waste toner
fixing error occurs, decrease the value when the offset occurs. warning 1, or the point in time when the waste toner reaches to full.
Use case - When fixing error occurs at plain, 1/1 speed. Use case When a user needs to know a drum unit replacement timing.
- When adjusting the print temperature by slip or paper curl Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
prevention. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then 0: Hide, 1: Display
press OK key. Default value 0
Display/adj/set range -9 to 9 Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > D-DLV-BK
Default value 0 DF-DSP ON/OFF of ADF Roll counter initial scrn
FLK-RD Flicker reduction mode Details To set whether to display the ADF Roller on the counter initialization
Details Change the fixing temperature control to cancel fluorescent flicking screen in Settings/Registration menu.
during printing Use case When the user does not replace the parts
Use case When the fluorescent flicking occurs during printing. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Display/adj/set range 0: OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON
1: ON Default value 1
Default value 0 Related user mode Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Initialize After
T-8-27 Replacing Parts > ADF Pickup Roller and ADF Separation Pad
T-8-28
■■CLEANING
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
FX-CN-SW Set the fixing eject setting
Details Reduce the motor drive volume by stopping the fixing eject
sequence operation.
Use case Set ON when receiving a complaint about the motor drive noise
during the fixing eject sequence operation.
Display/adj/set range 0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
T-8-29
8-27
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
8-28
■■IMG-FIX COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
EDG-WAIT Edge temperature rise standby setting
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
Details - Control edge temperature rise when printing small size paper.
TMP-TBL2 Fixing temperature setting (heavy paper 1, 1/2speed) - Decrease down sequence shift temperature of the through-put.
Details Set fixing temperature for heavy paper 1, heavy paper 2 and Use case - Decrease through-put control
label. The temperature is increased / decreased 1 to 2 deg C by - Control edge temperature rise
setting value 1. Increase the setting value when fixing error occurs, - Prevent high temperature offset
decrease the value when offset occurs. Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
Use case - When poor fixing occurs on the fixing mode for heavy paper 1,
heavy paper 2 and label. Caution Setting value "1" improves the edge temperature rise while through-
- When adjusting the print temperature by slip or paper curl put is decreased.
prevention. Display/ad/set range 0 to 1
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then 0: OFF 1: ON
press OK key. Default value 0
Display/ad/set range -9 to 9 FIX-SMR Decrement of fixing explosion setting
Default value 0 Details Set density thin to decrease the fixing explosion. 2 steps are shifted
TMP-TBL4 Adjustment of pickup timing from the default value to low density when the value is turned ON.
Details Change temperature to pickup Use case - Set as standby mode when the fixing explosion is occurred by
Use case - When poor fixing occurs on default fixing mode. paper condition.
- When adjusting the print temperature by slip or paper curl - Decrease quantity of stuck toner.
prevention. Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
press OK key. Display/ad/set range 0 to 1
Display/ad/set range -9 to 9 0: OFF, 1: ON
TMP-TBL6 Fixing temperature setting (envelope) TMP-TBLC The fixing surface temperature setting on Special Mode N
Details Set fixing temperature for envelopes. The temperature is increased Details Increase/decrease the setting value set by target temperature at
/ decreased 1 to 2 deg C by setting value 1. Increase the setting sheet-to-sheet distance, sheet feed permission temperature during
value when fixing error occurs, decrease the value when hot offset the printing in Special Mode N. The fixing temperature is increased/
occurs. decreased 1 deg C by setting value 1.
Use case - When hot offset occurs for envelope Use case Control the fixing temperature when the fixing error or offset occurs
- When fixing error occurs by paper condition.
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
press OK key. press OK key.
Display/ad/set range -9 to 9 Display/ad/set range -9 to 9
Supplement/memo It is available only when Special Mode N is set.
TMPTBLC2 Paper curl correction mode: 2nd
Details Increase/decrease the setting value set by target temperature
at sheet-to-sheet distance. The fixing temperature is increased/
decreased 5 deg C by setting value 1.
Use case When stacking failure occurs due to paper curl
Default value 2
Supplement/memo It is not available when the flicker reduction mode is set.
8-28
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR
8-29
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX ■■IMG-TR
TMP-TB14 Fixing temperature setting (plain, thin paper, OHP, 1/2speed)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR
Details - Offset fixing temperature for plain, thin paper and OHP at
1/2speed. TR-BS-SW Transfer bias setting at highland environment
'- The temperature is increased / decreased 1 to 2 deg C by Details Control the transfer bias for printing to prevent it from exceeding
setting value 1. Increase the setting value when fixing error occurs, specific level.
decrease the value when offset occurs. Use case When the black spot occurs on the image by leak at
Use case - When poor fixing occurs on the fixing mode for plain, thin paper, low pressure area such as high latitude, also, the environment is
OHP, 1/2speed. under -5 deg C.
- When adjusting the print temperature by slip or paper curl Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
prevention. Caution When installation site is changed from highland to lowland, set OFF
Ad/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then Display/adj/set range 0: OFF
press OK key. 1: ON
Display/ad/set range -9 to 9 Default value 0
Default value 0 SP-BS-SW Separation bias setting
T-8-30 Details improve the separation performance by changing separation bias.
Use case When feeding specific paper such as thin paper.
Caution Set OFF for feeding plain
■■IMG-LSR 1: HIGH DOWN
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR 2: DOWN
3: Default
SC-PR-SW Scanner last rotation shortening time mode
4: UP
Details Stop the polygon motor immediately after the last rotation to reduce Default value 3
noise from the polygon motor. FX-SP-H Paper trailing edge tension setting
Use case When receiving a complaint about the scanner motor drive noise
Details Change the fixing motor speed while controlling loop to prevent
after a job is finished. bounce of rear end of OHP.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. Use case When bounce of rear end of OHP occurs.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
0: OFF, 1: ON Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0 0: OFF 1: ON
T-8-31 Default value 0
HUM-SW Transfer current output control setting
Details Control transfer current output by setting environment when the
environment sensor is damaged.
Use case When the environment sensor is damaged.
0: OFF
1: N/L (23 deg C, Humidity: 5%)
2: N/N (23 deg C, Humidity: 50%)
3: H/H (30 deg C, Humidity: 80%)
Default value 0
8-29
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER
8-30
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR ■■USER
FX-BSSW1 Adjustment of fixing bias
COPIER > OPTION > USER
Details Control positive fixing bias by the setting environment when
electrostatic offsetting occurs. DRMRP-SW Display of drum unit replacement setting
Use case When electrostatic offsetting is occurred by paper condition. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key. 0: Display "End"
1: Display "End" and the replacement require
0: OFF Default value 0
1: 200V COUNTER1 Display of counter 1 type
2: 400V Details To display counter type for counter 1 on the Counter Check
3: 600V Use case Upon user/dealer's request
4: 700V Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Default value 3 Caution No change is available.
FX-BSSW2 Adjustment of fixing bias Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
Details Control negative fixing bias by the setting environment when Default value The value differs according to the location.
electrostatic offsetting occurs.
COUNTER2 Display of counter 2 type
Use case When electrostatic offsetting is occurred by paper condition.
Details To display counter type for counter 2 on the Counter Check screen.
Use case Upon user/dealer's request
0: OFF
1: -300V
2: -480 to -500V Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
0: No registration
3: -600V
4: -700V Default value The value differs according to the location.
Default value 2 COUNTER3 Display of counter 3 type
T-8-32 Details To display counter type for counter 3 on the Counter Check
Use case screen.
0: No registration
Default value The value differs according to the location.
COUNTER4 Display of counter 4 type
Details To display counter type for counter 4 on the Counter Check screen.
Use case Upon user/dealer's request
0: No registration
Default value 0
8-30
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER
8-31
COPIER > OPTION > USER COPIER > OPTION > USER
COUNTER5 Display of counter 5 type CTCHKDSP ON/OFF of charge counter print
Details To display counter type for counter 5 on the Counter Check screen. Details To set whether to print the charge counter on the Counter Check
Use case Upon user/dealer's request screen in the System Manager Data List.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When 1 is set, the charge counter is printed.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use case Upon user's request
Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: No registration Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0 0: OFF, 1: ON
COUNTER6 Display of counter 6 type Default value 1
Details To display counter type for counter 6 on the Counter Check screen. TNRB-SW ON/OFF of toner replacement counter display
Use case Upon user/dealer's request Details To set whether to display the toner replacement counter on the
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Counter Check screen.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When 1 is set, the user can check the toner replacement counter
Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 Use case Upon user's request
0: No registration Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Default value 0 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
CNT-SW Setting of charge counter display method Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Details To set display method of the charge counter on the Counter Check
screen. Default value 0
Set 1 to 3 to select a new method. SCALL-SW ON/OFF of Service Call button display
Use case Upon user's request Details To set whether to display or hide the Service Call button on the
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Touch Panel.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When 1 is set, the button is displayed.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 Use case When the sales company supports service initiated by the Service
0: Conventional method (type 1), 1: New method (type 2), 2: New Call button
method (type 3), 3: New method (type 4) Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
CONTROL Setting of PDL job charge method by CC-VI 0: OFF, 1: ON
Details To set charge method for PDL job by the control card interface "CC- Default value 0
VI" SCALLCMP Setting of Service Call complete notice
When outputting at insertion of the control card, set 1 (not counted)/2 Details To set whether to notify the completion of Service Call.
(counted) With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent
Use case Upon user's request to UGW to clear the Service Call status that is retained internally.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case When service technician uses this mode after completing repair
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: Output is available without control card. Not counted. Caution After executing "1: Notified", the setting value becomes 0
1: Output is available at insertion of the card. Not counted. immediately.
2: Output is available at insertion of the card. Counted. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0 0: Not notified, 1: Notified
Default value 0
8-31
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
8-32
COPIER > OPTION > USER ■■ENV-SET
PS-MODE Compatible mode setting at PS usage
COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
Details To set for compatibility with existing machine regarding image
process or print specification with PS print. IMG-BLD1 Extend initial rotation mode
Setting of a value other than the setting values means that multiple Details Extend initial rotation to prevent condensation caused by sharp
settings are combined. (Example: 44=4+8+32) temperature rise.
Use case At replacement Use case When condensation occurs.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3
Display/adj/set range 0 to 63 0: OFF
1: Not used 1: Extend initial rotation in 30 sec
2: Not used 2: Extend initial rotation in 60 sec
4: Compatible with EFI at PS 2-sided delivery 3: Extend initial rotation in 180 sec
8: StrokeAdjust default value is changed Default value 0
16: DeferredMediaSelection default value is changed IMG-BLD2 Adjustment of charge frequency mode
32: SmallText horizontal line printing accuracy is changed
Details Adjust charge frequency to prevent moire on a specific image
Default value 0 pattern and high charge frequency by accelerating of the print
SMD-EXPT Setting of export target data: remote UI speed.
Details To set whether to display "service mode data" as the target data of Use case - When moire occurs.
export on remote UI. - When improving high charge frequency.
When 1 is set, the same service mode data can be registered in the Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
case of installing more than a machine at the same time. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
Use case When installing more than a machine at the same time 1/1 speed 1/2 speed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Start key. 0: 1680Hz 840Hz
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1: 1264Hz 840Hz
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 2: 1680Hz 985Hz
0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0
Default value 0 IMG-BLD3 Black band mode
ACC-SLP Switching of the restriction to shift to sleep mode 3 when the card is Details Operate black band sequence by setting number of paper.
connected Use case When image smear occurs.
Details Switching of the restriction to shift to sleep mode 3 when the card is Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key.
connected
Caution Toner consumption increment causes dirt on the transfer roller.
0: The machine does not shift to sleep mode 3.
0: no black band
1: The machine shifts to sleep mode 3.
1: 75 sheets
Default value 1
2: 50 sheets
T-8-33 3: 25 sheets
Default value 0
T-8-34
8-32
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
8-33
■■ACC ■■LCNS-TR
COPIER > OPTION > ACC COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
CARD-SW Setting of the screen display when the Coin Manager is connected ST-BRDIM Disabling of license transfer of BarDIMM function
Details Setting of the screen display when the Coin Manager is connected Details To disable license transfer of barcode reading (BarDIMM) function.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from 1 to
0: "Insert the card." 0. The license key of this machine is disabled, but the transfer license
1: "Use external device for authentication." key for transferring the license to another device is displayed under
2: "Use the external device for payment." TR-BRDIM.
Once 0 is set, the function is not turned ON even if returning the
Default value 0 setting value to 1. The license key needs to be reissued from LMS to
CC-SPSW Setting of Control Interface Kit use the function again.
Details To set whether to support the Control Interface Kit. Use case - When transferring the license to another device
- When checking the installation status
Use case At installation of Coin Manager
Adj/set/operate 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. method
method
Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to
Caution Parallel use with Card Reader-F1 is not available.
0 and turning OFF/ON the power.
0: Not supported, 1: Supported 0: OFF, 1: ON
UNIF-OF Setting of uniFLOW function
Supplement/memo LMS (License Management Server): Server which issues licenses
Details To forcibly deactivate the uniFLOW function.
TR-BRDIM Transfer license key display of BarDIMM function
If setting this switch to 1 and turning OFF and then ON the device
Details To display the transfer license key issued when disabling the transfer
power while the uniFLOW function is in active state, the uniFLOW
of BarDIMM function.
function is forcibly deactivated.
The transfer license key is used to transfer the license from this
In addition, when this switch is set to 1, Activate/Deactivate request
machine to another device to use the function in the device.
from the server is ignored.
Use case - When replacing the device
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Adj/set/operate 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
0: Disable method 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
1: Enable The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Default value 0 Display/adj/set range 24 digits
T-8-35
Default value 0
8-33
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
8-34
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
ST-PCL Disabling of license transfer of PCL function ST-PS Disabling of license transfer of PS function
Details To disable license transfer of PCL function. Details To disable license transfer of PS function.
The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from 1 to The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from 1 to
0. The license key of this machine is disabled, but the transfer license 0. The license key of this machine is disabled, but the transfer license
key for transferring the license to another device is displayed under key for transferring the license to another device is displayed under
TR-BRDIM. TR-PS.
Once 0 is set, the function is not turned ON even if returning the Once 0 is set, the function is not turned ON even if returning the
setting value to 1. The license key needs to be reissued from LMS to setting value to 1. License key needs to be reissued from LMS to use
use the function again. the function again.
Use case - When transferring the license to another device Use case - When transferring the license to another device
- When checking the installation status - When checking the installation status
Adj/set/operate 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to
0 and turning OFF/ON the power. 0 and turning OFF/ON the power.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON
Supplement/memo LMS (License Management Server): Server which issues license Supplement/memo LMS (License Management Server): Server which issues licenses
TR-PCL Transfer license key display of PCL function TR-PS Transfer license key display of PS function
Details To display the transfer license key issued when disabling the transfer Details To display the transfer license key issued when disabling the transfer
of PCL function. of PS function.
The transfer license key is used to transfer the license from this The transfer license key is used to transfer the license from this
machine to another device to use the function in the device. machine to another device to use the function in the device.
Use case - When replacing the device Use case - When replacing the device
Adj/set/operate 1) Select ST-PCL. Adj/set/operate 1) Select ST-PS.
method 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. method 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
Display/adj/set range 24 digits Display/adj/set range 24 digits
8-34
8
8-35
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
ST-MPPDF Disabling of license transfer of Media Print PDF function ST-ENPDF Disabling of license transfer of Encryption PDF send function
Details To disable license transfer of Media Print PDF function. Details To disable license transfer of Encryption PDF send function.
The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from 1 to The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from 1 to
0. The license key of this machine is disabled, but the transfer license 0. The license key of this machine is disabled, but the transfer license
key for transferring the license to another device is displayed under key for transferring the license to another device is displayed under
TR-MPPDF. TR-ENPDF.
Once 0 is set, the function is not turned ON even if returning the Once 0 is set, the function is not turned ON even if returning the
setting value to 1. License key needs to be reissued from LMS to use setting value to 1. License key needs to be reissued from LMS to use
the function again. the function again.
Use case - When transferring the license to another device Use case - When transferring the license to another device
method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON
Supplement/memo LMS (License Management Server): Server which issues licenses Supplement/memo LMS (License Management Server): Server which issues licenses
TR-MPPDF Transfer license key display of Media Print PDF function TR-ENPDF Transfer license key display of Encryption PDF send function
Details To display the transfer license key issued when disabling the transfer Details To display the transfer license key issued when disabling the transfer
of Media Print PDF function. of Encryption PDF send function.
The transfer license key is used to transfer the license from this The transfer license key is used to transfer the license from this
machine to another device to use the function in the device. machine to another device to use the function in the device.
Use case - When replacing the device Use case - When replacing the device
Adj/set/operate 1) Select ST-MPPDF. Adj/set/operate 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
method 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. method 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-MPPDF. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Display/adj/set range 24 digits Display/adj/set range 24 digits
8-35
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-OF
8-36
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ■■LCNS-OF
ST-DVPDF Disabling of license transfer of device signature PDF send
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-OF
Details To disable license transfer of Edevice signature PDF send function.
The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from 1 to ST-BRDIM Disabling of license no-transfer of BarDIMM function
0. The license key of this machine is disabled, but the transfer license Details To disable license no-transfer of barcode reading (BarDIMM) function.
key for transferring the license to another device is displayed under The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from
TR-DVPDF. 1 to 0, but the transfer license key is not issued. (The license is not
Once 0 is set, the function is not turned ON even if returning the transferred to other devices.) When 1 is set, the function is turned ON
setting value to 1. License key needs to be reissued from LMS to use since the license key in use is enabled.
the function again. Use case - When the function is turned OFF
Use case - When transferring the license to another device - When checking the installation status
- When checking the installation status Adj/set/operate 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0 and turning OFF/ON the power.
0: OFF, 1: ON The function is not turned ON even if changing the setting from 0 to 1.
Default value 0 (Reregistration of the license key is required.)
Supplement/memo LMS (License Management Server): Server which issues licenses Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
TR-DVPDF Transfer license key display of device signature PDF send function 0: OFF, 1: ON
Details To display the transfer license key issued when disabling the transfer Default value 0
of device signature PDF send function. ST-PCL Disabling of license no-transfer of PCL function
The transfer license key is used to transfer the license from this Details To disable license no-transfer of PCL function.
machine to another device to use the function in the device. The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from
Use case - When replacing the device 1 to 0, but the transfer license key is not issued. (The license is not
Adj/set/operate 1) Select ST-DVPDF. transferred to other devices.) When 1 is set, the function is turned ON
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. since the license key in use is enabled.
method
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF. Use case - When the function is turned OFF
Display/adj/set range 24 digits - When checking the installation status
Default value 0 Adj/set/operate 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
ST-U-RDS Not use
TR-U-RDS Not use Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to
0 and turning OFF/ON the power.
T-8-36
The function is not turned ON even if changing the setting from 0 to 1.
(Reregistration of the license key is required.)
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
8-36
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-OF
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-OF
8-37
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-OF COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-OF
ST-PS Disabling of license no-transfer of PS function ST-ENPDF Disabling of license no-transfer of Encryption PDF send function
Details To disable license no-transfer of PS function. Details To disable license no-transfer of Encryption PDF send function.
The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from
1 to 0, but the transfer license key is not issued. (The license is not 1 to 0, but the transfer license key is not issued. (The license is not
transferred to other devices.) When 1 is set, the function is turned ON transferred to other devices.) When 1 is set, the function is turned ON
since the license key in use is enabled. since the license key in use is enabled.
Use case - When the function is turned OFF Use case - When the function is turned OFF
method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
method
The function is not turned ON even if changing the setting from 0 to 1. The function is not turned ON even if changing the setting from 0 to 1.
(Reregistration of the license key is required.) (Reregistration of the license key is required.)
0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON
ST-MPPDF Disabling of license no-transfer of Media Print PDF function ST-DVPDF Disabling of license no-transfer of device signature PDF send
Details To disable license no-transfer of Media Print PDF function. function
The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from Details To disable license no-transfer of device signature PDF send function.
1 to 0, but the transfer license key is not issued. (The license is not The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from
transferred to other devices.) When 1 is set, the function is turned ON 1 to 0, but the transfer license key is not issued. (The license is not
since the license key in use is enabled. transferred to other devices.) When 1 is set, the function is turned ON
Use case - When the function is turned OFF since the license key in use is enabled.
- When checking the installation status Use case - When the function is turned OFF
Adj/set/operate 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. - When checking the installation status
method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Adj/set/operate 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to method 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
0 and turning OFF/ON the power. Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to
The function is not turned ON even if changing the setting from 0 to 1. 0 and turning OFF/ON the power.
(Reregistration of the license key is required.) The function is not turned ON even if changing the setting from 0 to 1.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 (Reregistration of the license key is required.)
0: OFF, 1: ON Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0 0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
ST-U-RDS Not use
Details Not use
T-8-37
8-37
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-OF
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
8-38
COUNTER COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
FX-UNIT Fixing unit parts counter
■■DRBL-1 Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts.
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0.
PT-DRM Bk photosensitive drum parts counter
Caution Clear the counter value after the replacement.
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts. Default value 0
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 TR-ROLL Transfer roller parts counter
Default value 0 Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
C1-PU-RL Cassette 1 pickup roller parts counter Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts.
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0.
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts. Caution Clear the counter value after the replacement.
Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0
Default value 0 SP-SC-EL Static eliminator parts counter
C1-SP-RL Cassette 1 separation Roller parts counter Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts.
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts. Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0.
Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0. Caution Clear the counter value after the replacement.
C1-FD-RL Cassette 1 feed roller parts counter DV-UNT-K Developing Assembly (Bk) parts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts. Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts.
Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0. Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Caution Clear the counter value after the replacement.
M-PU-RL MP pickup roller parts counter Default value 0
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement REG-RL Registration roller parts counter
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts. Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0. Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0.
Default value 0 Caution Clear the counter value after the replacement.
Default value 0
8-38
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
8-39
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 ■■DRBL-2
M-SP-PD MP separation pad parts counter
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
C2-PU-RL Cassette 2 Pickup Roller parts counter
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts.
Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0. Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Caution Clear the counter value after the replacement. Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts.
V-FD-RL Vertical path roller parts counter Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement Default value 0
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts. C2-SP-RL Cassette 2 Separation Roller parts counter
Adj/set/operate method When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0. Details When clearing the parts counter: Select the item and then enter 0.
Caution Clear the counter value after the replacement. Use case Clear the counter value after the replacement.
DP-FD-RL Duplex roller parts counter Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts. C2-FD-RL Cassette 2 Feed Roller parts counter
EXIT-RL Delivery roller parts counter Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts / replacing the parts. C2-VP-RL Cassette 2 vertical path roller parts counter
T-8-38 Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Default value 0
DF-SP-PD ADF Separation Pad parts counter:
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts.
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear
key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Default value 0
8-39
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
8-40
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
DF-PU-RL ADF Pickup Roller parts counter TTL Total counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement Details To display the total of counters of copy, PDL print, FAX, report print
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts and media print.
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear (Total of COPY, PDL-PRT, FAX-PRT, RPT-PRT and MD-PRT in
key. service mode described below)
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 Unit Number of sheets
T-8-39 COPY Total copy counter
Details To count up when the copy is delivered outside the machine.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode.
Unit 0 to 99,999,999
■■LF Unit Number of sheets
Required time 0
COPIER > COUNTER > LF Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL
K-DRM-LF Display life of the Drum Unit PDL-PRT Total copy counter
Details Life of the drum unit is displayed by percent indication. Details To count up when the PDL print is delivered outside the machine/2-
Use case When checking life of the Drum Unit. sided printout is stacked.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > FNC-SW > D-DLV-BK
mode.
T-8-40
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL
■■TOTAL FAX-PRT FAX reception print counter
Details To count up when the FAX reception print is delivered outside the
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL machine/2-sided printout is stacked.
SERVICE1 Service-purposed total counter 1 The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service
Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine.
mode.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 Unit Number of sheets
Unit Number of sheets Default value 0
Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL
SERVICE2 Service-purposed total counter 2
Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode.
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
8-40
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP
8-41
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL ■■PICK-UP
RPT-PRT Report print counter
COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP
Details To count up when the report print is delivered outside the machine/2-
sided printout is stacked. C1 Cassette 1 pickup total counter
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. Details To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Cassette 1
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service (standard Pickup Cassette).
mode. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Unit Number of sheets Use case When checking the Pickup counter
Default value 0 Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999
Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL Unit Number of sheets
MD-PRT Media print counter Default value 0
Details To count up when the media print is delivered outside the machine. C2 Cassette 2 pickup total counter
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. Details To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Cassette 2
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service (option Pickup Cassette).
mode. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Unit Number of sheets Use case When checking the Pickup counter
Default value 0 Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999
Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL Unit Number of sheets
2-SIDE 2-sided copy/print counter Default value 0
Details To count up the number of 2-sided copies/prints when the copy/ MF Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter
printout is delivered outside the machine/2-sided copy/printout is Details To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Multi-purpose
stacked. Tray Pickup Unit.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
mode. Use case When checking the Pickup counter
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999
Unit Number of sheets Unit Number of sheets
SCAN Scan counter 2-SIDE 2-sided pickup total counter
Details To count up the number of scan operations when the scanning Details To count up the number of sheets picked up in duplex mode.
operation is complete. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode. Use case When checking the Pickup counter
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999
Unit Number of sheets Unit Number of sheets
T-8-41 T-8-42
8-41
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP
8 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > R-CON
8-42
■■FEEDER COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
C1 Cassette 1 pickup jam counter
COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 1
FEED ADF original pickup total counter (standard Pickup Cassette).
Details To count up the number of originals picked up from the ADF. The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999
Use case When checking the total counter of original pickup by ADF Unit Number of times
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 Default value 0
Unit Number of sheets C2 Cassette 2 pickup jam counter
Default value 0 Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 2 (option
T-8-43 Pickup Cassette).
The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint.
Unit Number of times
Default value 0
■■JAM T-8-44
COPIER > COUNTER > JAM

TOTAL Printer total jam counter
Details To count up the number of total jam occurrences.
Use case When checking the total jam counter of printer
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 I/O
Default value 0 ■■R-CON
FEEDER ADF total jam counter
Details When checking the total jam counter of ADF COPIER > IO > R-CON
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks
Unit Number of times None 0 Document End Sensor SR01 0: paper presence
Default value 0 1 Document Sensor SR02 0: paper presence
2-SIDE Duplex Unit jam counter
CIS Unit HP Sensor SR03
2 1: left edge position of the CIS unit
Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Duplex Unit.
3 None
Use case When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99,999,999 4 None
Unit Number of times 5 None
Default value 0 6 None
MF Multi-purpose Pickup Tray jam counter
7 None
Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Multi-purpose Tray
T-8-45
Pickup Unit.
The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint.
Use case When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray
Default value 0
8-42
8
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > R-CON
8 Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST-R
8-43
FEEDER ■■DOCST2
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
ADJUST DOCST2 Adjustment of ADF leading edge margin: back side
Details - Adjust leading edge margin at ADF reading when the output image
■■DOCST is out of standard after ADF installation.
- Leading edge margin is decreased 0.1mm by setting value 1 (The
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST image moves upward).
DOCST Adjustment of ADF leading edge margin: 1-sided - When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value from the
service label.
Use case - When installing the ADF.
is out of standard after ADF installation. - When replacing the Main Controller PCB.
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
image moves upward).
method press OK key.
Use case - When installing the ADF. service label.
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB. Display/adj/set range -50 to 50
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then Unit 0.1 mm
method press OK key. Default value 0
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the T-8-48
service label.
Display/adj/set range -50 to 50
Unit 0.1 mm ■■DOCST-R
Default value 0 FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST-R
T-8-46
DOCST-R Adjustment of ADF trailing edge margin
Details - Adjust trailing edge margin at ADF scanning when the output image
■■LA-SPD is out of standard after ADF installation.
- Trailing edge margin is decreased 0.1mm by setting value 1 (The
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD image moves upward).
LA-SPD Fine adjustment of vertical scanning magnification at ADF stream - When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value from the
reading: front side service label.
Details - Adjust leading edge margin at ADF reading when the output image Use case - When installing the ADF.
is out of standard after ADF installation. - When replacing the Main Controller PCB.
- The image decreases 0.01% in vertical direction by setting value 1 - When replacing the CIS Unit.
as feed speed increases and the image decreases. Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value from the method press OK key.
Use case - When installing the ADF. service label.
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB. Display/adj/set range -30 to 30
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then Unit 0.1 mm
method press OK key. Default value 0
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the T-8-49
service label.
Display/adj/set range -200 to 200
Unit 0.01%
Default value 0
T-8-47
8-43
8
Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST-R
8 Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-CHK
8-44
■■LA-SPD2 FUNCTION
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
■■MTR-ON
LA-SPD2 Fine adjustment of vertical scanning magnification at ADF stream
reading: back side FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-ON
Details - Adjust leading edge margin at ADF reading when the output image MTR-ON Checking of ADF motor operation
is out of standard after ADF installation. Details Check ADF motor operation. The motor operates for 3 seconds and
-The image decreases 0.01% in vertical direction by setting value 1 then stops automatically.
as feed speed increases and the image decreases.
Use case When checking the operation.
service label. Adj/set/operate Select the item and then press OK key.
Use case - When installing the ADF. method
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB. Related service mode Approx. 3 seconds
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then T-8-52

service label. ■■FEED-ON
Display/adj/set range -200 to 200 FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-ON
Unit 0.01%
FEED-ON Checking of ADF single print operation
Default value 0
Details Check ADF single print operation set on FEED-CHK.
T-8-50
Use case When checking the operation.
Adj/set/operate Select the item and then press OK key.
■■DOCSTDUP method
Related service mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-CHK
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCSTDUP T-8-53
DOCST-DUP Adjustment of ADF 2-sided leading edge margin: 2-sided
is out of standard after ADF installation. ■■FEED-CHK
image moves upward). FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-CHK
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value from the FEED-CHK ADF single print operation setting
service label. Details Set ADF single print operation. The operation starts by setting FEED-
Use case - When installing the ADF. ON.
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB. Use case When checking the operation.
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by * key) and then Adj/set/operate Select the item and then press OK key.
method
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value on the Related service mode 0 to 1
service label. 0: 1-sided print
Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 1: 2-sided print
Unit 0.1 mm Default value 0
Default value 0 Related service mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-ON
T-8-51 T-8-54
8-44
8
Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-CHK
8 Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-CHK
8-45
8-45
8
Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-CHK
8 Service Mode > TESTMODE > PRINT
8-46
TESTMODE TESTMODE > PRINT

MODE Setting of test print image formation method
Details To set the image formation method for the test print.
PRINT If PG-TYPE is 0/1, this setting is disabled because a specific image
formation method is applied.
TESTMODE > PRINT Use case At trouble analysis
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
PG-TYPE Setting of PG number
method
Details To set the PG number of the test print.
Use case At trouble analysis 0: T-MIC(T-MIC), 1: High screen ruling (SCA), 2: low screen ruling
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. (SCB), 3:TBIC
method Default value 0
Display/adj/set range 0 to 7 THRU Setting of image correction table at test print
0: Grid Bk Details It is possible to check the density characteristics due to the density
1: Halftone correction process when normal gamma LUT is used, and the density
2: Solid black characteristics of the engine when the linear gamma LUT is used.
3: Solid white,
Use case At trouble analysis
4: 17 gradations
5 to 7: (For R&D)
Default value 0 method
COUNT Setting of PG output quantity Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Normal gamma LUT, 1: Through (linear) gamma LUI
Details To set the number of sheets for PG output.
Default value 0
Supplement/memo Gamma LUT: Density gradation characteristic table
DENS Adjustment of test print engine F value
method
Details To adjust the engine F value for the test print.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 99 As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Unit 1 sheet Use case At trouble analysis
Default value 0 Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press
PHASE Setting of PG 2-sided mode
method OK key.
Details To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
Display/adj/set range -4 (light.) to 4 (dark)
Even if 2-sided print is set for a machine that only supports 1-sided
Default value 0
print, the setting is disabled.
Supplement/memo F value: The value used as an index for indicating lens brightness
MABK To switch skipping processing.
Details The degree of skipping of each mode
method
Mode1: Small
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Mode2: Medium
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided Mode3: Large
Default value 0
Adj/set/operate nter the setting value, and then press OK key.
method
Display/adj/set range 0 : OFF
1 : Mode1
2 : Made2
3 : Made3
Default value 0
8-46
8
Service Mode > TESTMODE > PRINT
8 Service Mode > TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM
8-47
TESTMODE > PRINT
FEED Setting of paper source at test print FAX
Details To set the paper sources at the time of test print output.
If this mode is set when there is no Cassette 2 (option Pickup ■■MODEM
Cassette), output is from Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette).
If color paper is loaded in the specified paper source, there is no TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM
output because the setting is disabled. RELAY-1 Test ON/OFF of port SW and relay on NCU
Use case When outputting a test print Setting value:
Adj/set/operate Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 : All OFF
1 : CML ON / OFF
method
2 : P ON / OFF
Caution When performing printing with the Multi-purpose Tray, be sure to set 3 : S ON / OFF
the user mode before executing the service mode. 4 : H ON / OFF
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 5 : HD ON / OFF
0: Multi-purpose Tray, 1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2 6 : R ON / OFF
Default value 1 RELAY-2 Test ON/OFF of port SW and relay on NCU
START Output of test print Setting value:
Details To output a test print with the PG pattern set in PG-TYPE, etc. 0 : All OFF
Use case At trouble analysis 1 : CIST2 ON / OFF
Adj/set/operate Press OK key. 2 : C1 ON / OFF
3 : NORG ON / OFF
method
4 : HDCSEL ON / OFF
T-8-55
5 : DCLIM ON / OFF
6 : IPSEL1 ON / OFF
7 : IPSEL2 ON / OFF
FREQ Transmit selected frequency in closed DC circuit using tone
generation function of modem.
Setting value:
0 : Output Stop
1 : 462 Hz
2 : 1,100 Hz
3 : 1,300 Hz
4 : 1,500 Hz
5 : 1,650 Hz
6 : 1,850 Hz
7 : 2,100 Hz
G3TX Transmit selected signal pattern in closed DC circuit at selected
frequency using G3 signal transmission function of modem.
Setting value:
0 : Output Stop
1 : 300 bps
2 : 2,400 bps
3 : 4,800 bps
4 : 7,200 bps
5 : 9,600 bps
6 : TC 7.200 bps
7 : TC 9,600 bps
8 : 12,000 bps
9 : 14,400 bps
8-47
8
Service Mode > TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM
8 Service Mode > TESTMODE > FAX > FACULTY
8-48
TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM ■■FACULTY
DTMFTX Transmit DTMF signal using DTMF transmission function of
TESTMODE > FAX > FACULTY
modem after DC circuit closure.
Setting value: G34800TX Transmit the frequency of 4800bps using G3 signal
0 : Output Stop transmission function after DC circuit closure.
1:"1" Setting value:
2:"2" 0 : Output Stop
3:"3" 1 : Output Start
4:"4" DETECT1 Ring detection
5:"5" Check the status (ON, OFF) of hook and Ci, Fc from i
6:"6" line.
7:"7" Setting value:
8:"8" 0 : Output Stop
9:"9" 1 : Output Start
10 : " 0 " DETECT2 CNG detection test 1
11 : " * " Execute CNG signal check and FED check.
12 : " # " Detect CNG after CML relay is ON.
V34G3TX Transmit selected frequency using G3 signal transmission function Setting value:
(V.34) after DC circuit closure. 0 : Output Stop
Setting value: 1 : Output Start
0 : Output Stop DETECT3 CNG detection test 2
XYY ( X : Baud Rate (baud) YY : Speed (bps)) Execute CNG signal check and FED check.
Detect CNG after CML relay is OFF.
X (Hundreds place) Setting value:
1YY : 2,400 baud 0 : Output Stop
2YY : 2,743 baud 1 : Output Start
3YY : 2,800 baud T-8-57
4YY : 3,000 baud
5YY : 3,200 baud
6YY : 3,429 baud
YY (tens place , Ones place)

01 : 2,400 bps
02 : 4,800 bps
03 : 7,200 bps
04 : 9,600 bps
05 : 12,000 bps
06 : 14,400 bps
07 : 16,800 bps
08 : 19,200 bps
09 : 21,600 bps
10 : 24,000 bps
11 : 26,400 bps
12 : 28,800 bps
13 : 31,200 bps
14 : 33,600 bps
T-8-56
8-48
8
Service Mode > TESTMODE > FAX > FACULTY
8 Service Mode > FAX > List of SSSW
8-49
FAX FAX > SSSW

SSSW No. Bit No. Function
SW 05 (Standard functions, DIS signal setting)
List of SSSW Bit 0
Bit 1 mm/inch conversion (text mode)
FAX > SSSW Bit 2 mm/inch conversion (text and picture / picture mode)
SSSW No. Bit No. Function Bit 3 Prohibit DIS from transmitting bit33 and the followings.
Bit 4 Declare cut sheets
SW 01 (Errors, COPY functions)
Bit 0 Output error codes for service technicians Bit 5 Declare LRT/LGL in DIS
Bit 1 Error in memory dump Bit 6 Prohibit ECM outgoing transmission
Bit 2 Enter the password for transferring received confidential image Bit 7 Prohibit ECM incoming transmission
Bit 3 Prohibit COPY SW 06 (Setting of reading criteria)
Bit 4 Display No. 300s Bit 0 Move from DES to pre-scan position
Bit 5 Bit 1 Pre-scan at time other than power-ON
Bit 6 Prohibit users from setting date/time Bit 2 Restrict document length
Bit 7 Collectively clear user setting prohibition Bit 3 Stamp option
Bit 4 Reading width 0:A4 1: LTR
SW 02 (Setting for network connection criteria)
Bit 0 Do not start when memory clear list is unable to output Bit 5 Record memory copy time sharing
Bit 1 Bit 6 Variable resolution at COPY
Bit 2 Bit 7 Half tone + super fine
Bit 3 SW 07 Not in use
Bit 4 V34 CCRTN OFF SW 08 Not in use
Bit 7 Connect the terminal as F network type 2 SW 11 Not in use
SW 03 (Echo measures) SW 12 (Page timer setting)
Bit 0 Check EQM of TCF Bit 0 1 page timeout (outgoing transmission)
Bit 1 Apply echo protect tone to V.29 Bit 1
Bit 2 Bit 2 1 page timeout (HT transmission)
Bit 3 Bit 3
Bit 4 Heard DIS twice Bit 4 1 page timeout (incoming transmission)
Bit 5 First DIS interference Bit 5
Bit 6 Interfered DIS frequency Bit 6
Bit 7 Output 1080Hz before CED Bit 7 1 page timeout
SW 04 (Measures against communication troubles) SW 13
Bit 0 Monitor LC Bit 0 Prohibit relay broadcasting / transfer while receiving relay / transfer
Bit 1 Check CI signal frequency Bit 1 Response to faulty image while receiving relay / transfer
Bit 2 V21 end flag Bit 2 Convert mm/inch when transmitting received image
Bit 3 Prohibit T.30 node F kept by both parties Bit 3
Bit 4 T.30 node F echo timer Bit 4
Bit 5 Check CI signal frequency when setting PBX Bit 5
Bit 6 Do not send CNG for manual outgoing transmission Bit 6
Bit 7 Do not send CED for manual incoming transmission Bit 7
8-49
8
Service Mode > FAX > List of SSSW
8 Service Mode > FAX > List of SSSW
8-50
FAX > SSSW FAX > SSSW
SSSW No. Bit No. Function SSSW No. Bit No. Function
SW 14 SW 24 Not in use
Bit 0 SW 25 (Setting for report display function)
Bit 1 Standard paper size type Bit 0 Prioritize the received telephone number to the dialed number
<NADA>COPIER > OPTION > BODY > MODEL-SZ Bit 1 Prioritize the received abbreviated name to the dialed abbreviated
Bit 2 Convert inch to mm in both main/vertical scanning directions or only in name
vertical scanning direction Bit 2 Regard a received blank CIS as an unreceived CIS
Bit 3 Convert inch to mm only for OCR transmission Bit 3 Message language selection for user SW
Bit 4 Declare resolution for Inch series Bit 4
Bit 5 Bit 5
Bit 6 Bit 6
Bit 7 Bit 7
Bit 1 Polarity memory timing at dial-in SW 28
Bit 2 Receive incoming calls to ND circuit: device circuit Bit 0 Prohibit calling party for V8 procedure
Bit 3 Bit 1 Prohibit called party from V8 procedure
Bit 4 Bit 2 Prohibit calling party from V8 late-start
Bit 5 Bit 3 Prohibit called party from V8 late-start
Bit 6 Detect continuous signals when switching F/T Bit 4 Prohibit V.34 called party from starting fallback
Bit 7 Bit 5 Prohibit V.34 calling party from starting fallback
SW 16 Not in use Bit 6
Bit 0 Detect carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF SW 30
Bit 1 Waiting time for carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF Bit 0 Support for 1284 device ID
Bit 2 Prohibit communication control for IP network Bit 1
Bit 3 Bit 2
Bit 4 Bit 3
Bit 5 Bit 4
Bit 6 Bit 5 New dial tone detection method
Bit 7 Bit 6
SW 20 Not in use SW 31 Not in use
SW 21 Not in use SW 32
SW 22 Bit 0 Canon/NTT NSX switching SW
Bit 0 Prohibit NSX transmission Bit 1
Bit 1 Prohibit separated A4 record Bit 2
Bit 2 Prohibit broadcasting transmission Bit 3
Bit 3 Prohibit manual polling actions Bit 4
Bit 4 Prohibit manual transmission when transmitting archives Bit 5 0:NCU2004 1:NCU2002
Bit 5 Bit 6
Bit 6 With archive transmission function Bit 7
SW 23 Not in use SW 34 Not in use
8-50
8
Service Mode > FAX > List of SSSW
8 Service Mode > FAX > List of MENU
8-51
FAX > SSSW List of MENU
SSSW No. Bit No. Function
SW 35 Not in use Menu switch registration mode
SW 36 Not in use No. Parameter Selection
SW 37 Not in use 001 Not in use
SW 41 Not in use 005 ON/OFF of NL equalizer 0: OFF 1: ON
SW 42 Not in use 006 Telephone line monitor 0-3
SW 43 Not in use 0: DIAL
SW 44 Not in use 1: SERVICEMAN 1
SW 45 Not in use 2: SERVICEMAN 2
3: OFF
SW 46 Not in use
007 Transmission level (ATT) 0-15
SW 47 Not in use
008 Upper limit of V.34 modulation speed 0-5
SW 48 Not in use
0: 3429BAUD
SW 49 Not in use
1: 3200BAUD
SW 50 Not in use 2: 3000BAUD
T-8-58 3: 2800BAUD
4: 2743BAUD
5: 2400BAUD
009 Upper limit of V.34 data speed 0-13
0: 33.6kbps
1:31.2
2: 28.8
3: 26.4
4: 24.0
5: 21.6
6: 19.2
7: 16.8
8: 14.4
9: 12.0
10: 9.6
11: 7.2
12: 4.8
13: 2.4
010 Pseudo-CI signal frequency 0-2
0: 50Hz
1: 25Hz
2: 17Hz
011 Not in use
012 Not in use
013 Not in use
014 Not in use
015 Not in use
016 Not in use
017 Not in use
8-51
8
Service Mode > FAX > List of MENU
8 Service Mode > FAX > List of NUM
8-52
Menu switch registration mode List of NUM
No. Parameter Selection
018 Not in use Numeric parameter setting mode
019 Not in use No. Parameter Allowable setting range
020 Not in use 001 Not in use
T-8-59 002 RTN transmission criteria X 1 to 99%
003 RTN transmission criteria n 2 to 99 times
004 RTN transmission criteria m 1 to 99 lines
005 NCC pause (before ID code) 1 to 60s
006 NCC pause (after ID code) 1 to 60s
007 Not in use
008 Not in use
009 Not in use
010 T.30 T0 timer 55s principally
011 T.30 T1 timer (for incoming transmission) 0 to 9999 (France=3500,
Others=3000)
012 Maximum incoming lines 0 to 65535 (line)
0: without limitation
013 T.30 EOL timer 500 to 3000
(set to 55s by default)
014 Not in use
015 Threshold between hooking and on-hook 0 to 999
016 Lead time to the first response when switching between FAX 0 to 9
and TEL
017 Duration to activate pseudo-RBT cadence 0 to 999
018 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (short) 0 to 999
019 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (long) 0 to 999
020 Duration to activate pseudo-ring cadence 0 to 999
021 Duration to deactivate pseudo-CI cadence (short) 0 to 999
022 Duration to deactivate pseudo-CI cadence (long) 0 to 999
023 CNG detection level when switching between FAX and TEL 0 to 7
024 Pseudo-RBT outgoing level when switching between FAX 10 to 20 (100v),
and TEL 0 to 20 (120, 230v)
025 CNG monitor duration while the answering device is activated 0 to 999
026 No signal detection level while the answering device is 0 to 7
activated
027 Duration to detect preamble of V21 low-speed flag 20 (*10ms)
028 Not in use
029 Not in use
030 Not in use
031 Not in use
032 Not in use
033 Not in use
034 Not in use
035 Not in use
036 Not in use
8-52
8
Service Mode > FAX > List of NUM
8 Service Mode > FAX > List of NCU > DIAL TONE
8-53
Numeric parameter setting mode List of NCU
No. Parameter Allowable setting range
037 Not in use ■■TONE
038 Not in use
039 Not in use • Setting of Tone Parameters
040 Not in use While “#NCU” is displayed, press “OK” key -> Select “#TONE” and press “OK” key so that it
041 Not in use becomes tone parameter setting mode.
042 Not in use
043 Not in use Item Function Setting range
044 Not in use 001 Tone signal sending time (PSTN) 10 to 9999 (ms)
045 Not in use 002 Minimum pause time (PSTN) 10 to 9999 (ms)
046 Not in use T-8-61
TONE/PULSE
047 Not in use
048 Not in use
049 Not in use
050
■■PULSE
Not in use
051 Threshold to detect hook 10 to 9999 • Setting of Pulse Parameters
052 Not in use While “#NCU” is displayed, press “OK” key -> Select “#PULSE” and press “OK” key so that
053 Set DTMF calling counts when receiving FAX remotely 0 to 9999(*25)
it becomes pulse parameter setting mode.
054 Set BusyTone outgoing duration when using handset 0 to 9999
055 Not in use Item Function Setting range
056 Not in use FORM Pulse digit format 0 -> DP (N)
057 Not in use 1 -> DP (N+1)
058 Not in use 2 -> DP (10-N)
059 Not in use 001 Pulse dial speed (10pps) 5 to 300 (x0.1pps)
060 Not in use 002 Pulse dial speed (20pps) 5 to 300 (x0.1pps)
061 Not in use 003 Pulse dial make ratio 10 to 90 (%)
062 Not in use 004 Minimum pause time 10 to 9999 (ms)
063 Not in use T-8-62
064 Not in use
065 Not in use ■■DIAL TONE
066 Not in use
1) Bit switch
067 Not in use
068 Not in use Bit No. Function 1 0
069 Not in use Bit 0 Frequency detection method Modem Tonal counter
070 Not in use Bit 1
071 Not in use Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
072 Not in use Bit 3
073 Not in use Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent Start from valid ON Start from either valid
078 Exclusive use of a developer signal signal ON signal or OFF signal
079 Exclusive use of a developer Bit 5
080 Exclusive use of a developer Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
T-8-60 Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected
T-8-63
8-53
8
Service Mode > FAX > List of NCU > DIAL TONE
8 Service Mode > FAX > List of NCU > BUSTONE1
8-54
2) Numeric value parameter ■■BUSTONE0
Parameter No. Function Setting range
1) Bit switch
001 T0 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) Bit No. Function 1 0
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) Bit 0
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) Bit 1
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16 Bit 3
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7 Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent Start from valid ON Start from either valid
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times) signal signal ON signal or OFF signal
T-8-64
Bit 5
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
■■2nd DLTN Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected
T-8-67
1) Bit switch
2) Numeric value parameter
Bit No. Function 1 0
Bit 0 Frequency detection method Modem Tonal counter Parameter No. Function Setting range
Bit 1 001
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed 002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit 3 003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent Start from valid ON Start from either valid 004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
signal signal ON signal or OFF signal 005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit 5 006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent 007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected 008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)
T-8-65 T-8-68
2) Numeric value parameter ■■BUSTONE1

1) Bit switch
001 T0 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) Bit No. Function 1 0
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) Bit 0
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) Bit 1
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16 Bit 3 RBT signal detection Detected Not detected
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7 Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent Start from valid ON Start from either valid
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times) signal signal ON signal or OFF signal
T-8-66 Bit 5 RBT signal check cycle 1 cycle 1/2 cycle
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected
T-8-69
8-54
8
Service Mode > FAX > List of NCU > BUSTONE1
8 Service Mode > FAX > List of NCU > CNGDTCT
8-55
2) Numeric value parameter ■■MULTI
001
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) Parameter No. Function Setting range
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) 001 0 to 9999
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) 002 0 to 9999
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) 003 0 to 9999
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16 004 0 to 9999
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7 T-8-73
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)

■■AUTO RX
T-8-70
■■REORDRTN
1) Bit switch 001 CI ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit No. Function 1 0 002 Cl long off time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit 0 003 Cl off time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit 1 Signal detection FED FR3 004 CL long off time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
method 005 Cl MAX off time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed 006 Cl wait time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit 3 007 CI frequency 0 to 9999 (cycle)
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent Start from valid ON Start from either valid 008 CI frequency lower limit 0 to 9999 (Hz)
signal signal ON signal or OFF signal 009 CI frequency upper limit 0 to 9999 (Hz)
Bit 5 T-8-74
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected ■■CNGDTCT
T-8-71
Parameter No. Function Setting range 001 At F/T switching CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
001 002 CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) 003
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) 004
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) 005
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms) 006 Hit ratio 0 to 9999 (%)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16 007 At direct CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7 008 connecting to CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times) 009 answering phone Tolerable time of 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
T-8-72 instantaneous interruption
010
011 Number of detection 0 to 9999 (Times)
012 Hit ratio 0 to 9999 (%)
T-8-75
8-55
8
Service Mode > FAX > List of NCU > CNGDTCT
8 Service Mode > FAX > List of NCU > PBXBUSYT
8-56
■■SPECIALB ■■PBXBUSYT
• Not in use 1) Bit switch
Bit No. Function 1 0
■■SPECIALN Bit 0
Bit 1
• Not in use Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3
■■RKEY Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent Start from valid ON
signal signal
Start from either valid
ON signal or OFF signal
1) Numeric value parameter Bit 5
001 Connection time of flash 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
T-8-79
002 Connection time of grounding wire 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 2) Numeric value parameter
T-8-76 Parameter No. Function Setting range
001 - -
■■PBXDIALT 002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
1) Bit switch 003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit No. Function 1 0 005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
Bit 0 Frequency detection method Modem Tonal counter 006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
Bit 1 007 Signal detection level 0 to 9
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed 008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)
Bit 3 T-8-80
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent Start from valid ON Start from either valid
signal signal ON signal or OFF signal
Bit 5
T-8-77

001 T0 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 9
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)
T-8-78
8-56
8
Service Mode > FAX > List of NCU > PBXBUSYT
9 Installation
■
■How to Utilize This
Installation Procedure
■
■Checking before
Installation
■
■Points to Note on
Installation
■
■Checking the Contents
■
■Installation Procedure
■
■Copy Card Reader-F1
■
■Control Interface Kit-C1
■
■Handset-K1
9
Installation
9 Installation > Checking before Installation > Selecting the Site of Installation
9-2
How to Utilize This Installation Procedure Checking before Installation
Symbols in the Illustration Selecting the Site of Installation

The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure. The followings are the condition for installation environment.
Screw
It is better to see the planned location of installation before carrying the host machine in the
user site.
1x 1x 1x 1x 1) The host machine can singly connect to the outlet of rated +/-10V, 15A or more.
2) The installation site must be in the following environment. Especially, avoid installing the
Packaged Item Unused Parts Install Remove Tighten Loosen
machine near the faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator.
• Operating environment:Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 20 to 80%
Harness Connector Power Cord 3) Avoid installing the machine near fire, in an area subject to dust or ammonia gas. When
(Common for Guides and Clamps) installing the machine in a place exposed to direct rays of the sun, it is recommended that
curtains be hung over the windows.
1x 1x 1x 1x
4) The amount of ozone generated during use of the machine is below the harmful level.
Install Remove Connect Disconnect Connect Disconnect However, if the machine is used for a long time in a poor-ventilated room, ozone may smell.
To keep the work environment comfortable, the room must be well-ventilated properly.
Power
5) None of the machine feet should float. The machine must be held level constantly.
6) The machine must be installed at least 100mm away from the surrounding walls and there
must be an adequate space for operating the machine.
ON OFF Check the sound Check visually Check Push Cleaning

100 mm or more
F-9-1
Illustrations Used in This Procedure 457 mm
Illustrations used in this procedure are those of ADF Model unless otherwise specified.
327 mm
265 mm 520 mm
F-9-2
7) Install the machine in a well-ventilated place. Do not install the machine close to the
ventilation duct of the room.
9-2
9
Installation > Checking before Installation > Selecting the Site of Installation
9 Installation > Points to Note on Installation
9-3
Points to Note on Installation

Be sure to go through the following before starting the work.
1) Imaging faults can result due to dew condensation that occurs when the machine is moved
from a cold place to a warm place. Leave the unpacked machine as it is for at least two
hours before installing it.
(Dew condensation: When a metallic object is brought from a low-temperature place to a
high-temperature place, water vapor around it is cooled abruptly and consequently water
drops stick to the surface of the metallic object.)
2) The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 22.8kg (ADF model, not include a drum
unit, a toner cartridge). Accordingly, two or more persons are required to lift the machine.
Be sure to keep the machine in a horizontal position when lifting it.
●● Message for Unidentified Toner Cartridge

This machine is equipped with the function which displays the following message after
identifying the Toner Cartridge information by reading the IC Tag.
Message: "The remaining Toner information cannot be detected properly. A non-Canon
Cartridge or a Cartridge with the wrong item number may be inserted, or no Cartridge is
inserted."
Though the machine is continuously used after clearing the message, the function will not
properly operate, such as the remaining Toner detection.
The cause of the message appearance will be as follows.
• No Cartridge is inserted.
• A non-Canon Cartridge may be inserted.
• A Cartridge with the wrong item number may be inserted.
• The IC Tag of the Toner Cartridge is fault.
• The IC Tag reading function of the machine is fault.
9-3
9
Installation > Points to Note on Installation
9 Installation > Unpacking > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials
9-4
Unpacking 3)
Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging NOTE:

The Toner Cartridge may not be supplied depending on the models.
Materials
1)
Toner Cartridge
F-9-3 Copyboard Cover Model and Printer Model Only Cord and Plug
2)
Label
F-9-4
9-4
9
Installation > Unpacking > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials
9 Installation > Checking the Contents
9-5
Checking the Contents
NOTE:
• Hand the supplied LAN cable to a user, and then explain the usage of the LAN to refer to user's guide.
• When the length of the LAN cable is not enough, explain that purchase the cable (the shield type more than Category 5) of the off-the-shelf items and use it to the user.
[1] Toner Cartridge x 1 [2] LAN Cable x 1 < Documentations and CD >
(For Korea / China and Europe (For Asia except India)
(Copyboard Cover Model only)) There are cases in which the following names of the documentations and CD are different from
the actual printed ones.
• Getting Started
• User Manual CD-ROM
• Notice for Latest Software
• Notice Regarding the LAN Cable Included with the Machine
[3] Glass Cleaning Label [4] Power Cord x 1 (For Asia except India and China)
(ADF Model only, • Main Unit Warranty (For Korea and China)
except for China and Korea)
• Service Book (For China)
• Quality Certificate (For China)
[5] Telephone Cord x1 [6] Telephone Cord x1 [7] PTT Plug x1

(2-Contact type) (6-Contact type; For EU) (For EU, Use in Germany)
Fax Model only Fax Model only Fax Model only
[8] PTT Plug x1 [9] PTT Plug x1 [10] PTT Cable x1

(For EU, Use in France) (For EU, Use in UK) (For KOREA)
Fax Model only Fax Model only Fax Model only
F-9-5
9-5
9
Installation > Checking the Contents
9 Installation > Installation Procedure
9-6
Installation Procedure 2) Remove all packing tapes and cushioning materials from outside of the machine.
NOTE:
When placing this machine on the Cassette Feeding Module, be sure to install the
Cassette Feeding Module before installing this machine.
(About the procedure for installing the Cassette Feeding Module, refer to the Cassette
Feeding Module Installation Procedure.)
3)
1)
F-9-7
4)
F-9-6
F-9-8
9-6
9
Installation > Installation Procedure
9-7
5) 6)
NOTE:
The Left Door can open fully by two steps.
F-9-9
F-9-10
7)
F-9-11
9-7
9
9-8
8) 10)
F-9-14
F-9-12
9)
11)
NOTE:
Check that the Left Door is fully opening when the Drum Unit cannot be removed.
F-9-15
F-9-13
9-8
9
9-9
12) 14)
F-9-18
F-9-16
15)
13)
NOTE:
Install the Drum Unit along the rails inside the Machine until it stops.
F-9-19
16)
F-9-17
F-9-20
9-9
9
9-10
17) Unpacking the Toner Cartridge. 18)
NOTE:
Install the Toner Cartridge inside the machine until it stops.
F-9-21
CAUTION:
• Do not shake the Toner Cartridge. F-9-23
• Do not touch the portions A, B, or C shown in the illustration.
C
A
F-9-22
9-10
9
9-11
19) 22)
NOTE:
The front cover cannot close when the Toner Cartridge is not set properly.
F-9-24
20)
F-9-27
23)
2
F-9-25 1
21) F-9-28
24)
F-9-26
F-9-29
9-11
9
9-12
25) 27)
F-9-32
28) Remove the Protection Sheet on the Control Panel.

F-9-30
26)
Protection Sheet
F-9-33
F-9-31
9-12
9
9 Installation > Installation Procedure > Affixing the Label > ADF Model only (Except for China / Korea)
9-13
Affixing the Label
3)
■■ADF Model only (Except for China / Korea)
1)
F-9-36
F-9-34
2) Affix the label in the appropriate language.

• Glass Cleaning Label
Glass Cleaning Label
F-9-35
9-13
9
Installation > Installation Procedure > Affixing the Label > ADF Model only (Except for China / Korea)
9 Installation > Installation Procedure > Checking the Operation and the Print Image
9-14
Connecting the Power Cord Host Machine Settings (Start Setup Guide)
The Start Setup Guide screen appears when the power is turned ON for the first time after the
machine is installed. Follow the instructions displayed on the display to configure the settings
1) of the Host Machine.
1) Connect the power plug of the Host Machine to the machine and the power outlet.
2) Turn ON the main power switch.
3) Select the appropriate language with the cursor keys (▲/▼), and press the OK key.
4) "Check that orange tape on the toner cartridge has been removed. , / Next" is displayed.
Check it and press the OK key.
5) "Start mixing toner. Duration: Approx. 3 min. , / Start" is displayed. Check it and press the
OK key.
6) Select the location with the cursor keys (▲/▼), and press the OK key.
7) "Load paper in Drawer. " is displayed. Check it and press the OK key.
8) Select the Time Zone with the cursor keys (▲/▼), and press the OK key.
9) Enter the Date and Time with the cursor keys (▲/▼), and press the OK key.
Checking the Operation and the Print Image
F-9-37 1) Place original on the copyboard glass, and then copy it by feeding paper from the cassette
and manual-feed tray to check the operation and the resultant print image.
Turning ON the Power • Check that abnormal sound is not generated.
• Check the image quality at respective magnifications.
• Check that the document is copied normally on the specified number of sheets.
• When image adjustment is necessary, refer to the chapter of the adjustment.
ON
F-9-38
9-14
9
Installation > Installation Procedure > Checking the Operation and the Print Image
9 Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting to Telephone Line (Fax Model only) > Preparation of Telephone Cord
9-15
Connecting to the Network (Network Model only) Connecting to Telephone Line (Fax Model only)
This steps perform only for Network Model. This steps perform only for Fax Model.
1) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch. ■■Preparation of Telephone Cord

2) Connect the LAN Cable to the LAN port of the Host Machine and the Router, and then turn
1) Connect the PTT Plug matched the field or area to the Telephone Cord (6-contact type).
ON the Main Power Switch.
NOTE:
• This step performs only for Europe.
• Do not connect the Telephone Cord (2-contact type) with the PTT Plug.
1x
F-9-39
3) Inform the system administrator at the installation site that installation of the Host Machine
is complete, and then ask for the network setting.
NOTE:
• Hand the supplied LAN cable to a user, and then explain the usage of the LAN to refer to
user's guide.
• When the length of the LAN cable is not enough, explain that purchase the cable (the
shield type more than Category 5) of the off-the-shelf items and use it to the user.
NOTE:
F-9-40
Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as an administrator.
Factory default password is as follows.
• Manager ID : 7654321 or 0
• PIN : 7654321 or 0
CAUTION:
To perform the network setting, the following Additional Functions items must be set
"ON".
> [Network Settings] OK > Enter the Manager ID and PIN > ID > [TCP/IP
Settings]
4) Turn OFF the main power.
9-15
9
Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting to Telephone Line (Fax Model only) > Preparation of Telephone Cord
9 Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting to Telephone Line (Fax Model only) > Basic Setting
9-16
■■Basic Setting
3) When <Connect Telephone Line> appears on the display, connect the telephone cable
NOTE: as the following illustration.
When “System Manager Information Settings” is set, be sure to follow the direction of
user administrator in order to log in as an administrator.
In this steps, make only minimum settings required for FAX communication.
1) Turn ON the Main Power Switch.
2) Specify the initial Fax Settings.
Handset
Telephone
Telephone line connector
F-9-41
F-9-42
NOTE:
When stopping the Fax settings on the way, push the Stop Key to exit the Fax setup
screen.
4) Exit the fax setup screen, and then restart the machine.
Follow the instructions on the screen to specify a fax number, a unit name, and a receive
mode. Refer to the User's Guides for details about each mode.
[How to use a user name]

When you send a document, the sender information that you registered is printed on the
recipient’s paper.
F-9-43
[Selecting <Set Up Later>]

5)Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again. If the
If you select <Set Up Later>, the receive mode is set to <Auto>. Later, when you want to
telephone line types are not detected automatically, see the User's Guides and set a
configure the fax settings, display the fax setup screen by pressing > [Fax Settings] > OK
telephone line manually.
> [Fax Setup Guide].
9-16
9
Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting to Telephone Line (Fax Model only) > Basic Setting
9 Installation > Installation Procedure > Fax communication test
9-17
Fax communication test
Perform the communication test to check if FAX function works correctly.
1) Switch the control panel display to [Fax] screen.

2) Send the test document from this machine to another machine that can handle the
communication test to check that this machine can send the data correctly.
3) Send the test document from the target to this machine to check if the machine can receive
the document properly.
9-17
9
Installation > Installation Procedure > Fax communication test
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader-F1
9-18
Copy Card Reader-F1 Checking the Contents

■■Copy Card Reader-F1
Check Item of the Contents
The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used during installation. [1] Card Reader Unit X 1 [2] Screw [3] Toothed Washer X 1
(RS tight; M4x10) X 1

• To install this equipment, the Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1 is required.
• This equipment and the Handset cannot be used at the same time.
Check Items when Turning OFF the Power F-9-45
Check that the main power switch is OFF.

1)Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the Power Supply Lamp are turned off, and
then disconnect the power plug.
Installation Outline Drawing
F-9-44
9-18
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader-F1
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Card Reader
9-19
■■Copy Card Reader Attachment-E1 Installation Procedure
[1] Card Reader Lower [2] Card Reader Lower [3] Card Reader Harness ■■Assembling the Card Reader
Mounting Plate X 1 Cover X 1 X1
1)
1x
[4] Screw [5] Wire Saddle (Large)X 2 [6] Wire Saddle (Small) X 1
(Binding; M4x6) X 1
F-9-47
[7] Screw (TP; M4x16) X 2 [8] Edge Saddle X 1 [9] Cord Guide X 1
2)
1x
F-9-46
F-9-48
NOTE:
The removed Screw is used in step 4).
9-19
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Card Reader
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Card Reader
9-20
3) 5)
1x
1x
F-9-49 F-9-51
NOTE: NOTE:
The removed Screw and Toothed Washer are used in step 5). Use the Screw and the Toothed Washer removed in step 3).
4) 6)
1x
1x
F-9-50 F-9-52
NOTE:
Use the Screw removed in step 2).
9-20
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Card Reader
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-21
■■Removing the Covers
3)
1)
3x
F-9-55
F-9-53
4)
2)
F-9-56
F-9-54
9-21
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-22
5) 7)
4x 4x
F-9-57 F-9-59
6)
Clow
F-9-58
9-22
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Card Reader Unit
9-23
■■Installing the Card Reader Unit
2)
1)
1x
1x
F-9-60
F-9-61
NOTE:
The removed screw is used in step 4).
9-23
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Card Reader Unit
9-24
3) 5)
4x
1x
F-9-62 F-9-64
4) 6)
CAUTION:
When installing the Speaker, take care that it don't pinch or damage to the Speaker
Harness.
1x 2
F-9-63 F-9-65
NOTE:
Use the Screw removed in step 1).
9-24
9
9-25
7) 9)
3x Wire Saddle（Small）
Wire Saddle（Large）
F-9-66 F-9-68
8) 10) Install the Card Reader Unit.
TP
M4x16
2x
F-9-67
F-9-69
9-25
9
9-26
11) 13)
CAUTION:
When installing the Card Reader Lower Cover, take care that it don't pinch or damage
1x
to the Card Reader Harness.
1x
F-9-70
Bind
12) M4x6
F-9-72
3x
14)
F-9-73
F-9-71
9-26
9
9-27
15) 17)
2x
F-9-76
F-9-74 18) Connect the power plug to the host machine and outlet.
NOTE:
Be sure to check that there is no burr.
19) Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine.
16)
F-9-75
9-27
9
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
9-28
Setting After Installation
Configure the card management information settings in service mode.

1) Enter the Service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD-NUM, and enter the
first number of the card used by the user.
2) Enter the Service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD, and press the OK
key to enable the card. The 300 pieces of cards become available from the number set in
step 1).
3) Execute the following menu to enable the Department ID management.
• Menu > System Management Settings > Department ID management On/Off > ON >
OK
4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the settings.
5) Check that a message [Insert the card.] appears.
NOTE:
How to enter System Management Settings.
1) Enter the Manager ID : (Default value: 7654321 or 0)
2) Enter the PIN : (Default value: 7654321 or 0)
3) Press the "ID" key.
6) Insert a card which card number has been registered, and check that the machine operates
normally.
NOTE:
When changing the number of cards after specifying the settings, specify the following
settings.
1) Enter the Service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> CARD-NUM, and enter
the first number of the card used by the user.
2) Enter the Service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD, and press the
OK key to enable the card.
3) Turn OFF and ON the main power switch to enable the settings.
9-28
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
9 Installation > Control Interface Kit-C1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-29
Control Interface Kit-C1 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
Checking the Contents 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned
[1] CC-VI Cable X1 [2] D-SUB Support Plate [3] Washer (Large) X2 off, then disconnect the power plug.
X1
[4] Hexagonal Screw ( Washer (Small),Nut ) X2

Do not use a Nut
F-9-77
F-9-78
9-29
9
Installation > Control Interface Kit-C1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9 Installation > Control Interface Kit-C1 > Installation Procedure
9-30
3)
1)
4x
3x
F-9-81
F-9-79 4)
2)
NOTE :
Be sure to check that there is no burr.
F-9-82
F-9-80
9-30
9
Installation > Control Interface Kit-C1 > Installation Procedure
9 Installation > Control Interface Kit-C1 > Installation Procedure
9-31
5) 7)
NOTE :
Be sure to tighten the Hexagonal Screw with needlenose pliers. 3x
F-9-85
8)
2x
1x
F-9-83
6)
4x
F-9-86
9)
F-9-84
ON
F-9-87
9-31
9
Installation > Control Interface Kit-C1 > Installation Procedure
9 Installation > Handset-K1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-32
Handset-K1 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned
Install this device to a model with the Fax function. off, then disconnect the power plug.
This equipment and the Copy Card Reader cannot be used at the same time.
Checking the Contents

[1] Handset X 1 [2] Handset Base X 1 [3] Handset Base Holder
X1
[4] Cord Guide X 1 [5] Knurled Screw X 2 [6] Screw (Binding; M3x35)
X2
F-9-88
F-9-89
9-32
9
Installation > Handset-K1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9 Installation > Handset-K1 > Installation Procedure
9-33
1) 3)
2x
Knurled
Screw
F-9-90 F-9-92
2) 4)
1x
2x
HAND SET
EXT
LINE
Binding
M3x35
F-9-91 F-9-93
9-33
9
Installation > Handset-K1 > Installation Procedure
9 Installation > Handset-K1 > Installation Procedure
9-34
5)
F-9-94
6)
Center
3.0 mm
1x
F-9-95
7) Connect the power plug to the outlet.

8) Turn ON the main power switch.
9) Check that the dial tone is heard from the Handset.
9-34
9
Installation > Handset-K1 > Installation Procedure
Appendix
■
■Service Tools
■
■General Circuit Diagram
■
■General Timing Chart
■
■Backup Data
■
■Soft Counter Specifications
Appendix > Service Tools
2
Service Tools ■■Oils and Solvents

Name Usage Composition Remarks
■■Special Tools Alcohol Cleaning • Fluoride-family • Do not put near fire.
(e.g.) glass, plastic, hydrocarbon • Procure locally
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing rubber, external covers. • Alcohol Surface • Substitute: IPA
the machine. activating agent (isopropyl alcohol)
• Water
Tool name Tool No. Rank Appearance Remarks Alcohol Cleaning • Fluoride-family • Do not bring near fire.
(*) (e.g.) metal, oil stain, toner hydrocarbon • Procure locally
Digital multi meter FY9-2002 A Electrical checks stain • Chlorine-family • Substitute: MEK
hydrocarbon
• Alcohol
Lubricating oil Application • Special oil • Dow Corning Corp.
(EM-50L) (e.g.) gear, shaft of the • Special solid lubricating • Tool No. : HY9-0007
CIS unit agent (20g)
• Lithium soap
Tester extension pin FY9-3038 A Additional electrical
check Lubricating oil Application • Composition oil • Dow Corning Corp.
(HP-300) (e.g.) bushing (L/R) of the • Tool No. : CK-8012
pressure roller (100g)
Conducting Application • Mineral oil • FLOIL GE-676

Tester extension in FY9-3039 A Additional electrical
grease (e.g.) contact plate • Tool No. : FY9-6023
(L-shipped) check spring, developing sleeve (20g)
electrode
Oil glass cleaner Application - • TAIHO KOHZAI

(e.g.) stream reading • Tool No. : FY9-6020
glass (10ml)
• Tool No. : FY9-6035
NA-3 Test Chart FY9-9196 A Check and adjusting
(80ml)
images
T-10-2
* T-10-1
A: each service engineer is expected to carry one.
B: each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one.
C: each workshop is expected to carry one.
2
Appendix > Service Tools
3
General Circuit Diagram
General Circuit Diagram

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PCB11
SR6 FUSE
Waste Toner
SR10 Full Sensor CONNECTING
FM3 SL3 SR1
Delivery Full PCB Image Formation Part Cassette 2 Cassette 2
SR11 CL1 M3 Sensor
3 2 1 3 2 1
Pre-registration
2 1
Cooling Fan Pickup Solenoid Paper Sensor
F SR13 F
3 2 1 3 2 1
Registration Fixing Motor J159 J171

J624
SR17
Sensor
CL SL
Clutch 1 2
M Cassette 1 Toner Sensor 2 1
FM1
1 2 3
J169 2 1
Laser Scanner Unit Paper Sensor SR18 J502L 1 2
1 2 3 J501
3 2 1 FM2 Delivery SL5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J243
J502DH 2
J502D
1 1 2 3
3 2 1
Power Supply Environment 1 2
M1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SR14 J156 Cooling Fan Multi- J168L M2
1 2 3 J155L
SR12 Cooling Fan 1 2 3

Main Motor
J151 J158
Sensor
3 2 1
J155H
Arch Sensor
321
purposeJ168LH
SOLD13
3 2 1
Polygon Motor
SOLD14
FSR_M_CW_CCW
3 2 1
Multi-purpose J168D 3 2 1 J155D J900L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J161DHTray Pickup SL2
FSR_M_DEC
J163L
SNS_TN_FULL
P_FULL_SNS
FSR_M_ACC
FSR_M_FG
J161L
M
1 2 3
Tray Paper Sensor J801 J163DH 1
M 2 3 4 5 6
3 2 1
Solenoid Cassette 1
+24VU
+24VU
123 3 2 1
SL
J161D 2 4 6 8 10 12 J163D 6 5 4 3 2 1 J900LH
GND
GND
+3.3VR
3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J165 4 3 2 1
+3.3VR
1 2
GND
1 2 3 4 5
Pickup Solenoid
GND
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
SL 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J802 J172 J164L
J157
3 2 1
J154L 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5
SL1 J153L 4 3 2 1 J164LH

J154DH3 J152L
J170
3 2 1
2 1 1 2
J154D J153H J162L 3 2 1 J152DH J900H
J164D
Duplex Solenoid 1 2
FUSE_DETECT
2 1
MM_DEC
REGI_CL
MM_MFG
J152D
SNS CST_P
LOOP_SNS
MM_ACC
MP_P_SNS
GN
ENV_AN_HUM
+3.3VH
ENV_AN_TMP
3 2 1
REGI_SNS
+3.3VR
GND
J153D
+3.3VR
PSU_FAN_LOCK
2 1
GND
+3.3VR
+24VC
+24VU
+24VU
+3.3VH
SL J162DH
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
/VDO2
/VDO1
GND
GND
VDO2
VDO1
CNT2
CNT1
CNT0
PROCESS_FAN_LOCK
P_FAN_LOCK
GND
/BD1
GND
GND
GND
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J900D
DEV_LEVEL_SEN_D
GND
GND
GND
/TN_SNS_CNK
+3.3VH
1 2 J162D
+24VC
PO_ACC
PO_DEC
+24VF
+24VP
PO_FG
+24VC
GND
+24VE
GND
GND
/OPCCHK
+3.3VR
GND
CST_SL
+24VF
GND
OPCST_SL
OP_P_SNS
MULTI_SL
GND
GND
GND
+24VF
GND
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 11
10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E
J231 J215 J220 J219 J213 J214 J212 J221 J210 J209 J233 J211 J230 J205 J204
PCB1
J203 J220 J240 J202 J201
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 8 6 4 2 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
P_CANCEL_SNS1
P_CANCEL_SNS2
11 9 7 5 3 1 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
ADF SL01 Reader Unit
TH_AN_M
TH_AN_S
SNS_P0
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
ADF
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SR02 M02 SR03
/SCLK
Disengagement
/VDO1
SGND
/VDO2
SGND
CIS Unit
/VDO1
/BDO
Document
VDO2
SGND
/SC
GND
Reader Motor
PRACFOT_P
/FSRPWM_N
FSRPWM_P
PCB5
/PRACPWM
/DISDCPWM
PRACMONI
PRDCPWM
FSRFOT_N
DVDCPWM
DISDCFOT
PRACDRV
Solenoid
PRDCFOT
DVDCFOT
DVACFOT
HP Sensor
/TRPPWM
DVACON
SR01 Sensor
TRNFOT
TRPFOT
M01
+3.3VH
+24VH
+24VH
M
NC
GND
GND
GND
CONTROL PANEL PCB Document End SL
ADF Motor
MT13 3 2 1
1 2 1 2 3 4
J1 Sensor J910 M
3 2 1
3 2 1
2 4 6 8 10 12 J1902
1 3 5 7 9 11
J908L 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4
J1911 3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
D D
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
3 2 1 J908D J1901
6 5 4 3 2 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
4 3 2 1 J1901H
J1915H 4 3 2 1 J621
J908DH J1914 J1915
PCB6
J907
FT602
J1914HJ1905
SOLD94
SOLD93
SOLD95
1 2
6 5 4 3 2 1
HVT PCB
/RESET
J1904
/SCL
/AOP
+3.3V
1 2 3 4 5 6
/SI
GND
CSI
RX
TX
GND
+5V
GND
J903L 2 1
J903LH 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1903
1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
J182DH J37DH
J182D 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 J37D
J182L J37L
TR_CABLE
MT12
J167
1 2 3 J89
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 2 3
1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 6 8 10 1 2 3
2 4 6 8 10 12 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 101112 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J913 J912
MT91
J903 J904 2 1 2 1
FT601
PCB2 SR 16 TH2 TH1
1
Fixing Sub Fixing Main
Main Controller PCB Fixing
ZERO_CROSS
AC_VOLTAGE
J166
Thermistor Thermistor
HEATER_ON
CURZX_CPU
Pressure
RELAY_ON
PRE_DET1
PRE_DET2
J938 J908 J918 J922 J932 J933 J901 J915 J160
CURRMS
1 2 3
CURLIM
2 1
J914
3 2 1 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 4 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 5 4 3 2 1
J921
Release
16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
GND
1 2 3
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 1 2 3
SR 5
C Sensor 2 C
1
1
SR 15 Fixing Delivery
SOLD8
Fixing Sensor 1
2
Pressure
RMT_TRIP
TRIP_DET
DCC_ON
J22M
24S_ON
2
SOLD28
SOLD27
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ReleaseJ22F�1 2 1
SP1 J1025
J1020 J22F�2
H1
Sensor 1
2 1 2 1
SW93
1 2 3 4 5
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 Speaker 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
Fixing Heater
Control Card
MT5
MT8 TP3 MT7

Main Switch
3
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
SOLD9
J1101 J1100
1 2
Interface Kit Reader TH2
+3.3VR
GND
+24VE
+24VU
+24VU
GND
CIS
GND
2 1
GND
2
J1024
LINE
Thermo Switch
1 2 J1102
TP
TP
J1202
PCB9
SOLD25
SOLD26
J1201 J1105
+24VS
1
3 2
3 2
GND
GND
+3.3V
前カバーSW
4
MT6
PCB8 Modem PCB
TRIP+
J1103 TEL J25MJ25F
GND
1 2 3 4 5
J40
1
J1301 NT
Off Hook
1 2 3
1 2 3
HOT
NT
HANDSET
PCB10
J1104
HOT
PCB
3 2 1 J26F
J1302
USB　PCB
3 2 1
J26M
B B
HOT
NT
NT
HOT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J320 J312 J71�1 J71�2 J140 J012
PCB3
AC DRIVER PCB
J01�1 J330
J02
J33
J32
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 1011121314 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 101112
Main Switch Left Cover Switch Front Cover Switch J312
J320
SW94 SW2 SW3
MT92 SOLD23 SOLD21 SOLD5
HOT SOLD41 2 2
1
SOLD7
1 2 3 SOLD6
3
PSU_READY
P1 SOLD97
3.3V
3.3V
GND
HOT
NT
GND
GND
24V
24V
1 1
2 2
3 3 SOLD96
A NT
A
J102
J24 SOLD98
J132
J133
3 4
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 3 2 1
SOLD24 SOLD22
PCB4
Power Supply PCB
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-10-1
3
4
General Timing Chart
Basic sequence at printing from cassette 1 ( A4, 2-sided, 1 sheet )

Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing from cassette 1 ( A4, 2-sided, 1 sheet )
Main Power Switch ON
Sequence Warm-up rotation STBY INTR PRINT LSTR
1 Main Motor(M1)
2 Fixing Motor(M3)
3 Polygon Motor(M2)
4 Laser
5 Pre-registration Sensor(SR11)
7 Charging AC Bias
8 Charging DC Bias
9 Developing AC Bias
10 Developing DC Bias
11 Transfer Bias
12 Separation Static Bias
13 Fixing Bias
14 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid(SL2)
15 Registration Clutch(SL1)
17 Duplex Solenoid(SL1)
F-10-2
4
5
Backup Data
Data Location Replace Delete Backup by User Backup by Service
Menu > System Management Settings COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
Engine Main Initializing Initializing Key System R-CON SRVC- HIST *4 ALL *5 Yes/No Method Location to be Yes/No Method Location to be
Controller PCB Controller Address Book and Certificate Management *2 DAT *3 stored stored
PCB *1 Settings
Address Book Main Controller - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
Settings Manu Preferences Main Controller - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
Timer Settings Main Controller - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
Common Settings Main Controller - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
Copy Settings Main Controller - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
Fax Settings Main Controller - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes *6 Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
Scan Settings Main Controller - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
Memory Media Print Settings Main Controller - Clear - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
Printer Settings Main Controller - Clear - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
System Management Settings Main Controller - Clear - - Clear - - - Clear *8 Yes Remote UI *11 PC, USB No - -
LUI *12 memory
Key and Certificate Main Controller - Clear - Clear *7 - Clear No - - No - -
Serial Number Main Controller - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
Job History Main Controller - Clear - - - - - Clear Clear No - - No - -

Service mode Service mode setting values (Reader) Main Controller - Clear - - - Clear - - - No - - No - -
Service mode setting values(Main Controller) Main Controller - Clear - - - - Clear - Clear No - - Yes Service mode USB memory
*9
Service mode setting values (Engine Controller) Engine Controller Clear - - - - - - - - No - - Yes Service mode Main Controller
*10
T-10-3
*1. Log data such as Mac address, USB serial number, printer-related setting values, scanner-related setting values, user data, and logs are initialized.
*2. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are initialized.
*3. Service data is cleared. User data is not cleared. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized.
*4. The logs (communication management, print, jam, error, and alarm) are cleared.
*5. The user data, service data, logs, and system administrator are initialized. (The system manager ID and password are changed back to the default values.) The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized.
*6. Excluding Fax Setup Guide
*7. When the key and certificate are initialized, TLS authentication of IEEE802.1X and the SSL setting are changed to "OFF".
*8. The system administrator ID and the password are changed back to the default values. <Counter meter-installed model> ID: 7654321 / PWD: 7654321.
*9. FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT / FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
*10. FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN / FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN
*11. Settings/Regstration > System Management Settings > Import/Export > Export
*12. Menu > System Management Settings > Import/Export > Export
5
Appendix > Soft Counter Specifications > Soft counter specifications
6
Soft Counter Specifications No. Counter Details

071 Toner bottle (Black)
101 Total 1
Soft counter specifications 102 Total 2
104 Total ( Small)
The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows:
108 Total ( Black1)
No. Counter Details 109 Total ( Black2)
000 to 199 Total 113 Total ( Black/ Small)
200 to 299 Copy 114 Total 1 (2-Sided)
300 to 399 Print 115 Total 2 (2-Sided)
400 to 499 Copy and print 117 Small (2-Sided)
500 to 599 Scan 126 Total A1
600 to 699 Memory media print 127 Total A2
700 to 799 Reception print 129 Total A( Small)
800 to 899 Report print 132 Total A( Black1)
900 to 999 Transmission
133 Total A( Black2)
T-10-4
137 Total A ( Black/ Small)
Meanings of symbols in tables 138 Total A1 (2-Sided)
• Copy: Local copy 139 Total A2 (2-Sided)
• Copy A: Local copy 141 SmallA (2-Sided)
• Print: PDL print + report print 150 Total B1
151 Total B2
• Print A: PDL print + report print
153 Total B( Small)
• Scan: Black and white scan + color scan 156 Total B( Black1)
*This product does not have the function of "Remote Copy" and "Box Print". 157 Total B( Black2)
161 Total B ( Black/ Small)
162 Total B1 (2-Sided)
163 Total B2 (2-Sided)
165 SmallB (2-Sided)
181 Black Toner
201 Copy (Total 1)
202 Copy (Total 2)
204 Copy ( Small)
205 CopyA (Total 1)
206 CopyA (Total 2)
208 CopyA ( Small)
209 Local Copy (Total 1)
210 Local Copy (Total 2)
212 Local Copy ( Small)
221 Copy( Black1)
222 Copy( Black2)
228 Copy( Black/ Small)
238 Copy( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
249 CopyA( Black1)
6
7
No. Counter Details No. Counter Details
250 CopyA( Black2) 646 Memory Media Print (Black/ Small)
256 CopyA( Black/ Small) 656 Memory Media Print (Black/ Small/2-Sided)
266 CopyA( Black/ Small/2-Sided) 701 Receive Print (Total 1)
277 Local Copy( Black1) 702 Receive Print (Total 2)
278 Local Copy( Black2) 704 Receive Print ( Small)
284 Local Copy( Black/ Small) 709 Receive Print ( Black1)
294 Local Copy( Black/ Small/2-Sided) 710 Receive Print ( Black2)
301 Print (Total 1) 716 Receive Print ( Black/ Small)
302 Print (Total 2) 726 Receive Print ( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
304 Print ( Small) 801 Report Print (Total 1)
305 Print A (Total 1) 802 Report Print (Total 2)
306 Print A (Total 2) 804 Report Print ( Small)
308 Print A ( Small) 809 Report Print ( Black1)
313 Print ( Black1) 810 Report Print ( Black2)
314 Print ( Black2) 816 Report Print ( Black/ Small)
320 Print ( Black/ Small) 921 TX ScanTotal 5(Color )
330 Print ( Black/ Small/2-Sided) 922 TX ScanTotal 5( Black)
331 PDLPrint (Total 1) 939 Remote Scan(Color )
332 PDLPrint (Total 2) 940 Remote Scan( Black)
334 PDLPrint ( Small) 945 TX Scan/E-Mail(Color )
339 PDLPrint ( Black1) 946 TX Scan/E-Mail( Black)
340 PDLPrint ( Black2) 959 Memory Media Scan(Color )
346 PDLPrint ( Black/ Small) 960 Memory Media Scan( Black)
356 PDLPrint ( Black/ Small/2-Sided) T-10-5
404 Copy+Print ( Black/ Small)
405 Copy+Print ( Black2)
406 Copy+Print ( Black1)
412 Copy+Print ( Small)
413 Copy+Print (2)
414 Copy+Print (1)
422 Copy+Print ( Black/ Small/2-Sided)
501 Scan (Total 1)
505 BlackScan (Total 1)
506 BlackScan (Total 2)
508 BlackScan ( Small)
509 Color Scan (Total 1)
510 Color Scan (Total 2)
512 Color Scan ( Small)
631 Memory Media Print (Total 1)
632 Memory Media Print (Total 2)
634 Memory Media Print (Small)
639 Memory Media Print (Black1)
640 Memory Media Print (Black2)
7

Ir1430 - 1435 SM E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir1430 - 1435 SM E

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir1430 - 1435 SM E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

imageRUNNER 1435/1430 Series

Service Manual Rev1

Copyright CANON INC. 2015

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check. 1x Remove the claw.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1x Install the screw. 1x Tighten the screw.

Laser Safety---------------------------------------------------------------------0-6 2 Technology

Handling of Laser System

Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Turn Power Switch ON Safety of Toner

Main Power Switch

Notes when Handling the Lithium and Ni-MH

Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.

Notes before it Works Serving Notes on Assembly / Disassembly

Product Lineup Option

Copy Card Reader-F1

Control Yes Yes Yes - -

Product feature Product Specifications

Recycled paper EXECR Yes No No

Name of Parts [1]

[14] [1] [2] [3]

Main Power Switch

Energy Saver Key

[1] Main Power Switch:

Basic Configuration Basic Sequence

PRINT Interval from initial rotation • Forms image on -

Original Exposure and Feed System Item Specification / Function

■■Specifications / Controls / Functions configuration mode

1) Layout drawing of major parts.

F-2-3 3) Drive system drawing of motor and solenoid.

Main power switch ON Start Key ON

STBY SCFW SCRV STBY

Shading Shading ：Forward

F-2-7 CIS unit HP sensor(SR03)

Copyboard glass Shading Leading Trailing

E202-0002 : CIS unit HP error

Black / white shading Name Outline Supported Print Mode

CIS unit HP sensor(SR03)

Stream reading Copyboard glass Shading

1-sided original reading operation 1-sided original reading operation

- Feed the 1st sheet - Waiting for reading front side of

- Waiting for reading front side - Start reading front side of

2-sided original reading operation 2-sided original reading operation

- Feed the 1st sheet and - Feed to the reverse point

- Idle feed the 2nd sheet and

- Pass through the 2nd sheet reading position

- Deliver the 2nd sheet and End of job

[1] [2] [3] [4]

2) Reverse movement during image scan

Pickup Roller Original

Document End Sensor

Document End Sensor Feed Roller

Document End Sensor Feed Roller

Interval Reading position

Feed Roller Delivery Roller

M01 Document End Sensor

●● Dust Detection Avoidance 0.5mm 0.5mm

• Execution Platen Guide